JP6941894B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game console represented by a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

Some conventional game consoles are provided with light emitting means (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, in the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the light emitting means.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table characterized by light emitting means.

According to the present invention
It is a game table equipped with a movable body that can move.
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means, and is a movable body.
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means, and is
The movable body is a movable body having a driving means, and is
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion, and is a movable body.
The movable body is a movable body having a second movable portion, and is a movable body.
The first movable portion is a movable portion capable of executing the first movable operation by driving the driving means.
In a certain operation intermediate state of the first movable operation, the first light emitting means does not overlap with the first movable portion.
In the certain operating state, the second light emitting means does not overlap with the first moving portion.
In the operation end state of the first movable operation, the first light emitting means does not overlap with the first movable portion.
In the operation end state, said second light emitting means is Ri and Do heavy said first movable part,
In a state prior to the certain operating state, the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable portion.
In the previous state, the second light emitting means does not overlap with the first moving portion.
At the end of the operation, the second light emitting means does not overlap with the second moving portion.
A game table characterized by this is provided.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic light emitting means.

It is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. It shows the block diagram of the game table. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol mode of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure is shown. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU of the 1st sub-control unit. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU of the 2nd sub-control unit. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU of the liquid crystal control unit. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit. (C) It is a flowchart of the liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt processing. (D) It is a flowchart of VDP image control processing. It is explanatory drawing of the movable body provided in the front frame door. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the transmission unit 700 and a perspective view of the drive unit thereof. It is an exploded perspective view of a drive unit. It is operation explanatory drawing of the drive unit. It is explanatory drawing of the chance button. It is explanatory drawing of the chance button. It is explanatory drawing of the display body. It is explanatory drawing of the control data. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a transparent part unit. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a transparent part unit. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a transparent part unit. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a chance button. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a chance button. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a chance button. It is a flowchart of the processing example executed by the 1st sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of the processing example executed by the 1st sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of the processing example executed by the 1st sub-control unit. It is a schematic front view of another example game board. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the configuration of the game board of FIG. 29. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 29. It is explanatory drawing of a gap. It is a figure which shows the mode at the time of transportation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the drive mechanism of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of a light emitting unit. It is explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is explanatory drawing of the shielding device. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body. It is explanatory drawing of the operation order of a movable body. It is a flowchart of the processing example executed by the 2nd sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of the processing example executed by the 2nd sub-control unit. It is a flowchart of the processing example executed by the 2nd sub-control unit. It is explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. It is operation explanatory drawing of the movable body of another example. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure is shown. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the movable body control process. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the movable body interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the door side effect movable body control processing executed by the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the door side effect movable body control process at the time of power-on which is executed by the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a figure which shows the mode that the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 corresponding to one Embodiment of this invention is opened step by step. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened in the first modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73. It is a figure which shows the state in which the front frame door 106 is opened stepwise in the 2nd modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened when the power is turned on in the third modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73. It is a figure which shows the modification of the power-on operation described with reference to FIG. 76. In the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 75, it is a figure which shows the state when the electric power cutoff and power recovery are instantaneously performed while the door side effect movable body is operating. (A) is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position. (B) It is a side sectional view of the whole chance button 700 at the operation completion position. (C) It is a side sectional view of the whole chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 which was in the operation completion position. It is the figure which showed by extracting only the lower case 704b and the rotating member 708b in each state of (d)-(f) (a)-(c). (A) It is an external perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage dish when the chance button 700 is in the initial position. (B) It is an external perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage dish in the state (during operation) that the chance button 700 is moving from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) It is an external perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage dish when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. It is a figure which showed an example of the correspondence relation between the operation state of the chance button 700, the acceptance / rejection of the detection result of the pressing operation of the chance button 700, and the execution / rejection of the operation acceptance effect. (A) It is an external perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage dish when the chance button 700 is in the initial position. (B) It is an external perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage dish when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. (C) It is an external perspective view around the door 108 with a ball storage dish when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (D) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is in the initial position. (E) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. (F) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (A) It is an external perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 before operation. (B) It is an external perspective view which shows the periphery of the chance button 750 after the operation is completed. It is a front view which looked at the chance button 750 from the direction of the 2nd operation part 758. (A) It is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the initial position. (B) It is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the operation completion position. (C) It is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). (D) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform when the chance button 750 is in an initial position. (E) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform when the chance button 750 is in the operation completion position. (F) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a front view which shows the slot machine 100 in the state which the front door 102 is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) It is an external perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (B) It is an external perspective view around the bet button 132 in the state (during operation) that the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position to the operation completion position. (C) It is an external perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the state which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. (B) It is a figure for demonstrating the state that the bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button. (C) FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (D) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the initial position. (A) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation). (B) It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (C) FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when the bet button 132 fails). (D) It is a figure which showed an example of a normal production. (E) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position. (G) It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). It is a figure which showed an example of various productions. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the first invention, as seen from the front side (player side) of the pachinko machine 100 in which the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are opened. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the state that the inner frame 104 or the front door 105 is open. An example of a case where the power switch 178 is operated to turn on the power while the inner frame 104 is open to the outer frame 102 but the front door 105 is closed to the inner frame 104 is a step. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 100 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the power is turned on all at once by the island equipment step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102 step by step. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the inner frame 104 is opened in a stepwise manner during an effect operation. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104 step by step. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the example shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105 step by step. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the example shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105 step by step. The second modification shown in FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example in which a door opening error occurs and the effect movable body that continues the operation according to the effect data and the effect movable body whose operation is prohibited are replaced. Is. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the door body is opened stepwise in the state which the effect movable body is at the position deviated from the initial position by an external force. It is a figure which shows stepwise an example of the case where the inner frame 104 is opened during the effect operation of the movable body different from what has been described so far as a door side effect movable body 2241. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 110 step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 112. It is a table that summarizes the main errors other than the door opening error. It is a figure which shows an example stepwise in the case where the second error occurs during the production operation. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 116 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 117 step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 118 step by step. It is a figure which shows the example stepwise which prohibits the operation according to the effect data of the door side effect movable body 2241 even if the error occurrence timing is before the operation start timing. It is a figure which shows the example of the case where the power is turned off and the power is restored instantly during the confirmation operation step by step. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 121 step by step. It is a figure which shows the modification of the board side effect movable body 2242. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. An example of a display symbol on the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of a stop display symbol of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (c). Is an example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub-control unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main process, (b) is the 1st. The flow of the sub-control unit command reception interrupt process is shown, and (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view showing a state (No. 1) in which the effect movable body 224 is moved to the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view showing a state (No. 2) in which the effect movable body 224 is moved to the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is an external perspective view of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to one Embodiment of this invention seen from the front side. It is an external perspective view of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to one Embodiment of this invention seen from the back side. It is an exploded perspective view of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to one Embodiment of this invention. It is an external perspective view of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to one Embodiment of this invention seen from the back side. It is a front view of the production movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of an effect movable body of the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the rear side. It is a rear view of the production movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of an effect movable body of the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the rear side. It is a rear view and a partial cross-sectional view of the effect movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example (the 1) in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example (the 2) in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example (the 3) in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example (the 4) in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example (the 5) in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production example (the 6) in the pachinko machine 100 by one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view which looked at the slot machine as a game table from the front by the modified example of one Embodiment of this invention. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 with the back cover attached from the back side (back side). It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 with the back surface cover removed from the back surface (back surface). (A) It is a schematic front view showing the sub-control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 extracted. (B) is a side sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative pattern is shown. (C) An example of a stop display symbol of a normal figure is shown. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200. FIG. 5 is a partially enlarged view showing an enlarged view of the vicinity of the starting port (gate) 228 of the game board 200. It is a schematic rear view which looked at the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed from the rear side. It is a perspective view of the rear unit 200a in a state where the accessory unit 950 is removed, as viewed from the rear side. It is a partially enlarged view which shows the area around the game ball storage part enlarged. It is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950. It is an exploded perspective view of the falling deployment accessory unit 700. It is an exploded perspective view of the falling deployment accessory unit 700. It is an exploded perspective view of the falling deployment accessory unit 700. (A) It is an exploded perspective view which showed by extracting the peripheral member of the first structure 712b. (B) It is an exploded perspective view which showed by extracting the peripheral member of the 4th structure 712a. It is a schematic front view which showed the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the fourth structure 712a. It is an exploded perspective view of the ascending accessory unit 750. It is an exploded perspective view of the launching accessory unit 800. It is an enlarged perspective view of the relay board 806 included in the launching accessory unit 800. It is an exploded perspective view of the V forming accessory unit 850. It is an external perspective view of the right light guide plate 854h of the V forming accessory right unit 854 as seen from the back side. It is a front view of the center accessory unit 900. It is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900. It is a figure which took out only the falling deployment accessory unit 700, and showed the up-and-down operation of the drop deployment accessory 712. It is a figure which showed the up-and-down movement of the fall-deployed accessory 712 in the fall-deployed accessory unit 700 installed on the game board 200. It is a figure which showed the rotation operation of the fall-deployment accessory 712 by pulling out only the fall-deployment accessory unit 700. It is a figure which showed the rotation operation of the fall-deployment accessory 712 in the drop-deployment accessory unit 700 installed in the game board 200. It is a figure which showed the rotation operation of the fall-deployment accessory 712 in the drop-deployment accessory unit 700 installed in the game board 200. It is a figure which took out only the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800, and showed the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800. It is a figure which showed the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 installed on the game board 200. (A) It is a side sectional view of the game board 200 in a state where the ascending accessory unit 750 is located at the initial position. (B) It is a side sectional view of the game board 200 in a state where the ascending accessory unit 750 is operating. It is a figure which showed the operation of the V forming accessory unit 850 by extracting only the V forming accessory unit 850. It is a figure which showed the operation of the V forming accessory unit 850 in the state which was installed in the game board 200. It is a top view of the board case. It is a partial perspective view of the substrate case of FIG. 193. It is a top view of the substrate housed in the substrate case of FIG. 193. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 193, (b) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 193, and (c) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 193. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. (A1) to (d4) are diagrams showing a configuration example of an inner wall. (A1) to (a9) are diagrams showing a configuration example of an inner wall. It is a perspective view of the transmission unit and the drive unit thereof. It is an exploded perspective view of a drive unit. It is operation explanatory drawing of the drive unit. It is explanatory drawing of the drive unit. It is a rear view of the front frame door. It is a partially enlarged view of the back surface of the front frame door. It is a partially enlarged view of the back surface of the front frame door. It is operation explanatory drawing of the drive unit. It is operation explanatory drawing of the drive unit. It is operation explanatory drawing of the drive unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The present invention can be applied to various game consoles such as pachinko machines and slot machines. Further, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a ball is enclosed and the enclosed ball is circulated and used in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed ball as a launching ball. The payout of the ball may be carried out by credit.

The following embodiments are roughly classified into six embodiments of Embodiments A to F, and each embodiment and examples, modifications, and the like included in each embodiment can be appropriately combined with each other. be. Unless otherwise specified, the reference numerals indicating the respective configurations are used uniformly only in the embodiments A, B, C, D, E or F. Therefore, for example, the same code as the code of the embodiment A may be used as a code indicating another configuration in the embodiment B.

<Embodiment A>
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a game table frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 by the operation of the player, a chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136, and a game store. A ball lending operation button 140 that gives an instruction to lend a ball to the installed card unit (CR unit), a return operation button 142 that gives an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a player's balance and a card. It includes a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the state of the unit, and a button unit 190. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown here) inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate the sprocket by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to reach the upper plate 126. Depending on the configuration, the ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, a main control board case 158 for accommodating the main control board 156 constituting the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and an effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control processing related to the above, and the second sub-control unit 500 that performs the control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 are configured. The first sub-control board case 162 for accommodating the second sub-control board 164, the liquid crystal control board case 682 for accommodating the liquid crystal control board 680 constituting the liquid crystal control unit 700 for performing liquid crystal control processing, and the payout of the game ball. A payout control board case 172 for accommodating a payout control board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and a launch that performs control processing for launching a game ball. A launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the control unit 630, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and power on. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at times, and a signal transmission / reception between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are performed. The CR interface unit 186 is arranged. The CR interface unit 186 has, for example, a CR unit connection unit composed of a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector, through which signals are transmitted and received between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. There is.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the back side thereof. The relay board 196 is used for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when the game board 200 is replaced, the game board 200 is replaced with the main body 104 and the hall computer connected via the relay board 196. NS. However, since it is necessary to change the type of signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer depending on the model, the pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 from the front (front) side of the pachinko machine 100 when the game board 200 is removed. It may be configured so that the connection status of is grasped.

Further, in the upper left of the figure of the first sub-control board case 162, for example, a volume adjusting switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 is provided. The volume control switch 192 is composed of, for example, a rotary switch.

As described above, the main control board 156, the first sub control board 160, the second sub control board 164, and the liquid crystal control board 680 are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and are provided on the back of the game board 200. The 170, the launch board 174, and the power supply board 182 are provided on the outer frame 102 because they are commonly used by a plurality of models.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a movable display device 288 are arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, and a second special are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later. The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and in this embodiment, it is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro Liquid Crystal) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The movable display device 288 is also a display device for performing various displays used for the production, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device in this embodiment. Other display devices including a segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. The movable display device 288 includes a motor (not shown), which is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the motor, and when lowered, covers at least a part in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in this embodiment, they are composed of 7-segment LEDs.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and in this embodiment, the special figure changing game is performed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Then, it is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged in. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in this embodiment, only one is arranged directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special drawing start port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the 210 hits and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the hammer 146. And the launching mallet 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches them into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. .. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, the effect movable body 224, and the movable display device 288.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the center of the stage 244 in the first special drawing start port 230. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b is provided at the position. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-like left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a semi-transparent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the obstacle portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

The movable display device 288 is for displaying the effect and is movable. Therefore, in the following description, as the display device, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be referred to as a first display device (main liquid crystal display device), and the movable display device 288 may be referred to as a second display device (sub liquid crystal display device). .. Further, it may be referred to as a (directing) movable body together with a shielding device 246 and a directing movable body 224 that imitates a human arm.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of a game and various devices according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. According to the first sub-control unit 400 to be controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 that mainly controls the effect based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the command transmitted by the main control unit 300. A payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100, and a liquid crystal control unit 700. And, it is composed by.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit (random value generation circuit) 318 (random value generation circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit shall have two counters built-in), a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and an opening of the front frame door. With the sensor circuit 322 for receiving the signals output by various sensors 320 including the sensor, the inner frame open sensor, and the lower plate full tank sensor, and outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302. , A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and display control of the predetermined symbol display device, for example, the normal symbol display device 210. 326 and display control of various status display units 328 (for example, normal figure holding lamp 216, first special figure holding lamp 218, second special figure holding lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for controlling the drive circuit 330 and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the start port 232 of the second special figure, a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the like. Is connected.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Stored in the register. Further, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the counter circuit 318 also latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure start port 232. , The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 issues commands to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that signals can be transmitted, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various production data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, number of times, etc. The counter timer 412 of the above is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 is driven to control the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the game table frame lamp 122). The circuit 420, the drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 246, the button detection sensor 426 and various sensors 430 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136 and the pressing of the button unit 190, and the various sensors 430 and button detection. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402 is connected. The effect movable body 246 may include a movable object (movable body) provided on the front frame door 106 side, a movable part of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190, and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the effect movable body. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal from the sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a basic circuit 502, and a game board lamp drive circuit 530. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the two. The effect movable body 224 may include a movable object (movable body) or the like provided on the game board 200.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path.

<LCD control unit>
Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described. The liquid crystal control unit 700 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and temporarily stores data with the CPU 704 that controls the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 based on the control command. It is provided with a RAM 708 for performing the interface, a ROM 506 for storing a control program and data for controlling the entire liquid crystal control unit 700, data for displaying an image, and the like, and a VDP (video display processor) 710. The CPU 704 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 714A as a system clock.

The VDP 710 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 714B as a system clock, reads out image data and the like stored in the CGROM 716 based on the signal from the CPU 404, and uses the work area of the VRAM 718. A display image is generated and the image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

<Block diagram of the game console>
The connection relationship between each board (control board) of the pachinko machine 100 and the like will be described with reference to FIG. The figure shows each (control) board or the like constituting the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, the payout control unit 600, the liquid crystal control unit 700, and the like, a display device, a movable body, and the like. It is a block diagram which shows the connection relationship with.

On the game board 200 side, the pachinko machine 100 has a board surface board 200b, a first sub control board 160, a symbol display board 212, 214, 210, 328, a special figure 1 start port sensor 230, and a special figure 2 start on the main control board 156. The mouth sensor 232 is connected. A valve surface relay board 200a is connected to the board surface substrate 200b. Various sensors 320 and each solenoid 332 are connected to the board surface relay board 200a. As a result, the ball detection sensor detected that the game ball entered the general winning opening (winning opening) 226, the normal drawing starting port (gate) 228, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second starting port 232. In this case, the switch signal is transmitted to the main control unit 300. Further, a solenoid signal for opening and closing the second special figure start port (ordinary electric accessory) 232 is transmitted from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. Further, a solenoid signal for opening and closing the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (large winning opening) is transmitted from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. Further, a count signal for counting the winning balls is transmitted to the main control unit 300 from the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (large winning opening).

A liquid crystal control board 680 is connected to the first sub control board 160, and a decorative symbol display device (main liquid crystal display device) 208 and a movable display device (sub liquid crystal display device) 288 are connected to the liquid crystal control board 680. .. Further, the second sub control board 164 is connected to the first sub control board 160, and the sub liquid crystal movable part 2241 (movable part of the movable display device 288) and the movable object M on the board surface side are connected to the second sub control board 164. (The effect movable body 244, the shielding device 246, etc.) and the board surface side lighting board 200c on which the game board lamp 532 is mounted are connected.

As a result, the first sub control board 160 controls according to the command of the main control board 156, and the liquid crystal control board 680 and the second sub control board 164 control according to the command of the first sub control board 160. Specifically, the processing information (command signal) generated by the main control unit 300 is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the processing information or the processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 is the liquid crystal control unit. It is transmitted to 700 and the second sub-control unit 500. For example, data for driving the effect movable body 224, data for lighting and emitting light of the effect movable body 224, data for driving the movable display device 288, and the like are transmitted from the first sub control board 160 to the second sub control board 164. NS. Further, data or a clock signal for causing the lighting on the game board 200 side to emit light is transmitted from the drive circuit 516 of the second sub-control unit 500 to the board surface side lighting board 724. Further, signals for display control of the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, and various status display units 328 are transmitted from the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. Further, the control data of the first sub control board 160 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 680, and the image data is transmitted to the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with an inner frame relay board 104b, an inner frame peripheral board 104c, and a board frame relay board 104d on the main body 104 side, and relays between the board on the game board 200 side and the board on the main body 104 side. Connecting.

The inner frame relay board 104b is connected to the main control board 156 and the payout control board 170. As a result, a command signal related to, for example, payout control (for example, the number of payouts and information for communicating with the external terminal plate 104a) is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 sends the main control unit 300. Error information of the discharge system is transmitted to. Further, the inner frame peripheral board 104c connects the first sub-control board 160 and the power supply board 104e, and the board frame relay board 104d is for buttons 136 and buttons provided on the first sub-control board 160 and the front frame door 106. The speaker 120 is connected via the various lamps 138 and 418, the door-side movable accessory 106a, the door-side lighting board 106b on which the various lamps 418 are mounted, and the door-side lighting board 106b. Button 136 may include a chance button and the like. The door-side movable accessory 106a may include a movable object (movable body) provided on the front frame door 106 side.

As a result, data and clock signals for causing the various lamps 418 to emit light are transmitted from the drive circuit 420 of the first sub-control unit 400 to the door-side lighting board 106b. Further, audio data is transmitted from the sound source IC 416 to the speaker 120. Further, the detection result of the button detection sensor 426 or the like by operating the chance button 136 or the button unit 190 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

The payout control board 170 is connected to the payout sensor 604, the payout motor 602, the glass frame switch 104g, the inner frame switch 104f, the game ball rental device connection board 104h, the power supply board 104e, and the launch control board 104j. The opening and closing of the front frame door 106 and the opening and closing of the inner frame (main body 104) are detected by the glass frame switch 104g and the inner frame switch 104f, and can be recognized by the main control board 156. The launch control board 104j is connected to the glass frame relay board 104k. The glass frame relay board 104k is connected to the handle relay board 106d, the full tank switch 106g, and the frequency display board 106h. A firing volume 106c, a firing stop switch 106f, and a touch sensor 106e are connected to the firing handle substrate 106d.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 6A to 6C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained. FIG. 3A shows an example of a stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". conduct. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol according to the present invention.

Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of No. 2 (which also corresponds to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, or after the start of the "variation display of the special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is displayed. The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, and hereinafter, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of displays up to is called the symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. In the figure (a), 10 types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display, and the white part in the figure is turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the location of the segment where the black part is lit is shown.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure" is intentionally displayed. By providing "G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced. Further, "Special Figure I" is the first out-of-line symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second out-of-line symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "Special Figure A" is also prepared as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 6B shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special symbol starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208. In each symbol display area of area 208c, "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3"-> ... "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> ... is displayed in this order. Perform "variable display of decorative pattern" to switch. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure E", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure F", or the first small hit of "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of the "special figure I" and the second deviation of the "special figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in the figure (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 6C shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of general map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the Furu-zu fluctuating game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the Furu-zu fluctuating game. Also in this figure (c), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, there are two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter, the normal figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer. Update the two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the normal drawing starting opening 228. It is judged that there was a passage of. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for counting the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the number of winning balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, it is determined whether or not the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, the first variable winning opening 234, and the second variable winning opening 235 have been won. judge. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When the first special figure start port 230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is set from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And the value is acquired as the special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the second special figure start port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. In addition to acquiring the value as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value, the value is stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is acquired as the normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When a prize is won in the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

In step S219, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (a variable game of the normal map).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the out-of-line symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 6 (c)) and the off symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 6 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332 of the above, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 6 (a) are on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and the normal figure probability change flag is on. Is the special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure. Special figure F when the probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure F when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and special figure H when the second small hit flag is on. , The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 so as to be in the special figure I when the first missed flag is on and in the special figure I when the second missed flag is on. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first missed symbol (special symbol) Confirmation display of any one of I) and the second outlier symbol (special symbol J) is performed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the second variable winning opening 235 (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the second variable winning opening 235 (in the case of special figure 1, the first variable winning opening 234)) The door member 235a (in the case of special drawing 1, the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234) is used as a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 235a (in the case of special drawing 1, the door member 234a). Is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) The door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 (in the case of special drawing 1, the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234) is used as a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 235a (in the case of special drawing 1). Is to output a signal for holding the door member 234a) in the closed state, and set information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which repeats the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the effect waiting period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times 100 times is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, there is a higher possibility of hitting the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special-figure variable game are shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state. Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of games will be played in the variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game, and many games will be played in the second special figure starting opening 232 until the game ball enters the jackpot. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases due to the ball entering the ball and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is different, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure start port 232. However, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230 is notified with priority.

In step S233, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the special figure The value of the probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has been won, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 has been won. Including presence / absence.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. , When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special drawing start port 232 and the first variable winning opening 234 (or the second variable winning opening 235), or via display circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit described above.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In addition, each movable body is also initialized, and the setting can be set as the first state.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area is 33 (33 ms) or more, and this process is repeated until the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33, and the value of the timer variable CNT is 33 or more. When becomes, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable CNT. The value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed as 33, 33, 34 for each transition from the process of step S303 to the process of step S305.

In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines and processes whether or not a command from the main control unit 300, a command from the second sub-control unit 500, and a return command from the liquid crystal control unit 700 have been received.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. Further, the effect lottery process is performed based on the command from the main control unit 300, and the liquid crystal command and the box data setting process (described later) for setting the part data at a predetermined position are performed. If there is parts data in the position after receiving the return command (described later), the parts data to be transmitted to the speaker 120, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the effect movable body 246, 224, etc. are set.

In step S311, when the press of the chance button is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. For example, when the notification condition is satisfied, a command is output so that the notification (for example, effect) by the speaker 120 is executed. Further, when an abnormality notification condition related to detection of fraudulent activity or failure is satisfied, a command is output so that the notification by the speaker 120 (for example, notification for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality) is executed. In step S317, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. For example, when the light emission conditions of the various lamps 418 are satisfied, a command for the light emission is output.

In step S319, if there is a command to the movable body in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. Examples of the movable body include a shielding device 246 and a movable body (rotating body) in the chance button 136, and may also include another movable body described later. ,
In step S321, if the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 or a liquid crystal command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700, a setting is made to output this control command. , Return to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 1 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process to add 1 to the original timer variable. Store in the storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms.

In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random value value update process, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable CNT is 33 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. The value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed as 33, 33, 34 for each transition from the process of step S703 to the process of step S707.

In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable CNT.

In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S709, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 122, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the movable object M on the board surface side (movable part 2441 of the movable display device 288, effect movable body 224, shielding device 246, etc.), this command is given. The output is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 1 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is set to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 10 (a). Add and store in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms.

In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

<Processing of LCD control unit 700>
Next, the processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 700. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of VDP image processing.

First, in step S1001 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S1001. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 708, and the like are performed. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the timer variable CNT is 33 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S1005. The value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area may be changed as 33, 33, 34 for each transition from the process of step S1003 to the process of step S1005.

In step S1005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable CNT.

In step S1007, command processing is performed. The CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S1009, the VDP command transmission process is performed. For example, when an image display instruction is given from the first sub-control unit 400, a command is transmitted to the VDP 710 in order to cause the VDP 710 to perform image control processing.

In step S1011, a return command transmission process is performed. When the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 or the movable display device 288 to display the requested image, the liquid crystal control unit 700 transmits a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 and returns to step S1003.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the liquid crystal control unit 700 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 708.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. The liquid crystal control unit 700 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 1 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute with.

In step S1201 of the liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 708 described in step S1003 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 11 (a). And store it in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S1003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or more every 33 ms.

In step S1203 of the liquid crystal control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random number value is updated.

Next, the image control process of the VDP 710 that received the command in the VDP command transmission process of step S1009 in the main process of the liquid crystal control unit will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S1301, the image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 704 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 718 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and / or the movable display device 288. Next, the CPU 704 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the CGROM 716), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 718), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 710 based on the position information table, and then the image from the CG ROM 716 to the VRAM 7186. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP710 transfers image data from the CGROM 716 to the VRAM 718 based on the instructions set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 710 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 704.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 710 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1305. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S1305, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order for the CPU 704 to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 718 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 710 in step S1301, the information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 718, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP718. The VDP718 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S1307, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 704 instructs the VDP 710 to start drawing an image. The VDP 710 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 704.

In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 710 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1311, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered. In step S1311, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 708 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Other configuration examples of movable bodies>
Next, an example of a movable body applicable to the pachinko machine 100 will be described. First, an example of a movable body applicable to a door body such as a front frame door 106 and a door 108 with a ball storage plate will be described, and then an example of a movable body applicable to the game board 200 will be described. Further, the movable body mounted on the movable body will be described. In the drawings used for the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations corresponding to the configurations of the pachinko machines 100 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 11.

<Example of movable body applicable to door body>
The game table of FIG. 12A is provided with a front frame door 106, a front frame door 106'instead of the door 108 with a ball storage plate, and a door 108'with a ball storage plate. The front frame door 106'is provided with a transmissive unit 700' as a movable body. The transmissive unit 700'is also a configuration that replaces the transparent plate member 118 described above. The door 108'with a ball storage plate is provided with a chance button 700 and a display body 900 as movable bodies. The chance button 700 is also a configuration that replaces the chance button 136 described above.

FIG. 12A shows a case where the transmissive unit 700', the chance button 700, and the display body 900 are in the initial state, and these movable bodies can operate from this initial state. In the case of the present embodiment, the state of the movable body is based on the position of all or a part of the movable body, and the initial state means that the position of the movable body is the initial position. Therefore, the initial state may be called the initial position. The movement of the movable body includes the case where the entire position of the movable body changes, or the case where the position of a part of the movable body changes. A change in the position of a part of the movable body may be referred to as a change in the posture of the movable body.

FIG. 12B shows a state in which the transmissive unit 700'has been moved to the maximum moving position. In the present embodiment, the transmissive unit 700'is movable between the initial position shown in FIG. 12 (a) and the maximum moving position shown in FIG. 12 (b). In the case of the present embodiment, the movement of the transmissive unit 700'is a rotation about the lower portion thereof, and the transmissive unit 700' has the initial position in FIG. 12 (a) and the maximum movement position in FIG. 12 (b). Posture changes between. The transmissive unit 700'is provided at a position where the player can contact, and in the state of FIG. 12B, functions as a button (a part of the switch) that the player can operate.

FIG. 12C shows a state in which the chance button 700 has moved to the maximum moving position. In the present embodiment, the chance button 700 can be moved between the initial position shown in FIG. 12 (a) and the maximum moving position shown in FIG. 12 (c). In the case of the present embodiment, the movement of the chance button 700 is a vertical movement. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can touch it, and in the present embodiment, it functions as a button (a part of the switch) that the player can operate.

FIG. 12D shows a state in which the display body 900 has moved to the maximum moving position. In the present embodiment, the display body 900 can be moved between the initial position shown in FIG. 12 (a) and the maximum moving position shown in FIG. 12 (d). In the case of the present embodiment, the movement of the display body 900 is rotation. The display body 900 is provided at a position where the player cannot contact the display body 900.

<Transparent unit 700'>
The transmission unit 700'will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the transmissive unit 700'and a perspective view of the drive unit 830'of the transmissive unit 700'. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the drive unit 830'. FIG. 15 is an operation explanatory view of the drive unit 830'.

The transmissive unit 700'is driven by the transmissive unit 702', the LED substrate 706', the base unit 708', the protective plate 710', the decorative member 712', the follow-up unit 714', and the link member 716'. It has a shaft 718'and a fixed portion 720'.

The transmission unit 702'is a glass plate, a resin transparent plate, or the like, which is arranged on the rearmost surface (game board side) of the transmission unit 700'. The decorative symbol display device 208 and the like of the game board 200 described above are visually recognized by the player through the transmission unit 702'.

The LED substrate 706'is a plurality of LED groups 706A'to 706D' mounted mainly on the inner circumference of a substantially annular substrate, which mainly emits toward the center of the ring, and is fitted on the outer periphery of the transmission portion 702'. Is done. In the LED group 706A', several LEDs are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction of the substrate at a position corresponding to the upper portion of the transmission portion 702', and the LED group 706B'is located at a position corresponding to the right side portion of the transmission portion 702'. The LED group 706C'is located at a position corresponding to the lower portion of the transmitting portion 702', and the LED group 706D'is located at a position corresponding to the left portion of the transmitting portion 702'. It is installed.

The protective plate 710'is made of, for example, a glass plate or a transparent plate made of resin, and is arranged in front of the base portion 702'to protect the LED substrate 706' and the transmissive portion 702'. The decorative member 712'is a substantially annular member arranged on the foremost surface (player side).

The base portion 708'is attached with a decorative member 712', a protective plate 710', an LED substrate 706', and a transmission portion 702', and is supported so as to be integrally movable by a drive unit 830'. It is a member. A guide shaft 708A'that engages with a guide hole (not shown here) of the drive unit 830'is provided at the upper end of the base portion 708'. Further, a drive shaft insertion portion 708B'is provided at the lower end portion of the base portion 708'. The drive shaft insertion portion 708B'is attached to the fixing portion 720' via the fixing member 722'. The fixing portion 720'is a member for fixing the transmission portion unit 700'to the front frame door 106', and has insertion holes 720A' at both ends thereof. The drive shaft 718'is inserted into the insertion hole 720A'of the fixed portion 720'and the drive shaft insertion portion 708B'of the base portion 708'. As a result, the upper part of the base portion 708'can be moved in the front-rear direction along the guide hole of the drive unit 830', and as a whole, the base portion 708'move between the initial position and the maximum movement position around the drive shaft 718'. Rotation) is possible.

A follow-up portion 714'is attached to the side surface of the base portion 708'by a link member 716'. The link member 716'movably fixes the base member 708' to the following portion 714'. More specifically, when the base portion 708'starts to move from the initial position to the maximum moving position, the following portion 714' does not move, only the base portion 708'moves first, but the base portion 708'is predetermined. When moving to the position (the front end of the follow-up portion 714'), the link member 716'engages with the follow-up portion 714', and thereafter, the follow-up portion 714' and the base portion 708' both move forward. It has become. As the base portion 708'moves in the front-rear direction, the LED substrate 706' also moves in the front-rear direction.

The drive unit 830'has a first drive unit (stepping motor) 838', a second drive unit 852', and a first gear inside a housing composed of a substantially hexagonal body 836' and a lid 834', which are almost semi-circular. 840', 2nd gear 842', 3rd gear 860', driving force transmission part 864', driving force transmitted part 866', urging member 868', driven part 848', stopper 854', etc. are accommodated. , It is stored inside the front frame door 106'.

A circular first gear (drive gear) 840'for transmitting the driving force of the first drive unit 838' is attached to the drive shaft of the first drive unit 838'. The first gear 840'mesh with the second gear 842'. The second gear 842 is a double spur gear, and an inner gear (not shown) provided on the back surface side meshes with the third gear 860'. The third gear 860'is also a double spur gear, and the inner gear meshes with the gear 864a' provided in the driving force transmission unit 864'. As a result, the driving force of the first driving unit 838'is transmitted to the driving force transmitted unit 866' via the first gear 840', the second gear 842', the third gear 860', and the driving force transmitting unit 864'. .. The driving force transmitting unit 864'is engaged with one end of the arm-shaped driving force transmitting unit 866' by the engaging shaft 846', and when the driving force transmitting unit 864' is rotated, the driving force is applied. The transmission unit 866'also rotates along the rotation. A driven portion 848'is integrally provided at the other end of the driving force transmitted portion 866'. The driven portion 848'has an insertion hole 848a' that is long in the arm direction in a top view, and the guide shaft 708A'of the transmission unit 700'is inserted into the insertion hole 848a'. Further, a spring is housed in the urging member 868', and the driving force transmitted portion 866' is urged in the forward direction of the pachinko machine 100.

The stopper 854'is attached to the main body 836' so as to be movable in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100, restricts the movement of the driven portion 848'at a predetermined position (for example, the rightmost position in the moving direction), and moves to the left. By moving, the driven unit 848'can be moved. The stopper 854'has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100, and a rack 854a'is provided on a part of one side thereof. The second drive unit 852'is, for example, a stepping motor that drives the stopper 854', and a circular drive gear 852a'for transmitting the driving force of the second drive unit 852' is attached to a drive shaft (not shown). .. The drive gear 852a'meshs with the rack 854a' of the stopper 854'and drives the stopper 854'. Further, on the bottom surface of the main body 836', a guide hole 832'in which the guide shaft 708A'can move in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100 is provided.

The state of driving the transmission unit 700'by the drive unit 830' will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a top view showing a state of the drive unit 830'that moves the transmissive unit 700'from the initial position to the maximum moving position. FIG. 15A shows the drive unit 830'with the transmission unit 700'in the initial position, and FIG. 15B shows the drive unit 830' with the transmission unit 700'in the middle position. , FIG. 15C shows the drive unit 830'in the state where the transmission unit 700'is in the maximum moving position. In FIG. 15, the upper direction in the figure is the rear surface (back surface) side of the pachinko machine 100, and the lower direction in the figure is the front side of the pachinko machine 100'.

As shown in FIG. 15A, when the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position, the driven unit 848' is located at the rear end of the moving range in the front-rear direction (on the back side of the pachinko machine 100). Further, at this position, the driven portion 848'is urged in the forward direction of the pachinko machine 100 by the urging member 868'that comes into contact with the driving force transmitted portion 866'. On the other hand, the driven portion 848'is in contact with the stopper 854' that is urged by the urging member (spring) 854b'and is moving to the rightmost end, and the movement in the forward direction is restricted. In this state, the guide shaft 708A'that engages with the insertion hole 848a' of the driven portion 848'is located at the rear end portion 832B'of the guide hole 832'.

The driving force transmitted portion 866'is provided with a detection piece (position detection piece) 848c' on the back surface side thereof, and the main body 836' has a first position detection sensor (initial position detection sensor) 858a', which detects this. A second position detection sensor (maximum movement position detection sensor) 858b'is provided. These sensors function as sensors capable of detecting the transmissive unit 700', and the detection result is input to, for example, the first sub-control unit 400. When the first position detection sensor 858a'detects the detection piece 848c', the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position, and the second position detection sensor 858b' detects the detection piece. By detecting 848c', the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the transmission unit 700'is in the maximum moving position.

As shown in FIG. 15B, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the second drive unit 852'is driven and the drive gear 852a' is rotated counterclockwise, the stopper 854'moves to the left. Separated from the driven portion 848'(non-contact). The driven portion 848', whose movement is restricted by the stopper 854', is rotated counterclockwise around the engagement shaft 846'with the driving force transmitting portion 864'by the urging force of the urging member 868'. As a result, the guide shaft 708A'which is inserted into the insertion hole 848a' of the driven portion 848' and engages with the insertion hole 848a' moves in the direction of the front end portion 832F' along the guide hole 832'. As a result, the base portion 708'connected to the guide shaft 708A'starts to rotate (move) forward about the drive shaft 718'. When the movement restriction by the stopper 854'is released, the driven portion 848'moves forward by increasing the speed by the urging force (repulsive force) of the urging member 868'. Further, in this state, the first position detection sensor (initial position detection sensor) 858a'cannot detect the detection piece 848c'. ,
As shown in FIG. 15C, when the transmissive unit 700'is in the maximum moving position, the driven unit 848' is located at the front end of the moving range in the front-rear direction (front side of the pachinko machine 100). Then, in this state, the guide shaft 708A'that is inserted into the insertion hole 848a' of the driven portion 848' and engages with the insertion hole 848a'is located at the front end portion 832F' of the guide hole 832'.

Further, in this state, the second position detection sensor 858b'detects the detection piece 848c', so that the first sub-control unit 400'recognizes that the transmission unit 700'is in the maximum moving position.

After the transmissive unit 700'has moved to the maximum moving position, the player can push the transmissive unit 700'backward to return the transmissive unit 700' to the initial position. The presence or absence of such an operation by the player can be detected from the detection result of the first position detection sensor 858a', and the transmission unit 700'can be made to function as a button that the player can operate.

When a predetermined period elapses after the player presses a predetermined operation button or the operation unit 700'moves to the maximum movement position regardless of the player's operation (the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined period). When the detection piece 848c'is detected by the second position detection sensor 858b'), the first driving unit 838'is driven to rotate the driving force transmitted unit 866' clockwise. Then, the driven portion 848'may be moved to the initial position shown in FIG. 15 (a). With the movement of the driven portion 848', the guide shaft 708A'moves toward the rear end portion 832B' of the guide hole 832', whereby the transmissive portion unit 700'is returned to the initial position.

When the driven portion 848'returns to the initial position, the driving force transmitted portion 866' comes into contact with the urging member 868'and pushes it in. When the driven unit 848'returns to the initial position, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the detection piece 848c'by the first position detection sensor 858a'and moves the stopper 854'to the right again to move the driven unit 848' again. Regulate the movement of. The movement of the stopper 854'to the right releases, for example, the driving force of the second driving unit 852' that has moved the stopper 854'to the left against the urging force of the urging member 854b', and urges the stopper 854'. It may be moved to the right by the urging force of the member 854b', or in addition to the urging force of the urging member 854b', the driving force to move the stopper 854'to the right by the second driving unit 852'. May be added.

<Chance button 700>
The chance button 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16A is an external perspective view when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 16B is an external perspective view in a state where the chance button 700 is moving from the initial position (during operation). c) is an external perspective view when the chance button 700 is in the maximum moving position. FIG. 17A is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position, FIG. 17B is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the maximum movement position, and FIG. 17C is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the maximum movement position. It is a side sectional view of the whole chance button 700 when a player presses a button 700. 17 (d) to 17 (f) are views showing only the lower case 704b and the rotating member 708b extracted in each of the states of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c).

As shown in FIG. 17A, the chance button 700 has a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the door 108'with a ball storage dish and a movable portion 704 that can move up and down with respect to the fixed portion 702. (704a, 704b), a spring 706 that is contracted between the movable portion 704 and the door 108'with a ball storage plate to urge the movable portion 704 upward, and the movable portion 704 can be moved up and down. The drive unit 708 (708a, 708b) and the detection unit 710 that can detect the position of the movable unit 704 are included. Although not shown, the above-mentioned chance button lamp is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance button 700.

The fixing portion 702 is composed of two rod-shaped fixing shafts 702a erected on the door 108'with a ball storage dish and a disk-shaped fixing plate 702b fixed to the tips of these two fixing shafts 702a. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 17D, the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted into the insertion holes 704b1 formed in the lower case 704b, which will be described later, and play a role of guiding the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 17B, the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of restricting the upward movement of the lower case 704b.

The movable portion 704 has a cylindrical upper case 704a having an opening on one side and an operation surface 704a1 on which the player's fingers and hands come into contact, and an upper case 704a so as to close the opening of the upper case 704a. It is composed of a disk-shaped lower case 704b fixed to the case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 17D to 17F, the lower case 704b has two insertion holes 704b1 inserted into each of the fixed shafts 702a and a center through which the rotating member 708b of the drive unit 708 described later is inserted. Detection of the insertion hole 704b2, the engaging piece 704b3 protruding toward the center of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as the base end, and the engaging piece 704b3 protruding downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as the base end. Pieces 704b4 and are formed.

The drive unit 708 is composed of a drive source 708a composed of a motor, a solenoid, or the like, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b that is rotationally driven around the axis by the drive source 708a. A concave groove portion 708b1 is formed linearly from one side to the other side in the longitudinal direction on a part of the outer edge of the rotating member 708b, and the lower case 704b is engaged with the lower end side of the concave groove portion 708b1. An engaging recess 708b2 that can be engaged with the piece 704b3 is formed.

As shown in FIG. 17D, the rotating member 708b has the movable portion 704 moved upward by the urging force of the spring 706 when the engaging recess 708b2 engages with the engaging piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. As shown in FIG. 17 (e), the movable portion 704 is attached with the spring 706 by disengaging the engaging recess 708b2 and the engaging piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. It is rotatable between permitted positions that allow forces to move upwards.

The detection unit 710 is composed of an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b can move forward and backward between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. The detection result of the detection unit 710 is input to, for example, the first sub-control unit 400.

Based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where the movable unit 704 is not pressed downward (the chance button 700 is pressed) as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B. The detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is not operated and does not enter between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the detection unit 710), and the movable part 704 is downward as shown in FIG. 17 (c). (A state in which the chance button 700 is pressed and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is inserted between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710) can be determined.

The detection unit 710A is composed of an optical sensor having a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit, and is configured to receive the light reflected from the side surface of the upper case 704a of the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit. The detection unit 710A functions as a sensor capable of detecting the chance button 700, and the detection result of the detection unit 710A is input to, for example, the first sub-control unit 400.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine whether or not the chance button 700 is in the initial position based on the detection result of the detection unit 710A. That is, when the change button 700 is in the initial position, this is detected by the detection unit 710A, and when it is in the maximum movement position, the chance button 700 is not detected by the detection unit 710A except when the button is pressed. Whether or not the button is pressed in the case of the maximum moving position can be determined by combining with the detection result of the detection unit 710.

At the initial positions shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 16 (a), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the permitted position to the regulated position, and the movable portion 704 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating member 708 and downward. It is in a state where it can be moved only to. In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, so that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. be.

At the maximum moving position shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and 16 (c), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the regulated position to the permitted position, and the movable portion 704 is released from the regulation of upward movement of the spring 706. It moves upward by the urging force, comes into contact with the fixing plate 702b, and is restricted from moving upward again, and is in a state where it can move only downward. Even at this maximum moving position, as shown in FIG. 17C, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. , The pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected.

The state shown in FIG. 17 (c) is a state when the button is pressed when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the maximum moving position shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and 16 (c). In the present embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed to near the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the drive portion 708 is driven to move the rotating member 708b from the permitted position to the regulated position. The movable portion 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG. 17 (a) by rotating in. However, a drive mechanism for returning the chance button 700 to the initial position may be provided regardless of the player's pressure. The drive mechanism can be composed of, for example, a motor and a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the motor to the upper case 704a or the like, and is controlled by, for example, the first sub-control unit 400. Hereinafter, such a drive mechanism may be referred to as a chance button return mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operating state shown in FIG. 16 (b), that is, the chance button 700 is located in FIGS. 17 (a) and 16 (a) from the initial position shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 16 (a). In the state of moving to the maximum moving position shown in (c), the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, and even if the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710. Is configured to be ignored (so that the operation of pressing the chance button 700 is not judged to be valid).

With such a configuration, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player, such as when the player accidentally presses the chance button 700 while the chance button 700 is operating. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is ignored during the operation of the chance button 700, but the pressing operation of the chance button 700 during the operation may be enabled.

Further, if the chance button is pressed before the operation of the chance button (when the chance button is pressed before the detection is accepted), the operation of pressing the chance button may be ignored, or the chance button may be configured to be ignored. The pressing operation of may be enabled. Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button is valid, the chance button may be operated or the chance button may not be operated. Further, in these cases, the chance button may be produced so that it can be accepted, or the chance button may not be produced so that it can be accepted.

<Display body 900>
The display body 900 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is an explanatory view of the display body 900, and FIG. 18B is a developed view of an image formed on the peripheral surface of the display body 900.

The display body 900 has a cylindrical shape and is rotatably provided with its central axis 900a as the center of rotation. The display body 900 is covered with a transparent cover 903 and is housed in the door 108'with a ball storage plate, so that the player cannot contact the display body 900.

A drive unit 901 such as a stepping motor is arranged on one end surface side of the display body 900, and the display body 900 rotates around the central axis 900a by the rotational force of the drive unit 901. Further, a detection piece 900b is provided on one end surface of the display body 900. A sensor 902 is arranged on one end surface side of the display body 900. The sensor 902 is an optical sensor including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and detects the rotational position of the display body 900 by passing the detection piece 900b between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. In the case of the present embodiment, the position of the display body 900 when the detection piece 900b is detected by the sensor 902 is set as the initial position. The sensor 902 functions as a sensor capable of detecting the display body 900, and the detection result is input to, for example, the first sub-control unit 400. When the sensor 902 detects the detection piece 900b, the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the display body 900 is in the initial position. The drive unit 901 is controlled by, for example, the first sub-control unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 18B, four images IM1 to IM4 are formed on the surface of the display body 900 by printing, a sticker, or the like. Image IM1 is an image without star symbols, and images IM2 to IM4 are images having different numbers of star symbols. Any image can be displayed by controlling the amount of rotation of the display body 900 by the drive unit 901. Alternatively, the display body 900 can be continuously rotated.

When the display body 900 is in the initial position, the image IM1 is displayed through the cover 903. When the display body 900 is in the maximum moving position, the image IM2 is displayed through the cover 903. The display body 900 is structurally rotatable in both directions, but when viewed in one direction indicated by an arrow, it rotates between the display position of the image IM1 and the display position of the image IM2 when the display position is the starting point. Since the amount is the maximum, the display position of the image IM2 is referred to as the maximum movement position.

<Initial operation and return operation>
The transmissive unit 700', the chance button 700, and the display body 900 are all movable bodies, and their normal operation is desired. Therefore, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the operation is confirmed by performing an initial operation of operating these in a predetermined procedure. In addition, when an obstacle is detected during the game or the like, a return operation (retry operation) for returning the movable body to the initial position is performed. This promotes the continuation of the game in normal operation. In particular, since the transparent unit 700'and the chance button 700 are exposed to the outside so that the player can come into contact with them, if dust or the like is caught in the gaps around the transparent unit 700', the chance button 700 may malfunction. The operation may be improved by performing the return operation. Since the display body 900 is not exposed to the outside, the possibility that dust or the like is caught is relatively low, but the display body 900 may also malfunction. The operation may be improved by performing the return operation.

<Initial operation and return operation of transparent unit 700'>
Examples of the initial operation and the return operation of the transmission unit 700'will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram of control data for controlling the operation of the transparent unit 700'. There are a plurality of types of operations of the transparent unit 700', and each is managed by a number. In the example of FIG. 19, a part (No. 1 to No. 5) is shown, and the processing order, the target coordinates, and the movement time are defined. The processing order defines the order of each operation when performing a series of operations composed of a plurality of operations. The target coordinates define the position of the destination. The movement time defines the time limit for moving from the current position to the target coordinates.

No. The operation of 1 is a single operation, in which the target coordinates are set to 0 and the moving time is set to 1000 msec. The target coordinate of 0 means the initial position. No. The operation of 1 is positioned as a return operation for returning the transparent unit 700'to the initial position, and may be distinguished from an effect operation such as a notice effect. The return operation may be a series of operations such as once moving the transmissive unit 700'to the maximum movement position and returning it to the initial position.

No. The second operation is a series of operations composed of a plurality of operations. The operation in the processing order 1 has a target coordinate of 100 and a movement time of 1000 msec. The target coordinate of 100 means the maximum moving position. The operation of the processing order 2 is that the target coordinates are set to 0 and the moving time is set to 1000 msec. No. The operation of 2 is positioned as an initial operation of moving the transmissive unit 700'to the maximum moving position and then returning to the initial position, and may be distinguished from an effect operation such as a notice effect.

No. The operation of 3 is a single operation, in which the target coordinates are set to 100 and the moving time is set to 1000 msec. No. The operation of 3 is positioned as an effect operation (for example, a notice effect) for moving the transparent unit 700'to the maximum moving position.

No. The operation of 4 is a single operation, in which the target coordinates are set to 0 and the moving time is set to 5000 msec. No. The operation of No. 4 is No. After the effect operation of 3, there is no push-back operation of the transparent unit 700'by the player, and it is positioned as a non-operational operation of automatically returning the transparent unit 700'to the initial position.

No. The operation 5 is a series of operations composed of a plurality of operations, and is positioned as another effect operation (for example, reciprocating movement, vibration, etc.).

FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing an operation example of the transmissive unit 700'. 20 (a) to 20 (c) show No. 20 when the power is turned on. It shows the case where the initial operation of 2 is performed.

FIG. 20A shows a stage in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the drive unit 830'when the power is turned on, and No. Execute the operation of 2. FIG. 20B shows the stage in which the operation of the processing order 1 is executed, and the transparent unit 700'moves to the maximum moving position. FIG. 20C shows the stage in which the operation of the processing order 2 is executed, and the transparent unit 700'returns to the initial position. By performing such an initial operation every time the power is turned on, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the transmissive unit 700'. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. By giving priority to the initial operation and completing it, it may be possible to confirm the operation more reliably.

20 (d) to 20 (i) show No. It shows the case where the return operation of 1 is performed. FIG. 20D shows a stage (initial position stage) in which the transmissive unit 700'is not operating. In FIG. 20 (e), No. It shows the case where the effect operation of 3 is performed, and shows the case where the transmissive unit 700'has moved to the maximum moving position. When the player performs an operation of returning the transparent unit 700'to the initial position using this effect operation as a preliminary effect, a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) can be performed. The predetermined effect can be performed by using, for example, the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 20 (f), No. It shows the case where the operation at the time of non-operation of 4 is performed. That is, No. It is assumed that the player does not operate the transparent unit 700'after the effect operation of 3.

FIG. 20 (g) shows No. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a'does not detect that the transmissive unit 700'is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time of 4, and the transmissive unit 700'moves due to some obstacle. It is assumed that it will be interrupted. For example, the cause may be step-out of the motor or biting of foreign matter.

Correspondingly, at the stage of FIG. 20 (h), No. The return operation of 1 is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed on the condition that it is detected that the transmission unit 700'is tried to return to the initial position but has not returned. It should be noted that conditions other than the fact that the initial position is not detected may be weighted.

By this return operation, the movement of the transmissive unit 700'restarts and returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 20 (i), it is detected by the first position detection sensor 858a' that the transmissive unit 700'is in the initial position. .. In this way, the return operation may return the transparent unit 700'to a normal operating state.

21 (a) to 21 (j) show No. The case where the return operation of 1 was performed but did not improve is shown. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Here, the return operation is performed three times, but if the transmission unit 700'does not return to the initial position, the return is abandoned and the operation of the transmission unit 700'is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the transparent unit 700'cannot produce the effect, but the game itself is continued.

FIG. 21A shows a stage in which the transmissive unit 700'has not been produced. FIG. 21B is subsequently shown in No. 21 (b). It shows the case where the effect operation of 3 is performed, and shows the case where the transmissive unit 700'has moved to the maximum moving position. FIG. 21 (c) is subsequently shown in No. 21 (c). It shows the case where the operation at the time of non-operation of 4 is performed. That is, No. It is assumed that the player does not operate the transparent unit 700'after the effect operation of 3. Then, it is assumed that the transmission unit 700'bites the foreign matter G and the operation is interrupted in the process of returning to the initial position.

FIG. 20 (d) shows No. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a'does not detect that the transmissive unit 700'is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time of 4. In FIG. 21 (e), the first return operation is performed in response to this. FIG. 21 (f) shows No. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a'does not detect that the transmissive unit 700'is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time of 1. In FIG. 21 (g), the second return operation is performed in response to this. FIG. 21 (h) shows No. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a'does not detect that the transmissive unit 700'is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time of 1. In FIG. 21 (i), the third return operation is performed in response to this.

FIG. 21 (j) shows No. It is assumed that the first position detection sensor 858a'does not detect that the transmissive unit 700'is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time of 1. Although the return operation was performed three times, the transmission unit 700'was not returned to the initial position, so the return was given up and the operation prohibition state of the transmission unit 700' was set to prohibit the operation.

22 (a) to 22 (e) exemplify a case where the operation prohibition state of the transparent unit 700'is set and the operation prohibition state is canceled and the return operation is possible when a predetermined condition is satisfied. doing. The predetermined condition here is the opening of the front frame door 106', for example, the opening is detected by the above-mentioned glass frame switch 104g.

FIG. 22A shows a stage in which the operation prohibition state of the transmissive unit 700'is set. FIG. 22B shows a state in which the hall clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 22C shows a state in which the hall clerk opens the front frame door 106'. As a result, the setting of the operation prohibited state of the transparent unit 700'is released. Also, the number of return operations is reset to 0.

Corresponding to this, in FIG. 22 (d), No. The return operation of 1 is performed. By this return operation, the transmissive unit 700'returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 22 (e), it is detected by the first position detection sensor 858a' that the transmissive unit 700'is in the initial position. In this way, the transmission prohibited state may be released by opening the front frame door 106', and the transmissive unit 700' may be returned to the normal operating state by the return operation executed with this release as a trigger.

FIGS. 22 (f) to 22 (j) illustrate a case where the operation prohibited state is released and the return operation is possible on condition that the main body (inner frame) 104 is opened. The opening of the main body 104 is detected by, for example, the above-mentioned inner frame switch 104f.

FIG. 22F shows a stage in which the operation prohibition state of the transmissive unit 700'is set. FIG. 22 (g) shows a state in which the hall clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 22H shows a state in which the hall clerk opens the main body 104. As a result, the setting of the operation prohibited state of the transparent unit 700'is released. Also, the number of return operations is reset to 0.

Corresponding to this, in FIG. 22 (i), No. The return operation of 1 is performed. By this return operation, the transmissive unit 700'returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 22 (j), it is detected by the first position detection sensor 858a' that the transmissive unit 700'is in the initial position. In this way, the transparent unit 700'may be returned to the normal operating state by the release of the operation prohibited state by opening the main body 104 and the return operation executed with this release as a trigger. The number of return operations may be reset according to requirements other than opening the door body such as the front frame door 106'or the main body 102, or may be performed when the operation is not prohibited.

<Initial operation and return operation of chance button 700>
The initial operation and return operation of the chance button 700 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transparent unit 700', and the initial operation and return operation of the chance button 700 are based on the control data as shown in FIG. The action is performed. Hereinafter, a brief description will be given.

FIG. 23 is a diagram schematically showing an operation example of the chance button 700. FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c) show the case where the initial operation of the chance button 700 is performed when the power is turned on.

FIG. 23A shows a stage in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the drive unit 708 when the power is turned on, and moves the chance button 700 to the maximum movement position as shown in FIG. 23 (b). After that, the first sub-control unit 400 drives the chance button return mechanism to return the chance button 700 to the initial position. By performing such an initial operation every time the power is turned on, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the chance button 700. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. By giving priority to the initial operation and completing it, it may be possible to confirm the operation more reliably.

FIGS. 23 (d) to 23 (i) show a case where the chance button 700 is restored when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 23D shows the stage where the chance button 700 is not operating (the stage at the initial position).

FIG. 23E shows a case where the chance button 700 is subsequently moved to the maximum moving position as an effect operation. FIG. 23F shows a case where the chance button 700 is returned to the initial position as an operation during non-operation. That is, it is assumed that the player does not operate the chance button 700 after the effect operation.

FIG. 23 (g) assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time set for the non-operation operation in FIG. 23 (f) has elapsed. Therefore, it is assumed that the movement of the chance button 700 is interrupted due to some kind of failure. For example, a malfunction of the drive source or a foreign substance being caught in the drive source may be the cause.

Correspondingly, the return operation is performed at the stage of FIG. 23 (h). That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed on condition that it is detected that the chance button 700 has not returned to the initial position even though the chance button 700 has been returned to the initial position. It should be noted that conditions other than the fact that the initial position is not detected may be weighted. The return operation is No. 1 of the transmissive unit 700'. Similar to the operation of 1, it is an operation of returning the chance button 700 to the initial position. Travel time is limited.

By this return operation, the movement of the chance button 700 resumes and returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 23 (i), the detection unit 710A detects that the chance button 700 is in the initial position. In this way, the chance button 700 may be returned to the normal operating state by the return operation.

FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (j) show a case where the chance button 700 is restored, but is not improved. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Here, the return operation is performed three times, but if the chance button 700 does not return to the initial position, the return operation is given up and the operation of the chance button 700 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the chance button 700 cannot be used, but the game itself is continued.

The maximum number of return operations may be the same for the transparent unit 700'and the chance button 700, or may be different. For different times, whichever is larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration that requires a number of times for the return operation, and a smaller limit number may be set for a configuration that does not require a number of times for the return operation.

FIG. 24A shows the stage where the chance button 700 has not been produced. FIG. 24B shows a case where the effect operation is performed after that, and shows a case where the chance button 700 is moved to the maximum moving position. FIG. 24C shows a case where a non-operation operation is subsequently performed. That is, it is assumed that the player does not operate the chance button 700 after the effect operation shown in FIG. 24 (b). Then, in the process of returning to the initial position, it is assumed that the chance button 700 bites the foreign matter G and the operation is interrupted.

FIG. 24 (d) assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time of the non-operated operation shown in FIG. 24 (c) has elapsed. In FIG. 24 (e), the first return operation is performed in response to this. FIG. 24F assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time of the first return operation has elapsed. In FIG. 24 (g), the second return operation is performed in response to this. FIG. 24H assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 24 (i), the third return operation is performed in response to this.

FIG. 24J assumes a case where the detection unit 710A does not detect that the chance button 700 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Although the return operation was performed three times, the chance button 700 did not return to the initial position, so the return was given up and the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 was set to prohibit the operation.

25 (a) to 25 (e) exemplify a case where the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is set and the operation prohibition state is canceled and the return operation is possible when a predetermined condition is satisfied. There is. The predetermined condition here is the opening of the front frame door 106', for example, the opening is detected by the above-mentioned glass frame switch 104g.

FIG. 25A shows a stage in which the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is set. FIG. 25B shows a state in which the hall clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 25C shows a state in which the hall clerk opens the front frame door 106'. As a result, the setting of the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is released. Also, the number of return operations is reset to 0.

Correspondingly, in FIG. 25D, the chance button 700 is restored. By this return operation, the chance button 700 returns to the initial position, and in FIG. 25 (e), the detection unit 710A detects that the chance button 700 is in the initial position. In this way, the chance button 700 may be returned to the normal operating state by the release of the operation prohibited state by opening the front frame door 106'and the return operation executed with this release as a trigger.

FIGS. 25 (f) to 25 (j) illustrate a case where the operation prohibited state is released and the return operation is possible on condition that the main body (inner frame) 104 is opened. The opening of the main body 104 is detected by, for example, the above-mentioned inner frame switch 104f.

FIG. 25 (f) shows a stage in which the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is set. FIG. 25 (g) shows a state in which the hall clerk has removed the foreign matter G. FIG. 25 (h) shows a state in which the hall clerk opens the main body 104. As a result, the setting of the operation prohibition state of the chance button 700 is released. Also, the number of return operations is reset to 0.

Correspondingly, in FIG. 25 (i), the chance button 700 is restored. This return operation returns the chance button 700 to the initial position, and in FIG. 25 (j), the detection unit 710A detects that the chance button 700 is in the initial position. In this way, the chance button 700 may be returned to the normal operating state by releasing the operation prohibited state by opening the main body 104 and the return operation executed with this release as a trigger. The number of return operations may be reset according to requirements other than opening the door body such as the front frame door 106'or the main body 102, or may be performed when the operation is not prohibited.

<Initial operation and return operation of display body 900>
The initial operation and the return operation of the display body 900 can be the same as in the case of the transparent unit 700'and the chance button 700. The initial operation of the display body 900 is to start the rotation of the display body 900, rotate at least one rotation, and then stop the rotation when the sensor 902 first detects the rotation to position the display body 900 at the initial position. Can be mentioned. Examples of the return operation include starting the rotation of the display body 900 and stopping the rotation when the sensor 902 first detects the display body 900 to position the display body 900 at the initial position.

When the return operation of the display body 900 reaches the limit number of times, the operation prohibition state of the display body 900 can be set. Regarding the display body 900, the operation prohibited state may not be released by opening the door bodies such as the front frame door 106'and the main body 102, and the operation prohibited state may be maintained, and the number of return operations may not be reset. good. Since the display body 900 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the player, the discomfort given to the player may be relatively small even if the operation is prohibited, and the display body 900 is housed in the door 108'with a ball storage plate. Therefore, it may not be easy for the hall clerk to remove obstacles such as biting. Of course, it is also possible to release the operation prohibition state or reset the number of return operations by opening the door body such as the front frame door 106'or the main body 102.

<Example of motion control of movable body>
An example of operation control of the transmissive unit 700', the chance button 700, and the display body 900 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. Here, an example in which the first sub-control unit 400 executes drive control of the drive unit 830'of the transmissive unit 700', the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700, the chance button return mechanism, and the drive unit 901 of the display body 900. I'm assuming. FIG. 26A shows a processing example included in the movable body control processing of S319 of FIG.

In S1401, the first movable body control process is performed. Here, processing related to operation control of the transparent unit 700'is performed. In S1402, the second movable body control process is performed. Here, processing related to operation control of the chance button 700 is performed. In S1403, a third movable body control process is performed. Here, processing related to operation control of the display body 900 is performed.

Here, the control states of the transparent unit 700', the chance button 700, and the display body 900 are individually set for operation control. The control state includes at least the first to fourth states. The first state is a state when the power is turned on, and is a state in which execution of the initial operation is set. The second state is a state in which execution of the return operation is set. The third state is a standby state in which no operation is performed. The fourth state is a state in which an operation prohibited state is set.

FIG. 26B is a flowchart showing the first movable body control process of S1401. In S1411, it is determined whether or not the fourth state is set in the transmissive unit 700'. If applicable, proceed to S1418, and if not applicable, proceed to S1412. In S1412, it is determined whether or not the first state is set in the transmissive unit 700'. If applicable, proceed to S1413, and if not applicable, proceed to S1414.

In S1413, a setting related to execution of the initial operation (drive setting and the like) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1414, it is determined whether or not the second state is set in the transmissive unit 700'. If applicable, proceed to S1415, and if not applicable, proceed to S1416.

In S1415, a setting related to execution of the return operation (drive setting, etc.) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1416, it is determined whether or not the third state is set in the transmissive unit 700'. If applicable, proceed to S1417, and if not applicable, proceed to S1418. In S1417, command-related processing (processing related to command return value and received command, etc.) is performed.

In S1418, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to S1419, and if it is not satisfied, the processing of one unit is terminated. In S1418 and S1419, a process of updating the control state of the transparent unit 700'is performed. For example, a third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the effect operation, and the like. If an attempt is made to return the transmissive unit 700'to the initial position but it is detected that the transmissive unit 700'has not returned, a second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit, the fourth state is set. When the opening of the door body such as the front frame door 106'or the main body 104 is detected, the second state is set and the number of return operations is reset.

FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing the second movable body control process of S1402. In S1421, it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 is set to the fourth state. If applicable, proceed to S1428, and if not applicable, proceed to S1422. In S1422, it is determined whether or not the first state is set for the chance button 700. If applicable, proceed to S1423, and if not applicable, proceed to S1414.

In S1423, a setting related to execution of the initial operation (drive setting and the like) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1424, it is determined whether or not the second state is set for the chance button 700. If applicable, proceed to S1425, and if not applicable, proceed to S1426.

In S1425, a setting related to execution of the return operation (drive setting, etc.) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1426, it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 is set to the third state. If applicable, proceed to S1427, and if not applicable, proceed to S1428. In S1427, command-related processing (processing related to command return value and received command, etc.) is performed.

In S1428, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to S1429, and if it is not satisfied, the processing of one unit is terminated. In S1428 and S1429, a process of updating the control state of the chance button 700 is performed. For example, a third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the effect operation, and the like. If an attempt is made to return the chance button 700 to the initial position but it is detected that the button 700 has not returned, a second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit, the fourth state is set. When the opening of the door body such as the front frame door 106'or the main body 104 is detected, the second state is set and the number of return operations is reset.

FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the third movable body control process of S1403. In S1431, it is determined whether or not the display body 900 is set to the fourth state. If applicable, proceed to S1438, and if not applicable, proceed to S1432. In S1432, it is determined whether or not the first state is set on the display body 900. If applicable, proceed to S1433, and if not applicable, proceed to S1414.

In S1433, a setting related to execution of the initial operation (drive setting and the like) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1434, it is determined whether or not the display body 900 is set to the second state. If applicable, proceed to S1435, and if not applicable, proceed to S1436.

In S1435, a setting related to execution of the return operation (drive setting, etc.) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1436, it is determined whether or not the display body 900 is set to the third state. If applicable, proceed to S1437, and if not applicable, proceed to S1438. In S1437, command-related processing (processing related to command return value and received command, etc.) is performed.

In S1438, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to S1439, and if it is not satisfied, the processing of one unit is terminated. In S1438 and S1439, a process of updating the control state of the display body 900 is performed. For example, a third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the effect operation, and the like. If an attempt is made to return the display body 900 to the initial position but it is detected that the display body 900 has not returned, a second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit, the fourth state is set. On the other hand, unlike the case of the transparent unit 700'and the chance button 700', even if the opening of the door body such as the front frame door 106' or the main body 104 is detected, the first state is set or the number of return operations is reset. You can avoid it.

Next, the control of the drive source (here, exemplarily referred to as a step motor) for driving the transmission unit 700', the chance button 700, and the display body 900 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. 28 (a) and 28 (b) show interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

With reference to FIG. 28A, in S1441, a process of outputting a signal from the motor driver to the motor is performed. This drives the motor. In S1442, the sensor detection process is performed. Here, the detection results of each sensor that detects the transmissive unit 700', the chance button 700, and the display body 900 are acquired. In S1443, another process is performed. This completes the first drive interrupt processing for one unit.

With reference to FIG. 28B, in S1444, the motor control process for the operation of the transmissive unit 700'is performed, in S1445, the motor control process for the operation of the chance button 700 is performed, and in S1446, the operation of the display body 900 is performed. Performs motor control processing for. This completes the second drive interrupt processing for one unit.

Each motor control process of S1444 to S1446 is the same process, but as an example, the motor control process of S1444 will be described with reference to FIG. 28 (c).

In S1451, it is determined whether or not the pulse output timing is for the step motor. If applicable, proceed to S1452, and if not applicable, proceed to S1456. In S1452, it is determined whether or not the moving direction of the transmissive unit 700'is the origin direction, and if applicable, the process proceeds to S1453, and if not, the process proceeds to S1454. In S1453, one virtual position of the transparent unit 700'is subtracted, and in S1454, one virtual position of the transparent unit 700' is added. S1455 outputs a pulse and a direction signal.

In S1456, it is determined whether or not the step motor is stopped. If it is determined that the pulse is stopped, the process proceeds to S1457 and the pulse output is stopped. In S1458, it is determined whether or not the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position from the detection result of the sensor. If applicable, the process proceeds to S1459, the virtual position is set to 0, and if not applicable, the processing of one unit is completed.

<Example of movable body applicable to game board>
FIG. 29 is a schematic front view of the game board 200'instead of the game board 200 described above. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the configuration of the game board 200', and FIG. 31 is a sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 29. The game board 200'is a device in which the movable display device 288 of the game board 200 is omitted, while the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the light emitting effect unit 3 and the decorative unit 4 are added, and the game board 200 has other configurations. Is the same as. The game board 200'includes movable bodies 1 and 2, the doors 246a and 246b described above, and the effect movable body 224 as movable bodies. 29 and 31 show a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are located at the initial positions.

In the case of the present embodiment, the decoration unit 4 is a lamp unit configured by arranging two 7-segment displays side by side, and is fixedly arranged in the upper center of the decoration pattern display device 208. In the case of the present embodiment, the decoration unit 4 is composed of a 7-segment display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an electronic display of another type may be used, or a display other than the electronic display (for example, printed matter, three-dimensional object) may be used. It may be a thing). For example, at least a part of the decorative unit is transparent or translucent, and a light emitting element may be arranged at a position behind the decorative unit. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be improved by illuminating the decorative unit by emitting light from the light emitting element.

The movable body 1 constitutes a display body on which an image of a family crest is printed on the surface. The movable body 1 may have a three-dimensional shape engraved instead of printing an image, may be a display such as a 7-segment display or a liquid crystal display, or may be a doll or the like. It may be.

The movable body 1 is provided so as to be reciprocally movable in the vertical direction, is located behind the decorative unit 4 at the initial position, and is located on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the maximum moving position. In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 1 is entirely located behind the decorative unit 4 in the initial position, which makes it difficult for the player to see the movable body 1. Therefore, when the movable body 1 is moved to the maximum moving position, the player May be able to surprise you. In the initial position, only a part of the movable body 1 may be located behind the decorative unit 4, or the entire movable body 1 may be exposed.

The movable body 2 is a display device capable of performing various displays used for the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device in the present embodiment. Similar to the decorative pattern display device 208, for example, a dot matrix display device, Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

The movable body 2 is provided so as to be reciprocally movable in the vertical direction, is located below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the initial position, and is located above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the maximum movement position. .. In the case of the present embodiment, in the initial position, a part of the movable body 2 is located behind the game board 200a forming the skeleton of the game board 200', which makes it difficult for the player to see. However, the movable body 2 may be entirely located behind the game board 200a in the initial position, or the entire movable body 2 may be exposed.

The doors 246a and 246b and the effect movable body 224 have already been outlined, but the effect movable body 224 has the position shown in FIG. 29 as the initial position and the position shown in FIG. 39 (d) as the maximum moving position. It is a movable body that is always exposed and part of it is not hidden.

The light emitting effect unit 3 includes a changing panel 31 and light emitting units 32 and 33 capable of emitting light. The change panel 31 is a square and plate-shaped member, and is arranged on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208. The shape of the changing panel 31 is not limited to a square shape, and may be a circular shape or the like. Further, it may be a member other than a plate shape.

The light emitting unit 32 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 32a arranged in a row along the side side of the change panel 31. The light emitting element 32a is, for example, an LED. The light emitting unit 33 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 33a arranged in a row along the lower side of the change panel 31. The light emitting element 33a is, for example, an LED. The position of the light emitting unit is not limited to this, and any position around the change panel 31 can be selected. However, it may be arranged at a place other than the upper end of the change panel 31. As a result, the space above the change panel 31 may be used for other purposes.

The change panel 31 is composed of a light guide member, and can change the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting units 32 and 33 to at least the front side (the direction of the player). The direction of light can be changed, for example, by forming a cut surface that reflects light or by providing a reflective material. In addition, it is possible to make an image appear on the change panel 31 by arranging a configuration that changes the direction of light. FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (c) show an example of the effect of the light emitting effect unit 3.

FIG. 38A shows a state in which the light emitting units 32 and 33 are turned off. In this case, from the player's point of view, the image of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the change panel 31 can be seen.

FIG. 38B shows a state in which the light emitting unit 32 is turned on and the light emitting unit 33 is turned off. The light emitted from the light emitting unit 32 is incident on the left side of the changing panel 31 in the lateral direction, the direction of the light is changed by about 90 degrees by reflection, and the light is emitted to the front side in the normal direction of the changing panel 31. Due to the arrangement of the light-reflecting configuration, the character image appears to emerge on the change panel 31. The image of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind it can also be seen while the image of the character overlaps. Such an effect can be executed, for example, as a notice effect such as a big hit.

FIG. 38C shows a state in which the light emitting unit 32 is turned off and the light emitting unit 33 is turned on. The light emitted from the light emitting unit 33 is incident on the changing panel 31 from the lower side to the upper side, the direction of the light is changed by about 90 degrees by reflection, and the light is emitted to the front side in the normal direction of the changing panel 31. Due to the arrangement of the structure that reflects light, the image in which the characters "PUSH" are arranged appears to emerge in the shape imitating the footprints of animals on the change panel 31. The image of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind it can also be seen while overlapping. Such an effect can be executed, for example, as an effect of moving the transparent unit 700'to the maximum moving position and urging the player to operate the transparent unit 700'.

In the case of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the image does not appear when the light emitting units 32 and 33 are turned off, but the player can recognize the image even when the light emitting units 32 and 33 are turned off. It may be something that becomes noticeable.

At least one of the light emitting units 32 and 33 may be turned on during at least a part of the operating periods of the movable bodies 1 and 2 or the effect movable body 246. For example, the movable body 1 may be turned on for a part or all of the period while the movable body 1 moves to the maximum moving position or returns from the maximum moving position to the initial position. Alternatively, the movable body 2 may be turned on for a part or all of the period while the movable body 2 moves to the maximum moving position or returns from the maximum moving position to the initial position. Alternatively, the effect movable body 246 may be turned on for a part or all of the period while the movable body 246 moves to the maximum moving position or returns from the maximum moving position to the initial position. Movement of the movable body and effect The effect of the light of the light emitting unit 3 can be performed, which may enhance the interest of the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 31, the back side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1, the movable body 2, the effect movable body 224, and the like is covered with the cover body 10. In addition, ball entry blocking members 11 are provided on the back and upper sides of the stage 244. The ball entry blocking member 11 is located closer to the player than the change panel 31 to prevent a game ball that has not entered the ball advance entrance from entering the cover body 10. In the present embodiment, a gap or the like may be provided between the ball entry blocking member 11 and the changing panel 31, and another movable body may be provided, whereby the effect operation can be performed in front of the changing panel 31. It is possible.

At the lower part of the cover body 10, a ball discharge for discharging the game ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the variable winning opening 234, the out port 240, etc. to the outside of the cover body 10. The outlet 10a is formed.

The arrangement relationship of each configuration will be described with reference to FIG. 31. In the depth direction (front-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1 is located closer to the player than the decorative symbol display device 208. The change panel 31 is located closer to the player than the movable body 1. The decoration unit 4 is located closer to the player than the change panel 31. The movable body 1, the movable body 2, and the effect movable body 224 are configured to be movable in the space between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the changing panel 31.

When viewed in the depth direction, at least a part of the movable body 1 may overlap with at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, a part of the movable body 1 overlaps a part (upper part) of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the initial position. In the initial position, the entire movable body 1 may overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208. On the contrary, in the initial position, the entire decorative symbol display device 208 may overlap with the movable body 1.

In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 1 is moved to the maximum moving position, the entire movable body 1 overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208, but a part of the movable body 1 is the decorative symbol display device 208. May overlap with. On the contrary, the entire decorative symbol display device 208 may overlap with the movable body 1.

At least a part of the change panel 31 overlaps with at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, substantially the entire display area of the change panel 31 and the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap each other. The entire change panel 31 may overlap with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 may overlap with a part of the change panel 31. You may. Further, for example, the change panel 31 may overlap with an area of half or more of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative unit 4 is located at a position that overlaps at least a part of the end portion of the changing panel 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, the decorative unit 4 overlaps the upper end portion of the changing panel 31. In addition, both may be configured so that the entire end portion of the changing panel 31 overlaps with the decorative unit 4. Since the end portion of the changing panel 31 is covered from the front side by the decorative unit 4, the appearance quality may be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when viewed in the depth direction, the decorative unit 4, the changing panel 31, the movable body 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 are arranged in this order from the player side in a narrow space. A gap G1 is formed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 1, a gap G2 is formed between the movable body 1 and the changing panel 31, and a gap G2 is formed between the changing panel 31 and the decorative unit 4. Form a gap G3. The gap G2 and the gap G3 communicate with each other via the space SP2 between the decorative unit 4 and the movable body 1. The gap G1 and the gap G2 communicate with each other via the space SP1 between the change panel 31 and the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the gaps G1 to G3 are all in communication.

Since the gap G3 is provided, maintenance of the movable body 1 may be possible from the gap G3 without disassembling the cover body 10 or the like. FIG. 32A shows an example thereof, in which the fingertip of the operator passes through the gap G3 and reaches the movable body 1. When the movable body 1 becomes immobile, it may be possible to manually return it to the initial position. Further, in the example of FIG. 32B, the tip of the tool (here, the driver) is passed through the gap G3 to reach the movable body 1. When the movable body 1 becomes immobile, it may be possible to manually return it to the initial position using a tool.

Since the gap G2 and the gap G3 communicate with each other, it may be possible to access the lower part of the movable body 1 (the part behind the upper part of the change panel 31), and the range of maintenance may be expanded. Further, since the gap G1 and the gap G2 communicate with each other, it may be possible to access the portion on the back surface side of the movable body 1, and the range of maintenance may be expanded. The gaps G1, G2, and G3 can be, for example, gaps in the range of 0.8 mm to 20 mm. The width of each gap may be constant or may be partially different. For example, the width of the gap may be wider in the periphery of the movable body 1 than in other portions. Gap may be formed in various places such as above, sideways, and below in the portion where each gap is formed. Further, the width and the portion may be different in each gap. For example, the widths of the gap G3 and the gap G2 may be different, and the gap G3 and the gap G1 may be formed at different portions in front view.

Further, a gap accessible to the movable body 1 may be provided at least in a part such as the upper end portion and the lateral end portion of the cover body 10. The scope of maintenance may be further expanded.

The gaps G1 to G3 communicate with each other. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 100 is transported or the like, a cushioning material such as an air cushion can be inserted into these gaps G1 to G3. FIG. 33 shows an example thereof, in which the cushioning material CS is packed in the gaps G1 to G3. The buffer CS may prevent the movable body 1 from moving due to vibration or the like, and may prevent the movable body 1 from strongly colliding with other configurations even when it moves. The cushioning material CS may be packed and extracted from the gap G1 side, and workability may be good.

When the movable body 1 is in the initial position, as shown in FIG. 33, at least a part of the gaps G1 to G3 are located at the same height H in the height direction of the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, the cushioning material CS may be relatively easy to pack and may be easily taken out. It is not necessary that all the gaps G1 to G3 are located at the same height H, and the same height may be a combination of the gaps G1 and G2, a combination of the gaps G2 and G3, or a gap. A combination of G1 and a gap G3 is also acceptable.

<Drive mechanism of movable body>
An example of a drive mechanism for moving the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224 will be described. First, the drive mechanism of the movable body 1 will be described.

34 and 35 are explanatory views of the drive mechanism 5 of the movable body 1. 34 (a) is a front view when the movable body 1 is in the initial position, FIG. 34 (b) is a front view when the movable body 1 is in the maximum moving position, and FIG. 35 (a) is an initial view of the movable body 1. A cross-sectional view when the movable body 1 is in the position, FIG. 35B shows a cross-sectional view when the movable body 1 is in the maximum moving position.

The drive mechanism 5 includes a support 50, a motor 51, an arm member 52, a link member 53, and a sensor 54. The support 50 constitutes the skeleton of the drive mechanism 5, and includes three rows of guide grooves 50a extending in the vertical direction. The motor 51 is a step motor supported by the support 50, and a pinion gear 51a is attached to the output shaft thereof. The arm member 52 is rotatably supported by the support 50, and the gear 52b whose gear 52b is fixed coaxially with the center of rotation meshes with the pinion gear 51a, and the arm member 52 is rotated by driving the motor 51. Move. An elongated hole 52c is formed on the tip end side of the arm member 52, and a detection piece 52a is formed on the back surface side of the intermediate portion.

The link member 53 is a member that supports the movable body 1, and the movable body 1 is fixed to the link member 53 via an attachment layer 53a made of an adhesive or the like. The link member 53 includes three shaft portions through which the guide groove 50a is inserted, and the central shaft portion 53a is formed to be longer in the axial direction than the other shaft portions, and the elongated hole 52c of the arm member 52 is further formed. It is inserted. At the end of the shaft portion 53a, a stopper 53b that regulates falling from the elongated hole 52c is fixed by a fastening member BL such as a bolt. When the arm member 52 is rotated by the drive of the motor 51, the link member 53 is moved in the vertical direction by the guidance of the guide groove 50a, and as a result, the movable body 1 is moved in the vertical direction.

The movable body 1 is detected by the sensor 54. The sensor 54 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece 52a is arranged so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. Since the rotation position of the arm member 52 and the position of the movable body 1 are in a corresponding relationship with each other, the position of the movable body 1 can be detected by detecting the detection piece 52a with the sensor 54. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 1 is in the initial position, the detection piece 52a is located between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and is detected by the sensor 54.

Next, the drive mechanism of the movable body 2 will be described. 36 and 37 are explanatory views of the drive mechanism 6 of the movable body 2. 36 (a) is a front view when the movable body 2 is in the initial position, FIG. 36 (b) is a front view when the movable body 2 is in the maximum moving position, and FIG. 37 (a) is an initial view of the movable body 2. A cross-sectional view when the movable body 2 is in the position, FIG. 37B shows a cross-sectional view when the movable body 2 is in the maximum moving position. The drive mechanism 6 has the same configuration as the drive mechanism 5.

The drive mechanism 6 includes a support 60, a motor 61, an arm member 62, a link member 63, and a sensor 64. The support 60 constitutes the skeleton of the drive mechanism 6 and includes three rows of guide grooves 60a extending in the vertical direction. The motor 61 is a step motor supported by a support 60, and a pinion gear 61a is attached to its output shaft. The arm member 62 is rotatably supported by the support 60, and the gear 62b whose gear 62b is fixed coaxially with the center of rotation meshes with the pinion gear 61a, and the arm member 62 is rotated by driving the motor 61. Move. An elongated hole 62c is formed on the tip end side of the arm member 62, and a detection piece 62a is formed on the back surface side of the intermediate portion.

The link member 63 is a member that supports the movable body 2, and the movable body 2 is fixed to the link member 63 via an attachment layer 63a made of an adhesive or the like. The link member 63 includes three shaft portions through which the guide groove 60a is inserted, and the central shaft portion 63a thereof is formed to be longer in the axial direction than the other shaft portions, and the elongated hole 62c of the arm member 62 is further formed. It is inserted. At the end of the shaft portion 63a, a stopper 63b that regulates falling from the elongated hole 62c is fixed by a fastening member BL such as a bolt. When the arm member 62 is rotated by the drive of the motor 61, the link member 63 is moved in the vertical direction by the guidance of the guide groove 60a, and as a result, the movable body 2 is moved in the vertical direction.

The movable body 2 is detected by the sensor 64. The sensor 64 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece 62a is arranged so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. Since the rotation position of the arm member 62 and the position of the movable body 2 are in a corresponding relationship with each other, the position of the movable body 2 can be detected by detecting the detection piece 62a with the sensor 64. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 2 is in the initial position, the detection piece 62a is located between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and is detected by the sensor 64.

Next, the drive mechanism of the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. 39 (a) is a front view when the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position, FIG. 39 (b) is a left side view when the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position, and FIG. 39 (c) is the effect movable body 224. Is a front view when is in the middle of operation, and FIG. 39 (d) is a front view when the effect movable body 224 is in the maximum moving position.

As described above, the effect movable body 224 includes the upper arm of the human right arm, the upper arm portion 224a imitating the forearm, and the forearm portion 224b. A cam CM1 is fixed at the shoulder position of the upper arm portion 224a, and an output shaft of a step motor 71 for rotating the upper arm portion 224 is connected to the cam CM1. Stoppers SP11 and SP12 are provided around the cam CM1 to regulate the rotation range of the cam CM1 and regulate the rotation range of the upper arm portion 224a. The position where one end of the collar of the cam CM11 abuts on the stopper SP11 (FIG. 39 (a)) is the initial position of the upper arm 224a alone, and the position where the other end of the collar of the cam CM11 abuts on the stopper SP12 is the upper arm. This is the maximum moving position of the 224a unit (FIG. 39 (d)). The cam CM1 is provided with a detection piece CM11.

The upper arm portion 224a is detected by the sensor 74. The sensor 74 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece CM11 is arranged so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. By detecting the detection piece CM11 with the sensor 74, the position of the upper arm portion 224a can be detected. In the case of the present embodiment, when the upper arm portion 224a is in the initial position, the detection piece CM11 is located between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and is detected by the sensor 74.

The upper arm portion 224a is made of a transparent material, and a lighting unit 73 composed of a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, LEDs) is provided inside the upper arm portion 224a. Is possible.

A step motor 72 is provided at the elbow position of the upper arm portion 224a. A cam CM2 is fixed at the elbow position of the forearm portion 224b, and the output shaft of the step motor 72 is connected to the cam CM2.

Stoppers SP21 and SP22 are provided around the cam CM2 to regulate the rotation range of the cam CM2 and regulate the rotation range of the forearm portion 224b. The position where one end of the collar of the cam CM21 abuts on the stopper SP21 (FIG. 39 (a)) is the initial position of the forearm 224b alone, and the position where the other end of the collar of the cam CM21 abuts on the stopper SP22 is the forearm. This is the maximum moving position of the 224b unit (FIGS. 39 (c) and 39 (d)). The cam CM2 is provided with a detection piece CM21.

The forearm portion 224b is detected by the sensor 75. The sensor 75 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece CM21 is arranged so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. By detecting the detection piece CM21 with the sensor 75, the position of the forearm portion 224b can be detected. In the case of the present embodiment, when the upper arm portion 224b is in the initial position, the detection piece CM21 is located between the light emitting element and the light receiving element and is detected by the sensor 75.

Looking at the entire effectable movable body 224, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b are both in the initial position, and the maximum moving position thereof is in FIG. 39 (d). As shown in the above, both the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b are in the maximum moving position. FIG. 39C shows the case where the effect movable body 224 is in the intermediate position, the upper arm portion 224a is in the initial position, and the front one portion 224b is in the maximum moving position. After that, when the upper arm portion 224a is also moved to the maximum moving position, the state shown in FIG. 39 (d) is obtained. Whether or not the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position can be recognized from the detection results of the sensors 74 and 75.

Next, the drive mechanisms of the left door 246a and the right door 246b will be described with reference to FIG. 40. 40 (a) is a perspective view of the shielding device 246, and FIGS. 40 (b) to 40 (d) are front views of the shielding device 246, and the positions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b are different. FIG. 40B shows a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are fully opened, and the left door 246a and the right door 246b are respectively located at the initial positions. FIG. 40 (c) is fully closed. 40 (c) and 40 (d) are half-open, FIG. 40 (c) shows the left door 246a in the maximum moving position, and FIG. 40 (d) shows the right door 246b in the maximum moving position.

The shielding device 246 includes a drive mechanism 8 for moving the left door 246a and the right door 246b. The drive mechanism 8 includes a support 81 that forms the skeleton of the shielding device 246. The support 81 is provided with rails for guiding the reciprocating movements of the left door 246a and the right door 246b in the left-right direction, and is provided with an opening 81a for exposing the decorative symbol display device 208 behind.

The drive mechanism 8 includes a drive pulley 82a, a driven pulley 83a, and a belt 84a wound around the drive pulley 82a as a mechanism for moving the left door 246a. The drive pulley 82a is rotationally driven by a step motor (not shown), and the belt 84a travels. The left door 246a includes a connecting portion La, and is fixed to the belt 84a at the connecting portion La. As the belt 84a travels, the left door 246a moves. The connecting portion La integrally includes a detection piece detected by the sensor 85a.

The sensor 85a is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and a detection piece of the connecting portion La is arranged so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. By detecting this detection piece with the sensor 85a, the position of the left door 246a can be detected. In the case of the present embodiment, the position where the left door 246a is detected by the sensor 85a and then moved to the left side by a predetermined distance is configured as the initial position.

The drive mechanism 8 includes a drive pulley 82b, a driven pulley 83b, and a belt 84b wound around the drive pulley 82b as a mechanism for moving the right door 246b. The drive pulley 82b is rotationally driven by a step motor (not shown), and the belt 84b travels. The right door 246b includes a connecting portion Lb, and is fixed to the belt 84b at the connecting portion Lb. As the belt 84b travels, the right door 246b moves. The connecting portion Lb integrally includes a detection piece detected by the sensor 85b.

The sensor 85b is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and a detection piece of the connecting portion Lb is arranged so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. By detecting this detection piece with the sensor 85b, the position of the right door 246b can be detected. In the case of the present embodiment, the initial position is the position where the right door 246b is detected by the sensor 85b and then moved to the right by a predetermined distance.

<Movement mode of movable body>
Examples of operation modes of the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 42.

FIG. 41 shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224 are all located at the initial positions, and these movable bodies are in an inactive state. FIG. 42A shows a state in which the movable body 1 is being moved. FIG. 42B shows a state in which the movable body 2 is being moved. FIG. 43A shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 is being moved. FIG. 43B shows a state in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are being moved.

Various effects can be produced by moving the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224, or by combining the movements. The second sub-control unit 500 can control the operation of the movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224.

<Initial operation and return operation>
The movable bodies 1 and 2, the left door 246a and the right door 246b, and the effect movable body 224 are all movable bodies, and their normal operation is desired. Therefore, similarly to the transmission unit 700', the chance button 700, and the display body 900 described above, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initial operation of operating these in a predetermined procedure is performed to confirm the operation. In addition, when an obstacle is detected during the game or the like, it is desirable to perform a return operation (retry operation) for returning the movable body to the initial position. In addition, when an obstacle is detected during the game or the like, a return operation (retry operation) for returning the movable body to the initial position is performed. This promotes the continuation of the game in normal operation.

An example of the initial operation and the return operation will be described below. Here, the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are targeted, but the left door 246a and the right door 246b may also be targeted. The movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are movable bodies arranged at positions where the player does not come into contact with each other.

<Initial operation and return operation of movable body 1>
The initial operation and return operation of the movable body 1 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transmissive unit 700'and the like already described, and the movable body 1 is based on the control data as shown in FIG. The initial operation and the return operation are executed. Hereinafter, a brief description will be given.

FIG. 44 is a diagram schematically showing an operation example of the movable body 1. FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (c) show the case where the initial operation of the movable body 1 is performed when the power is turned on.

FIG. 44A shows a stage in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 51 when the power is turned on, and moves the movable body 1 to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 44 (b). After that, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the movable body 1 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 44 (c). By performing such an initial operation every time the power is turned on, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the movable body 1. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. By giving priority to the initial operation and completing it, it may be possible to confirm the operation more reliably.

FIGS. 44 (d) to 44 (i) show a case where the movable body 1 is restored when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 44D shows a stage in which the movable body 1 is not operating (a stage in the initial position).

FIG. 44E shows a case where the movable body 1 is subsequently moved to the maximum moving position as an effect operation. FIG. 44 (f) shows a case where the moving operation of returning the movable body 1 to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect.

FIG. 44 (g) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time set for the movement operation of FIG. 44 (f). It is assumed that the movement of the movable body 1 is interrupted due to an obstacle. For example, a malfunction of the drive source or a foreign substance being caught in the drive source may be the cause.

Correspondingly, the return operation is performed at the stage of FIG. 44 (h). That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed on the condition that it is detected that the movable body 1 has not returned to the initial position even though the movable body 1 has been returned to the initial position. It should be noted that conditions other than the fact that the initial position is not detected may be weighted. The return operation is No. 1 of the transmissive unit 700'. Similar to the operation of 1, it is an operation of returning the movable body 1 to the initial position. Travel time is limited.

By this return operation, the movement of the movable body 1 is restarted and returned to the initial position, and in FIG. 44 (i), the sensor 54 detects that the movable body 1 is in the initial position. In this way, the movable body 1 may be returned to the normal operating state by the returning operation.

FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (j) show a case where the movable body 1 is returned, but is not improved. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Here, the return operation is performed three times, but if the movable body 1 does not return to the initial position, the return operation is given up and the operation of the movable body 1 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the movable body 1 cannot produce the effect, but the game itself is continued.

The maximum number of return operations may be the same for the transmissive unit 700'and the like and the movable body 1, or may be different. For different times, whichever is larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration that requires a number of times for the return operation, and a smaller limit number may be set for a configuration that does not require a number of times for the return operation.

FIG. 45A shows a stage in which the movable body 1 has not been produced. FIG. 45B shows a case where the effect operation is performed after that, and shows a case where the movable body 1 moves to the maximum moving position. FIG. 45C shows a case where a moving operation of returning to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the movable body 1 is interrupted in the process of returning to the initial position.

FIG. 45 (d) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the elapse of the moving time of the moving operation of FIG. 45 (c). In FIG. 45 (e), the first return operation is performed in response to this. FIG. 45F assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the movement time of the first return operation has elapsed. In FIG. 45 (g), the second return operation is performed in response to this. FIG. 45 (h) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 45 (i), the third return operation is performed in response to this.

FIG. 45 (j) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Although the return operation was performed three times, the movable body 1 did not return to the initial position, so the return operation was given and the operation prohibition state of the movable body 1 was set to prohibit the operation.

Regarding the movable body 1, the operation prohibited state may not be released by opening the door bodies such as the front frame door 106'and the main body 102, and the operation prohibited state may be maintained, and the number of return operations may not be reset. good. Since the movable body 1 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the player, the discomfort given to the player may be relatively small even if the movement is prohibited. Of course, it is also possible to release the operation prohibition state or reset the number of return operations by opening the door body such as the front frame door 106'or the main body 102.

<Initial operation and return operation of movable body 2>
The initial operation and return operation of the movable body 2 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transmissive unit 700'and the like already described, and based on the control data as shown in FIG. 19, the movable body 2 The initial operation and the return operation are executed. Hereinafter, a brief description will be given.

FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing an operation example of the movable body 2. FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (c) show the case where the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46A shows a stage in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 61 when the power is turned on, and moves the movable body 2 to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 46 (b). At this time, by displaying the default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, the hall clerk or the like may be able to confirm the display function. After that, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 46 (c). By performing such an initial operation every time the power is turned on, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the movable body 2. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. By giving priority to the initial operation and completing it, it may be possible to confirm the operation more reliably.

FIGS. 46 (d) to 46 (i) show a case where the movable body 2 is restored when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 46 (d) shows the stage where the movable body 2 is not operating (the stage at the initial position).

FIG. 46 (e) shows a case where the movable body 2 is subsequently moved to the maximum moving position as an effect operation. FIG. 46 (f) shows a case where the movable body 2 is returned to the initial position after the effect is completed.

FIG. 46 (g) assumes a case where the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time set for the movement operation of FIG. 46 (f). It is assumed that the movement of the movable body 2 is interrupted due to an obstacle. For example, a malfunction of the drive source or a foreign substance being caught in the drive source may be the cause.

Correspondingly, the return operation is performed at the stage of FIG. 46 (h). That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed on the condition that it is detected that the movable body 2 has not returned to the initial position even though the movable body 2 has been returned to the initial position. It should be noted that conditions other than the fact that the initial position is not detected may be weighted. The return operation is No. 1 of the transmissive unit 700'. Similar to the operation of 1, it is an operation of returning the movable body 2 to the initial position. Travel time is limited. As shown in the figure, the default image may be displayed when the return operation is performed. As a result, the hall clerk may be able to recognize that the return operation is being performed.

By this return operation, the movement of the movable body 2 is restarted and returned to the initial position, and in FIG. 46 (i), the sensor 64 detects that the movable body 1 is in the initial position. In this way, the movable body 2 may be returned to the normal operating state by the returning operation.

FIGS. 47 (a) to 47 (j) show a case where the movable body 2 is returned, but is not improved. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Here, the return operation is performed three times, but if the movable body 2 does not return to the initial position, the return operation is given up and the operation of the movable body 2 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the movable body 2 cannot produce the effect, but the game itself is continued.

The maximum number of return operations may be the same for the transmissive unit 700'or the movable body 1 and the movable body 2, or may be different. For different times, whichever is larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration that requires a number of times for the return operation, and a smaller limit number may be set for a configuration that does not require a number of times for the return operation.

FIG. 47A shows a stage in which the movable body 2 has not been produced. FIG. 47B shows a case where the effect operation is performed after that, and shows a case where the movable body 2 moves to the maximum moving position. FIG. 47C shows a case where a moving operation of returning to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the movable body 2 is interrupted in the process of returning to the initial position.

FIG. 47 (d) assumes a case where the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the elapse of the moving time of the moving operation of FIG. 47 (c). In FIG. 47 (e), the first return operation is performed in response to this. The default image is displayed during the return operation. FIG. 47 (f) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the movement time of the first return operation has elapsed. In FIG. 47 (g), the second return operation is performed in response to this. FIG. 47 (h) assumes a case where the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 47 (i), the third return operation is performed in response to this.

FIG. 47 (j) assumes a case where the sensor 64 does not detect that the movable body 2 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Although the return operation was performed three times, the movable body 2 did not return to the initial position, so the return operation was given and the operation prohibition state of the movable body 2 was set to prohibit the operation.

Regarding the movable body 2, the operation prohibited state may not be released by opening the door bodies such as the front frame door 106'and the main body 102, and the operation prohibited state may be maintained, and the number of return operations may not be reset. good. Since the movable body 2 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the player, the discomfort given to the player may be relatively small even if the movement is prohibited. Of course, it is also possible to release the operation prohibition state or reset the number of return operations by opening the door body such as the front frame door 106'or the main body 102.

<Initial operation and return operation of the production movable body 224>
The initial operation and return operation of the effect movable body 224 are basically the same as the initial operation and return operation of the transmissive unit 700'and the like already described, and the effect movable body is based on the control data as shown in FIG. The initial operation and the return operation of 224 are executed. Hereinafter, a brief description will be given.

FIG. 48 is a diagram schematically showing an operation example of the effect movable body 224. FIGS. 48 (a) to 48 (c) show the case where the initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed when the power is turned on.

FIG. 48A shows a stage in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 when the power is turned on, and moves the effect movable body 224 to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 48 (b). After that, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the effect movable body 224 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 48 (c). By performing such an initial operation every time the power is turned on, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the effect movable body 224. Even if a condition for executing another operation is satisfied during the initial operation, the initial operation may be continued without interruption. By giving priority to the initial operation and completing it, it may be possible to confirm the operation more reliably.

FIGS. 48 (d) to 48 (i) show a case where the effect movable body 224 is restored when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 48D shows a stage (initial position stage) in which the effect movable body 224 is not operating.

FIG. 48E shows a case where the effect movable body 224 is subsequently moved to the maximum movement position as an effect operation. FIG. 48 (f) shows a case where a moving operation of returning the effect movable body 224 to the initial position is performed after the effect is completed.

FIG. 48 (g) assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the movement time set for the movement operation of FIG. 48 (f) has elapsed. Therefore, it is assumed that the movement of the effect movable body 224 is interrupted due to some obstacle. For example, a malfunction of the drive source or a foreign substance being caught in the drive source may be the cause.

Correspondingly, the return operation is performed at the stage of FIG. 48 (h). That is, in the present embodiment, the return operation is performed at least on condition that it is detected that the effect movable body 224 is returned to the initial position but has not returned. It should be noted that conditions other than the fact that the initial position is not detected may be weighted. The return operation is No. 1 of the transmissive unit 700'. Similar to the operation of 1, it is an operation of returning the effect movable body 224 to the initial position. Travel time is limited.

By this return operation, the movement of the effect movable body 224 is restarted and returned to the initial position, and in FIGS. 48 (i), it is detected by the sensors 74 and 75 that the movable body 1 is in the initial position. In this way, the effect movable body 224 may be returned to the normal operation state by the return operation.

FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (j) show a case where the effect movable body 224 is returned, but is not improved. In this example, a limit is set for the number of return operations. In other words, a limit is set for the number of times the condition for executing the return operation is satisfied. Here, the return operation is performed three times, but if the effect movable body 224 does not return to the initial position, the return is given up and the operation of the effect movable body 224 is prohibited. While the operation is prohibited, the effect cannot be produced by the effect movable body 224, but the game itself is continued.

The maximum number of return operations may be the same or different for the transmissive unit 700', the movable bodies 1, 2 and the like and the effect movable body 224. For different times, whichever is larger or smaller. The limit number of times may be set larger for a configuration that requires a number of times for the return operation, and a smaller limit number may be set for a configuration that does not require a number of times for the return operation.

FIG. 49A shows a stage in which the effect movable body 224 has not been produced. FIG. 49B shows a case where the effect operation is performed after that, and shows a case where the effect movable body 224 moves to the maximum movement position. FIG. 49C shows a case where a moving operation of returning to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the effect movable body 224 is interrupted in the process of returning to the initial position.

FIG. 49 (d) assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the movement time of the movement operation of FIG. 49 (c) has elapsed. In FIG. 49 (e), the first return operation is performed in response to this. FIG. 49F assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the movement time of the first return operation has elapsed. In FIG. 49 (g), the second return operation is performed in response to this. FIG. 49 (h) assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. In FIG. 49 (i), the third return operation is performed in response to this.

FIG. 49 (j) assumes a case where the sensors 74 and 75 do not detect that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position after the movement time has elapsed. Although the return operation was performed three times, the effect movable body 224 did not return to the initial position, so the return was given up and the operation prohibition state of the effect movable body 224 was set to prohibit the operation.

Regarding the effect movable body 224, the operation prohibited state may not be released by opening the door body such as the front frame door 106'or the main body 102, the operation prohibited state may be maintained, and the number of return operations may not be reset. May be good. Since the effect movable body 224 is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the player, the discomfort given to the player may be relatively small even if the movement is prohibited. Of course, it is also possible to release the operation prohibition state or reset the number of return operations by opening the door body such as the front frame door 106'or the main body 102.

The effect movable body 224 is composed of two movable bodies (upper arm portion 224a and forearm portion 224b), can be individually moved to the initial position, and can individually detect whether or not the movable body is located at the initial position. .. Therefore, if one of the movable bodies does not return to the initial position, the return operation may be performed only on that movable body. For example, if the upper arm portion 224a returns to the initial position but the forearm portion 224b does not return to the initial position, only the forearm portion 224b may perform the return operation. The operation prohibition state may be set individually for the upper arm portion 224a and the forearm portion 224b, but if either one of them does not return to the initial position, the entire effect movable body 224 may be in the operation prohibition state. It may be possible to avoid a situation in which the effect movable body 224 repeatedly performs an unnatural operation when the entire operation is prohibited.

<Related operation>
The movement of a movable body can be associated between a plurality of movable bodies. An example thereof will be described below.

<Order of initial operation>
The initial operations may be performed separately, but may be performed in order. FIG. 50 shows an example thereof. Here, a case where the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are operated in order is illustrated, and the order is the order of the movable body 1 → the movable body 2 → the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 50A shows a stage in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. Then, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 51 when the power is turned on, moves the movable body 1 to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 50 (b), and then moves the movable body 1 to the maximum moving position, and then in FIG. 50 (c). As shown, the movable body 1 is returned to the initial position.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 61 to move the movable body 2 to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 50 (d). At this time, by displaying the default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, the hall clerk or the like may be able to confirm the display function. After that, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 50 (e).

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 to move the effect movable body 224 to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 50 (f), and then as shown in FIG. 50 (g). Return the effect movable body 224 to the initial position.

By performing such a series of initial operations each time the power is turned on, it may be possible to smoothly confirm the operations of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224. Even if the condition for executing another operation is satisfied between the start of the initial operation of the movable body 1 and the end of the initial operation of the effect movable body 224, the initial operation is continued without interruption. You may do so. By giving priority to the initial operation and completing it, it may be possible to confirm the operation more reliably. Further, in the example of FIG. 50, the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are targeted, but the initial operation may be performed for all the movable bodies in order. Alternatively, it may be divided into predetermined groups (for example, a group of movable bodies on the front frame door 106'side and a group of movable bodies on the game board 200' side), and may be performed in order within the group.

<Initial operation triggered by return operation>
When a part of the movable body executes the return operation, the initial operation of the remaining part or all of the movable body may be performed. If some of the movable bodies malfunction due to deterioration over time, other movable bodies may also malfunction. Therefore, when a part of the movable body executes the return operation, the operation can be confirmed by performing the initial operation on the other movable body.

FIG. 51 shows an example thereof. Here, an example in which the initial operation is performed on the movable body 2 and the effect movable body 224 when the return operation is executed on the movable body 1 will be described.

FIG. 51A shows a stage (stage at the initial position) in which the movable body 1 is not operating. FIG. 51B shows a case where the movable body 1 is subsequently moved to the maximum moving position as an effect operation. FIG. 51 (c) shows a case where the moving operation of returning the movable body 1 to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect. FIG. 51 (d) assumes a case where the sensor 54 does not detect that the movable body 1 is in the initial position after the elapse of the movement time set for the movement operation of FIG. 51 (c). It is assumed that the movement of the movable body 1 is interrupted due to an obstacle.

Correspondingly, the return operation is performed at the stage of FIG. 51 (e). By this return operation, the movement of the movable body 1 is restarted and returned to the initial position, and in FIG. 51 (f), the sensor 54 detects that the movable body 1 is in the initial position.

Next, the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed. Although it is not when the power is turned on, the movement of the movable body 1 is temporarily interrupted, so the initial operation of the movable body 2 is performed just in case. The second sub-control unit 500 drives the motor 61 when the power is turned on, and moves the movable body 2 to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 51 (g). At this time, by displaying the default image on the movable body 2 as shown in the figure, the hall clerk or the like may be able to confirm the display function. After that, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the movable body 2 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 51 (h). As a result, the operation of the movable body 2 can be confirmed.

Subsequently, the initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is also performed. The second sub-control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 to move the effect movable body 224 to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 51 (i). After that, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the effect movable body 224 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 51 (j). As a result, the operation of the effect movable body 224 can be confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 51, the return operation is performed on one movable body, but the return operation may be performed on a plurality of movable bodies. It may be possible to prevent an unnecessarily large number of initial operations from being performed. FIG. 52 shows an example thereof. In the example of the figure, an example is shown in which the initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed on the condition that the return operation of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is performed.

FIG. 52A shows a stage (stage at the initial position) in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are not operating. FIG. 52B shows a case where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are subsequently moved as an effect operation. FIG. 52 (c) shows a case where the moving operation of returning the movable bodies 1 and 2 to the initial position is performed after the end of the effect.

FIG. 52 (d) assumes a case where it is not detected that the movable bodies 1 and 2 are in the initial positions after the elapse of each movement time set for the movement operation of FIG. 52 (c). It is assumed that the movement of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is interrupted due to an obstacle.

In response to this, the return operation is performed. Here, the return operation is performed in the order of the movable body 1 → the movable body 2, but it may be performed at the same time. First, as shown in FIG. 52 (e), the return operation of the movable body 1 is performed, and it is detected in FIG. 52 (f) that the movable body 1 has returned to the initial position. Subsequently, the movable body 2 is returned as shown in FIG. 52 (g), and it is detected that the movable body 2 has returned to the initial position as shown in FIG. 52 (h).

Subsequently, the initial operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed. The second sub-control unit 500 drives the motors 71 and 72 to move the effect movable body 224 to the maximum moving position as shown in FIG. 52 (i). After that, the second sub-control unit 500 returns the effect movable body 224 to the initial position as shown in FIG. 52 (j). As a result, the operation of the effect movable body 224 can be confirmed.

In the above description, the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 have been given as examples, but when some of the movable bodies perform the return operation, the remaining part or all of the other movable bodies are also movable. You may perform the initial movement of the body. However, since the transparent unit 700'and the chance button 700 are arranged at positions where the player can contact them, the transparent unit 700'and the chance button 700 may give the player a sense of discomfort when the initial operation is automatically activated. 'And the chance button 700 may perform the initial operation only when the power is turned on.

In addition to the above, the conditions for executing the initial operation by the return operation of the other movable body include, for example, the condition that the return operation of the other movable body has reached a predetermined number of times, or the return of the movable body. It is possible to set various conditions, such as when the total number of operations reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the return operation of a plurality of movable bodies is executed within a predetermined time. Is.

<Summary of related operations>
As related operations, the order of the initial operations and the initial operation triggered by the return operation have been described, and FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing a summary thereof.

FIG. 53A is a timing chart of an example of the order of the initial movements, and shows an example in which the initial movements of the fourth movable body, the fifth movable body, and the sixth movable body are sequentially performed. In the above-described specific example, the fourth movable body is referred to as the movable body 1, the fifth movable body is referred to as the movable body 2, and the sixth movable body is referred to as the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 53B is a timing chart of an example of the initial operation triggered by the return operation. In the upper row, when the fourth movable body performs the directing operation and the returning operation, it does not return to the initial position, and when the returning operation is performed, the initial operation of the fifth movable body and the initial operation of the sixth movable body are performed. Is shown as an example in which is performed sequentially. In the above-described specific example, the fourth movable body is referred to as the movable body 1, the fifth movable body is referred to as the movable body 2, and the sixth movable body is referred to as the effect movable body 224. In the middle stage, as another variation, when the fifth movable body performs the directing operation and the returning operation, it does not return to the initial position, and when the returning operation is performed, the initial operation of the fourth movable body, the sixth An example is shown in which the initial movements of the movable body are sequentially performed. In the lower row, as another variation, when the sixth movable body performs the directing operation and the returning operation, it does not return to the initial position, and when the returning operation is performed, the initial operation of the fourth movable body, the sixth An example is shown in which the initial movements of the movable body are sequentially performed.

FIG. 53 (c) is also a timing chart of an example of the initial operation triggered by the return operation, but is an example of performing the initial operation of the other movable body triggered by the return operation of the two movable bodies. When the fourth movable body performs the directing operation and the returning motion, it does not return to the initial position, and when the fifth movable body performs the directing motion and the returning motion, it does not return to the initial position, and the fourth movable body does not return to the initial position. The return operation and the return operation of the fifth movable body are sequentially performed. Then, an example in which the initial operation of the sixth movable body is performed is shown. In the above-described specific example, the fourth movable body is referred to as the movable body 1, the fifth movable body is referred to as the movable body 2, and the sixth movable body is referred to as the effect movable body 224.

<Example of motion control of movable body>
Examples of operation control of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. Here, it is assumed that the second sub-control unit 500 executes the drive control of the motor 51 of the movable body 1, the motor 61 of the movable body 2, and the motors 71 and 72 of the effect movable body 224. FIG. 54 (a) shows a processing example included in the movable body control processing of S713 of FIG. 10 (a).

In S1461, a fourth movable body control process is performed. Here, processing related to motion control of the movable body 1 is performed. In S1462, the fifth movable body control process is performed. Here, processing related to motion control of the movable body 2 is performed. In S1463, the sixth movable body control process is performed. Here, processing related to motion control of the effect movable body 224 is performed.

Here, similarly to the transmissive unit 700'and the like, the control states of the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are individually set in terms of operation control. The control state includes at least the first to fourth states. The first state is a state when the power is turned on, and is a state in which execution of the initial operation is set. The second state is a state in which execution of the return operation is set. The third state is a standby state in which no operation is performed. The fourth state is a state in which an operation prohibited state is set.

FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the fourth movable body control process of S1461. In S1471, it is determined whether or not the movable body 1 is set to the fourth state. If applicable, proceed to S1478, and if not applicable, proceed to S1472. In S1472, it is determined whether or not the first state is set for the movable body 1. If applicable, proceed to S1473, and if not applicable, proceed to S1474.

In S1473, a setting related to execution of the initial operation (drive setting and the like) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1474, it is determined whether or not the second state is set for the movable body 1. If applicable, proceed to S1475, and if not applicable, proceed to S1476.

In S1475, a setting related to execution of the return operation (drive setting and the like) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1476, it is determined whether or not the movable body 1 is set to the third state. If applicable, proceed to S1477, and if not applicable, proceed to S1478. In S1477, command-related processing (processing related to command return value and received command, etc.) is performed.

In S1478, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to S1479, and if it is not satisfied, the processing of one unit is terminated. In S1478 and S1479, a process of updating the control state of the movable body 1 is performed. For example, a third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the effect operation, and the like. When an attempt is made to return the movable body 1 to the initial position but it is detected that the movable body 1 has not returned, a second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit, the fourth state is set. Further, when the initial operation triggered by the return operation is performed, the first state is set when the fifth movable body or the sixth movable body performs the return operation.

FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the fifth movable body control process of S1462. In S1481, it is determined whether or not the movable body 2 is set to the fourth state. If applicable, proceed to S1488, and if not applicable, proceed to S1482. In S1482, it is determined whether or not the first state is set for the movable body 1. If applicable, proceed to S1483, and if not applicable, proceed to S1484.

In S1483, a setting related to execution of the initial operation (drive setting and the like) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1484, it is determined whether or not the movable body 2 is set to the second state. If applicable, proceed to S1485, and if not applicable, proceed to S1486.

In S1485, a setting related to execution of the return operation (drive setting, etc.) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1486, it is determined whether or not the movable body 2 is set to the third state. If applicable, proceed to S1487, and if not applicable, proceed to S1488. In S1487, command-related processing (processing related to command return value and received command, etc.) is performed.

In S1488, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to S1489, and if it is not satisfied, the processing of one unit is terminated. In S1488 and S1489, a process of updating the control state of the movable body 2 is performed. For example, a third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the effect operation, and the like. If an attempt is made to return the movable body 2 to the initial position but it is detected that the movable body 2 has not returned, a second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit, the fourth state is set. Further, when the initial operation triggered by the return operation is performed, the first state is set when the fourth movable body or the sixth movable body performs the return operation.

FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the sixth movable body control process of S1463. In S1491, it is determined whether or not the fourth state is set in the effect movable body 224. If applicable, proceed to S1498, and if not applicable, proceed to S1492. In S1492, it is determined whether or not the first state is set in the effect movable body 224. If applicable, proceed to S1493, and if not applicable, proceed to S1494.

In S1493, a setting related to execution of the initial operation (drive setting and the like) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor and the like) are performed. In S1494, it is determined whether or not the second state is set in the effect movable body 224. If applicable, proceed to S1495, and if not applicable, proceed to S1496.

In S1495, a setting related to execution of the return operation (drive setting, etc.) and a process related to monitoring whether the initial operation is successful (position detection by a sensor, etc.) are performed. In S1496, it is determined whether or not the third state is set in the effect movable body 224. If applicable, proceed to S1497, and if not applicable, proceed to S1498. In S1497, command-related processing (processing related to command return value and received command, etc.) is performed.

In S1498, it is determined whether or not the state change condition is satisfied, and if it is satisfied, the process proceeds to S1499, and if it is not satisfied, the processing of one unit is terminated. In S1498 and S1499, a process of updating the control state of the effect movable body 224 is performed. For example, a third state is set at the end of the initial operation, the end of the return operation, the end of the effect operation, and the like. When an attempt is made to return the effect movable body 224 to the initial position but it is detected that the movable body 224 has not returned, a second state is set. When the number of return operations reaches the limit, the fourth state is set. Further, when the initial operation triggered by the return operation is performed, the first state is set when the fourth movable body or the sixth movable body performs the return operation.

Next, the control of the drive sources (step motors 51, 61, 71 and 72) for driving the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. 56 (a) and 56 (b) show interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

With reference to FIG. 56A, in S1501, a process of outputting a signal from the motor driver to the motor is performed. This drives the motor. In S1502, the sensor detection process is performed. Here, the detection results of the sensors (54, 64, 74, 75) that detect the movable bodies 1 and 2 and the effect movable body 224 are acquired. In S1503, other processing is performed. This completes the first drive interrupt processing for one unit.

With reference to FIG. 56B, in S1504, the motor control process for the operation of the movable body 1 is performed, in S1505, the motor control process for the operation of the movable body 2 is performed, and in S1506, the operation of the effect movable body 224 is performed. Performs motor control processing for this purpose. This completes the second drive interrupt processing for one unit. As each motor control process of S1504 to S1506, the control shown in FIG. 28C can be adopted.

<Example of a movable body mounted on a movable body>
FIG. 57 shows an example of a movable body mounted on the movable body. In the example of the figure, the configuration in which the movable bodies 9L and 9R are applied to the shielding device 246 is illustrated. The shielding device 246 includes the drive mechanism 8 described above, a movable body 246a'instead of the left door 246a, and a movable body 246b'instead of the right door 246b. The configurations of the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' are substantially the same as those of the left doors 246a and 246b, but the shapes and sizes are different. The drive mechanism 8 has the above-described configuration, but here, the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' are reciprocated to the left and right. The initial positions of the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' are the positions shown in FIG. 57. The sensors 85a and 85b are arranged here so as to detect the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' at the initial positions.

The movable body 9L is provided on the movable body 246a', and the movable body 9R is provided on the movable body 246b'. The movable body 9L is a plate-shaped member in which a pair of cutting edge-shaped protrusions 9a protrude from a circular portion, and is rotatably supported by the movable body 246a'with the center of the circular portion as the center of rotation. A detection piece 9b is formed in the circular portion at a position deviated from the center of rotation.

The movable body 9R is also the same as the movable member 9L, and is a plate-shaped member in which a pair of cutting edge-shaped protrusions 9b protrude from a circular portion, and can be rotatably formed on the movable body 246b'with the center of the circular portion as the center of rotation. It is supported. A detection piece 9b is formed in the circular portion at a position deviated from the center of rotation. A part of the movable bodies 9R and 9L (for example, protrusions 9a and 9b) may be a transparent member, or conversely, a non-transparent member may be used.

The movable bodies 246a'and 246b' are provided with drive mechanisms for independently driving the movable bodies 9L and 9R, respectively. The drive mechanism includes a drive source 91 such as a step motor, a drive pulley 92, a driven pulley 93, and a belt 94 wound around these pulleys. The drive sources 91 and 91 are supported by the corresponding movable bodies 246a'and 246b'. The drive pulley 92 is attached to the output shaft of the drive source 91 and is rotated by the drive source 91. The driven pulleys 92 and 92 are attached to the rotation center axes of the movable bodies 9L and 9R. When the drive source 91 is driven, the belt 94 travels and the movable bodies 9L and 9R rotate. By switching the rotation direction of the drive source 91, the rotation directions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R are also switched.

Sensors 94 and 94 are provided on the movable bodies 246a'and 246b', respectively. The sensor 94 is an optical sensor composed of a light emitting element and a light receiving element, and the detection piece 9b is arranged so as to pass between the light emitting element and the light receiving element. By detecting the detection piece 9b with the sensor 94, the positions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R can be detected. In the case of the present embodiment, when the postures of the movable bodies 9L and 9R shown in FIG. 57 are the initial positions and the movable bodies 9L and 9R are in the initial positions, the detection piece 9b is configured to be detected by the sensor 94. There is. Needless to say, the positions of the movable bodies 9L and 9R that can be detected by the sensor 94 are not absolute positions but relative positions with respect to the movable bodies 246a'and 246b'.

Next, operation examples of the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' and the movable bodies 9L and 9R will be described. As shown in FIG. 57, when the movable bodies 246a'and 246b'are in the initial positions and the movable bodies 9L and 9R are in the initial positions, substantially the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not covered by these. It is in. Further, when the movable bodies 9L and 9R are in the initial positions, the range in which the movable bodies 9L and 9R and the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' overlap is the largest. In other words, the portion where the movable bodies 9L and 9R protrude from the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' in front view is the smallest.

As described above, the movable bodies 9L and 9R can rotate the movable bodies 9L and 9R. However, when the movable bodies 246a'and 246b are rotated, their postures change, and the range in which the movable bodies 9L and 9R and the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' overlap changes. In other words, the portion of the movable bodies 9L and 9R protruding from the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' changes when viewed from the front.

When the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' are in the initial positions, if the postures of the movable bodies 9L and 9R change, they may interfere with the left and right side wall portions 81b and 81c of the drive mechanism 8. Therefore, while controlling the maximum amount of change in the posture of the movable bodies 9L and 9R according to the positions of the movable bodies 246a'and 246b', the effect of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is controlled. Here, the interference between the left and right side wall portions 81b and 81c of the drive mechanism 8 and the movable bodies 9L and 9R is taken into consideration, but the effect of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is taken into consideration in consideration of the interference with other configurations such as a harness. Control may be performed.

When the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' are in the initial positions, the movable bodies 9L and 9R are set to the initial positions, and the effect of rotating the movable bodies 9L and 9R is not performed. When performing the effect of rotating, the amount of rotation of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is set to the smallest range, and at least a part of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is located in at least one of the areas other than the specific area (for example, the side wall portion). Operation in a region that does not interfere with 81b and 81c) may be performed. On the contrary, the movable bodies 9L and 9R may be rotated so that the movable bodies 9L and 9R collide with the side wall portions 81b and 81c, which may be a kind of effect.

When the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' are moved from the initial position, it is possible to produce the movable bodies 9L and 9R while restricting the rotation amount of the movable bodies 9L and 9R according to the moving amount. FIG. 58A shows a state in which the movable body 246a'is moved from the initial position.

In the example of the figure, the movable body 246a'is moved to a position where the movable body 246a' slightly overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front view. At this time, a part of the protrusion 9a of the movable body 9L overlaps with the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 9L is in a state of attracting the attention of the player who is viewing the image of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 58B shows a state in which the movable body 9L is operated. Here, the posture of the movable body 9L is changed by reciprocating the movable body 9L within a predetermined angle range. A vibrating operation may be performed by continuously performing a reciprocating operation. At the position where the movable body 9L is most rotated from the initial position, the range where the movable bodies 9L and 9R and the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' overlap is smaller than the initial position. In other words, the portion of the movable bodies 9L and 9R protruding from the movable bodies 246a'and 246b' in front view is larger than the initial position.

By operating the movable body 9L while restricting the amount of rotation in this way, it may be possible to perform various effects while preventing damage to the structure of the movable body and its surroundings.

In FIG. 59 (a), the movable body 246a'is moved to a position where the movable body 246a'overlaps the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the movable body 9L is in the initial position, and substantially the entire portion overlaps with the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player who is viewing the image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a state of attracting the attention of the player.

FIG. 59B shows a state in which the movable body 9L is operated. Here, the posture of the movable body 9L is changed by rotating it 360 degrees. At this position, even if the movable body 9L is rotated 360 degrees, it does not interfere with the side wall portions 81b and 81c, and it is not necessary to regulate the posture change of the movable body 9L.

Even if the movable body 246a'is located at the position shown in FIG. 59 (a), the operating range of the movable body 9L may be restricted in relation to the movable body 9R. FIG. 60 shows an example thereof. In the example of the figure, the position of the movable body 246a'is the same as that of FIG. 59 (a). However, the movable body 246b'is moved to a position where the entire movable body 246b' overlaps with the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, when the movable body 9L is rotated, it may interfere with the movable body 9R. On the contrary, when the movable body 9R is rotated, it may interfere with the movable body 9L.

Therefore, the effect of rotating the movable bodies 9L and 9R is not performed. When performing the effect of rotating, the amount of rotation of the movable bodies 9L and 9R is set to the smallest range, but the movable bodies 9L and 9R may be rotated so that the movable bodies 9L and 9R collide with each other, which may be a kind of effect. ..

<Summary of Embodiment>
A1. The above game table (for example, 100)
Displayable display means (eg 208) and
Movable bodies (eg 1) and
Light emitting means (for example, 32, 33) capable of emitting light, and
A changing means (for example, 31) capable of changing the direction of light from the light emitting means to at least the player side, and
Ornaments (eg 4) and
It is a game table equipped with
The movable body is a movable body located closer to the player than the display means (for example, FIG. 31).
The changing means is a means located on the player side of the movable body (for example, FIG. 31).
The decorative body is a decorative body located on the player side of the changing means (for example, FIG. 31).
At least a part of the movable body may overlap at least a part of the display means (for example, FIG. 31).
The changing means is a means in which at least a part thereof overlaps at least a part of the display means (for example, FIG. 31).
A first gap (for example, G1) is formed between the display means and the movable body.
A second gap (for example, G2) is formed between the movable body and the changing means.
A third gap (for example, G3) is formed between the changing means and the decorative body.
The third gap communicates with at least the second gap (eg, FIG. 31).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game table having a characteristic of a movable body. In addition, the production of the game table can be diversified, and the clerk may be able to handle the movable body when the movable body breaks down. In addition, since the movable body can be accessed through the gap, when the movable body is fixed with a bubble wrap or the like during transportation of the game table, the bubble wrap used can be small, so that the cost during transportation can be reduced. May be possible.

A2. The second gap communicates with at least the first gap (eg, FIG. 31).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the movable body can be fixed so as not to come into contact with the display means with a bubble wrap or the like during transportation of the game table, and damage to the movable body and the display means can be prevented. be.

A3. The ornament is located at a position that overlaps at least a part of the end of the changing means (for example, FIG. 31).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the end portion of the changing means is covered from the front, the appearance quality may be improved.

A4. The decorative body is located at a position that overlaps at least a part of the movable body located at the initial position (for example, FIG. 31).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the player may be surprised when the movable body operates.

A5. The light emitting means is a means that may emit light during at least a part of the operating period of the movable body.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body and the effect of the light of the changing means can be performed, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

The following configurations can also be adopted.

The changing means may be a means located at a position that does not overlap with at least a part of the movable body located at the initial position. It may be easier to access the movable body.

Further comprising a second light emitting means capable of emitting light, the decorative body is at least partially transparent or translucent, and the second light emitting means is a means located at a position behind the decorative body. May be good. In some cases, the effect of the decorative body can be improved by the light emission of the second light emitting means.

The changing means may be located at a position that covers all of the movable body located at the initial position. The changing means may overlap an area of half or more of the display area of the display means. In some cases, the effect of the effect of the changing means can be improved.

A ball entry blocking member may be arranged on the player side of the changing means. Another movable body may be arranged between the changing means and the ball entry blocking member. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the entry of the game ball and reduce the breakdown of the movable body and the like.

The changing means may be a light emitting panel made of a light guide member. The light emitting panel may be capable of emitting light by light from the lateral direction. The light emitting means may be arranged at a place other than the upper end of the light emitting panel. The degree of freedom in selecting the arrangement of the light source may be improved.

The second gap may be formed between at least a part of the end portion of the changing means and the movable body at a predetermined position. The second gap may be formed between at least a part of the upper end portion of the changing means and the movable body at a predetermined position. The second gap may be formed between at least a part of the lateral end portion of the changing means and the movable body at a predetermined position. The predetermined position may be the initial position of the movable body. A gap may be formed according to the configuration of the game table to facilitate maintenance.

The third gap may be formed between at least a part of the end portion of the changing means and the decorative body. The third gap may be formed between at least a part of the upper end portion of the changing means and the decorative body. The third gap may be formed between at least a part of the lateral end portion of the changing means and the decorative body. A gap may be formed according to the configuration of the game table to facilitate maintenance.

A gap accessible to the movable body may be formed at the upper end of the game board. A gap accessible to the movable body may be formed at the side end portion of the game board. It may be easy to maintain.

The width of the first gap may be constant or at least partly different. The width of the second gap may be constant, or at least partly different. The width of the third gap may be constant, or at least a part thereof may be different. The width of at least a part of the third gap may be larger, the same, or smaller than the width of a part of the second gap. The width of at least a part of the third gap may be larger, the same, or smaller than the width of a part of the first gap. The width of at least a part of the second gap may be larger, the same, or smaller than the width of a part of the first gap. It may be possible to prevent unnecessary gaps from occurring while improving maintainability.

The movable body may have at least fastening means (for example, BL, screws, bolts, etc.). The width of at least a part of the first gap may be larger, the same, or smaller than the total length of the fastening means. The width of at least a part of the second gap may be larger, the same, or smaller than the total length of the fastening means. The fastening means may be easily removed, or the dropout prevention property may be improved.

The decorative body may have at least fastening means (for example, BL, screws, bolts, etc.). The width of at least a part of the second gap may be larger, the same, or smaller than the total length of the fastening member. The fastening means may be easily removed, or the dropout prevention property may be improved.

At least a part of the first gap and at least a part of the second gap may be formed at the same height in the height direction of the game table. At least a part of the second gap and at least a part of the third gap may be formed at the same height in the height direction of the game table. Even if at least a part of the first gap, at least a part of the second gap, and at least a part of the third gap are formed at the same height in the height direction of the game table. good. It may be easy to insert the cushioning material into the gap.

The movable body may be movable between the changing means and the displaying means. In some cases, the effect of the movable body can be improved.

When the movable body moves to a position different from the initial position, at least a part of the movable body may overlap with at least a part of the display means. When the movable body moves to a position different from the initial position, at least a part of the movable body may always overlap with at least a part of the display means. The movable body may be a movable body that does not overlap with the display means when the movable body is positioned at the initial position. The changing means may be a means in which at least a part thereof does not overlap with at least a part of the display means. The decorative body may be a decorative body located at a position that does not overlap with the changing means. The decorative body may be a decorative body located at a position that always overlaps at least a part of the movable body located at the initial position.

B1. The above game table (for example, 100)
With the first movable body (eg 246a'),
With a second movable body (eg 9L),
It is a game table equipped with
The first movable body is a movable body having the second movable body (for example, FIG. 57).
The first movable body is a movable body that can move at least between the first position and the second position (for example, FIGS. 57-60).
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing at least the first operation (for example, FIGS. 58 and 59).
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation in at least the first case.
The second movable body is a movable body that does not perform the first operation in at least the second case.
The first case is a case where the first movable body is located at the second position (for example, FIG. 57).
The second case is a case where the first movable body is located at the first position (for example, FIGS. 58 and 59).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game table having a characteristic of a movable body. In addition, it may be possible to prevent damage to the movable body and perform various effects.

B2. The first operation is an operation in which the posture of the second movable body is changed.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the effect of production may be improved.

B3. The second movable body is a movable body that can change to at least the first posture (for example, FIG. 57).
The second movable body is a movable body that can change to at least the second posture (for example, FIGS. 58 and 59).
The second posture is a posture in which the overlapping range of the second movable body and the first movable body is smaller than that of the first posture.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the movable body from being damaged and to perform various effects.

B4. The second movable body is a movable body that can change to at least the first posture (for example, FIG. 57).
The second movable body is a movable body that can change to at least the second posture (for example, FIGS. 58 and 59).
The second posture is a posture in which a portion protruding from the first movable body is larger than the first posture.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the movable body from being damaged and to perform various effects.

B5. The first movable body is a movable body that can move back and forth (for example, FIGS. 58-60).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the movable body from being damaged and to perform various effects.

The following configurations can also be adopted.

The display means (for example, 208) is further provided, and the second position may be a position where the first movable body covers at least a part of the display means (for example, FIGS. 58 and 59). ..

The first movable body may be a means capable of moving to a third position (for example, FIG. 58). The third position may be any of the positions between the first position and the second position (for example, FIG. 59). The second movable body may be a means capable of performing the second operation in the third case (for example, FIG. 58). The third case may be a case where the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, FIG. 58).

A third movable body (for example, 9R) may be further provided, and the third movable body may be a means capable of moving to a fourth position (for example, FIG. 57) and a fifth position (for example, FIG. 60). ..

The second movable body may be a means that does not perform the first operation in the fourth case (for example, FIG. 60). The fourth case is a case where the first movable body is located at the second position, and the fourth case is a case where the third movable body is located at the fifth position. This may be the case (eg, Figure 60).

The second movable body may be capable of a third operation when the first movable body is in the initial position. The third operation may be an operation in which at least a part of the second movable body is located in at least one of the regions other than the specific region.

At least one of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation is an operation including a linear orbital movement, an operation including a curved orbital movement, a vibration operation, a reciprocating operation, a rotational operation, and a lateral direction. It may be at least one of an operation including movement, an operation including vertical movement, an operation including depth movement, and an operation including pause.

A first driving means for moving the first movable body may be provided. A second driving means for operating the second movable body may be provided. The first movable body may have the second driving means. The second driving means may include a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid.

The operation of the second movable body may be determined by the position of the first movable body and the position of the third movable body.

The second movable body may be a movable body capable of performing the second operation. The second movable body may be a movable body capable of at least performing the first operation in the first case. The second movable body may be a movable body that always executes the first operation in the first case.

C1. The above game table (for example, 100)
With multiple movable bodies (eg 700,700', 900),
With multiple door bodies (eg 106', 104),
With multiple detection means (eg)
It is a game table equipped with
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, 700').
At least one of the plurality of door bodies is a first door body (for example, 106').
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means (for example, 858').
The first movable body is at least a movable body provided on the first door body.
The first movable body is a movable body provided at a position where the player can at least contact with the movable body.
The first detection means is a means capable of detecting the first movable body, and is a means capable of detecting the first movable body.
The first movable body is a movable body that can operate from the first state.
The first state is the initial state of the first movable body.
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation.
The first operation is an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state (for example, a return operation).
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation when at least the first condition is satisfied.
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation when at least the second condition is satisfied.
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first door body is opened.
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first detecting means detects that the first movable body has not returned to the first state (for example, FIG. 20). ,
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game table having a characteristic of a movable body. In addition, the first movable body may be able to be returned to the initial position.

C2. The second condition is a condition in which the number of establishments is limited.
The first condition is a condition in which the number of establishments is unlimited.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the first movable body may be returned to the initial position, and the first operation may be prevented from being repeated without limitation.

C3. At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, 900).
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a second detection means (for example, 902).
The second movable body is a movable body provided at a position where the player cannot touch at least.
The second detection means is a means capable of detecting the second movable body, and is a means capable of detecting the second movable body.
The second movable body is a movable body that can operate from the second state.
The second state is the initial state of the second movable body.
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing the second operation.
The second operation is an operation in which the second movable body returns to the second state (for example, a return operation).
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing the second operation when at least the third condition is satisfied.
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the second detecting means detects that the second movable body has not returned to the second state.
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied up to the first number of times.
The third condition is a condition that can be satisfied up to the second number of times.
The second number of times is different from the first number of times.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the second movable body may be returned to the initial position.

C4. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing an initial operation when the power is turned on.
The initial operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the first state (for example, FIG. 20).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to confirm the operation of the first movable body.

C5. The first movable body is a movable body that continues without interrupting the initial operation when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the initial operation.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to more reliably confirm the operation of the first movable body.

In addition, the following configurations can also be adopted.

The first movable body may include a second door body (for example, 104) and may be capable of performing the first operation when at least the fourth condition is satisfied, and the fourth condition may be satisfied. May be a condition that can be satisfied by opening the second door body (for example, FIG. 22). In some cases, the first movable body can be returned to the initial position.

The second number of times may be smaller, larger, or the same as the first number of times.

The second movable body may not execute the second operation when the first condition is satisfied. The second movable body may be left as it is.

When the first condition is satisfied, the number of times the second condition is satisfied may be reset. When the first condition is satisfied and the first detecting means detects that the first movable body has returned to the first state, the number of times the second condition is satisfied. May be reset. When the power is turned on or shut off, the number of times the second condition is satisfied may be reset. After that, when the second condition is satisfied, the first operation can be executed.

The initial state may be the initial position of the movable body. The first condition may be a case where the first movable body is at a position different from the initial position, and may be a condition that can be satisfied by opening the first door body.

The initial operation does not have to be performed as a notice. The operation of returning to the first state may not be performed as a notice. The operation of returning to the second state may not be performed as a notice. In some cases, it is possible to perform an operation that is different from the production operation such as a notice.

There may be a movable body (for example, 700,700') in which the number of times the second condition is satisfied is limited, and a movable body (for example, 900) in which the number of times the second condition is satisfied is unlimited. The movable body having a limit on the number of times the second condition is satisfied may be an electric chew, an attacker, or a sorting device.

The first movable body may be one that can be operated by the player. When the player operates the first movable body, the first effect (for example, reach effect) may be performed. The first detecting means means that the first door is opened, the first movable body executes the first operation, and the first movable body returns to the first state. If it is detected, a second effect that is at least partly in common with the first effect may be performed. The second effect may be performed by at least one of display and sound. The display may be the same as the first effect. The sound may include a door opening sound in the sound of the first effect, or may be only a door opening sound. The second effect does not have to be performed.

The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body returns to the initial position. The initial operation may include only an operation in which the movable body returns to the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body moves away from the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body moves to the maximum moving position.

The first operation may be executed at the start of the fluctuation, at the end of the fluctuation, or when a predetermined time has elapsed from the previous movement of the movable body.

A game table including a plurality of movable bodies, a plurality of door bodies, and a plurality of detection means, and at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, and the plurality of movable bodies. At least one of the door bodies is the first door body, at least one of the plurality of detection means is the first detection means, and the first movable body is the first movable body. A movable body provided at least on one door body, the first movable body is a movable body provided at least at a position where a player can contact, and the first detecting means is the first one. The first movable body is a movable body that can operate from the first state, and the first state is the initial state of the first movable body. That is, the first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation, and the first operation is an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation in the first case, and the first movable body is the first movable body in the second case. It may be a game table characterized by being a movable body capable of performing the above.

A game table including a plurality of movable bodies, a plurality of door bodies, and a plurality of detection means, and at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, and the plurality of movable bodies. At least one of the door bodies is the first door body, at least one of the plurality of detection means is the first detection means, and the first movable body is the first movable body. A movable body provided at least on one door body, the first movable body is a movable body provided at least at a position where a player can contact, and the first detecting means is the first one. The first movable body is a movable body that can operate from the first state, and the first state is the initial state of the first movable body. That is, the first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation, and the first operation is an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation when the first door body is opened, and the first movable body is the first movable body. A game table characterized in that the movable body is a movable body capable of executing the first operation when the first detecting means detects that the movable body has not returned to the first state. It may be.

D1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment
With multiple movable bodies (eg 1,2,224),
With multiple detection means (eg 54,64,74,75),
It is a game table equipped with
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, 1).
At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, 224).
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means (for example, 54).
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a second detection means (for example, 74,75).
The first movable body is a movable body that can operate from the first state.
The second movable body is a movable body that can operate from the second state.
The first state is the initial state of the first movable body.
The second state is the initial state of the second movable body.
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation when at least the first condition is satisfied.
The first operation is an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state (for example, a return operation).
The first condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first detecting means detects that the first movable body has not returned to the first state.
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation when the power is turned on (for example, an initial operation).
The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the second state.
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing the second operation when the first movable body executes the first operation (for example, FIG. 51).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to realize a game table having a characteristic of a movable body. In addition, it may be possible to return a plurality of movable bodies to their initial positions.

D2. The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a third operation when the power is turned on (for example, an initial operation).
The third operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the first state.
The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing the fourth operation when at least the second condition is satisfied.
The fourth operation is an operation in which the second movable body returns to the second state (for example, a return operation).
The second condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the second detecting means detects that the second movable body has not returned to the second state.
The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the third operation when the second movable body executes the fourth operation (for example, FIG. 53 (b)).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to return the plurality of movable bodies to the initial positions.

D3. At least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a third movable body (for example, 2).
At least one of the plurality of detection means is a third detection means (for example, 64).
The third movable body is a movable body that can operate from the third state.
The third state is the initial state of the third movable body.
The third movable body is a movable body capable of performing a fifth operation when the power is turned on (for example, an initial operation).
The fifth operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the third state.
The third movable body is a movable body capable of performing the fifth operation when the first movable body executes the first operation (for example, FIG. 53 (b)).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to return the plurality of movable bodies to the initial positions.

D4. The third movable body is a movable body including a display means.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the effect of production may be improved.

D5. The first movable body is a movable body that may be hidden at least in part (for example, FIG. 29).
The second movable body is a movable body in which at least a part of the movable body is not hidden (for example, FIG. 29).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the effect of production may be improved.

In addition, the following configurations can also be adopted.

The initial state may be the initial position of the movable body. The second operation may be an initial operation. The third operation may be an initial operation. The fifth operation may be an initial operation. The first operation may be a return operation to the initial position. The fourth operation may be a return operation to the initial position.

The second movable body may start the second operation when the first movable body starts the first operation, or the first movable body performs the first operation. The second operation may be started after the start, or the second operation may be started after the first movable body has completed the first operation.

The first movable body may not perform the third operation even when the second movable body executes the fourth operation.

The first movable body and the second movable body may have the same position in the depth direction of the game table (for example, FIG. 32) or may be different. If they are the same, the thickness of the game table may be made thinner. If they are different, the perspective between the movable bodies is emphasized, and the effect of the effect may be improved.

The third movable body does not have to execute the fifth operation when the first movable body executes the first operation. The third movable body may or may not perform the fifth operation when the second movable body executes the fourth operation. The third movable body performs the fifth operation when the first movable body executes the first operation and the second movable body executes the fourth operation. It may or may not be executed. The third movable body may be capable of performing the sixth operation when at least the third condition is satisfied, and the sixth operation is the third movable body. May be an operation of returning to the third state, and the third condition is that the third movable body has not returned to the third state. It may be a condition that can be satisfied by being detected by.

The third operation may be an operation different from the first operation. The second operation may be an operation different from the fourth operation.

The first condition may be a condition in which the number of establishments is limited, or a condition in which the number of establishments is not limited. The second condition may be a condition in which the number of establishments is limited, or a condition in which the number of establishments is not limited. The third condition may be a condition in which the number of establishments is limited, or a condition in which the number of establishments is not limited.

The first movable body may be one that can be operated by the player. When the player operates the first movable body, the first effect may be performed. When the first door is opened, the first movable body executes the first operation, and the first movable body returns to the first state, the first detecting means is informed. When detected, a second effect that is at least partly in common with the first effect may be performed.

The second effect may be performed by at least one of display and sound. The display may be the same as the first effect. The sound may include a door opening sound in the sound of the first effect, or may be only a door opening sound.
-It is not necessary to perform the second effect.
-The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body returns to the initial position. The initial operation may include only the operation of returning the movable body to the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body moves away from the initial position. The initial operation may include an operation in which the movable body moves to the maximum moving position.

The detection means may be a means for detecting that the movable body is in the initial position. When one of the plurality of movable bodies is not detected by the detection means, after the one movable body executes the return operation, the other movable body executes the initial operation. You may. When two of the plurality of movable bodies are not detected by the detection means, after the two movable bodies execute the return operation, the other movable body executes the initial operation. You may.

At least two or more movable bodies among the plurality of movable bodies may or may not overlap at least a part of the operating range. At least two of the plurality of movable bodies may be capable of overlapping one with the other.

The first movable body may be a movable body capable of at least performing the first operation when at least the first condition is satisfied. Further, the first movable body may be a movable body that always executes the first operation when at least the first condition is satisfied. The second movable body may be a movable body capable of at least performing the fourth operation when at least the second condition is satisfied. Further, the second movable body may be a movable body that always executes the fourth operation when at least the second condition is satisfied. The first condition may be a condition in which the number of establishments is limited.

A game table including a plurality of movable bodies and a plurality of detection means, at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, and among the plurality of movable bodies. At least one is a second movable body, at least one of the plurality of detection means is a first detection means, and at least one of the plurality of detection means is a second. The first movable body is a detection means, the first movable body is a movable body that can operate from the first state, the second movable body is a movable body that can operate from the second state, and the first The state of is the initial state of the first movable body, the second state is the initial state of the second movable body, and the first movable body is the first. In one case, it is a movable body capable of performing the first operation, and the first operation is an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state, and the second operation. The movable body is a movable body capable of performing a second operation when the power is turned on, and the second operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the second state. The second movable body may be a game table characterized in that, in the second case, the second movable body is a movable body capable of performing the second operation.

A game table including a plurality of movable bodies and a plurality of detection means, at least one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body, and among the plurality of movable bodies. At least one is a second movable body, at least one of the plurality of detecting means is a first detecting means, and at least one of the plurality of detecting means is a second. The first movable body is a detection means, the first movable body is a movable body that can operate from the first state, the second movable body is a movable body that can operate from the second state, and the first The state of is the initial state of the first movable body, the second state is the initial state of the second movable body, and the first movable body is the said. When the first detecting means detects that the first movable body has not returned to the first state, the first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the first operation, and the first operation is performed. Is an operation in which the first movable body returns to the first state, and the second movable body is a movable body capable of performing the second operation when the power is turned on. The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the operation to the return to the second state, and in the second movable body, the first movable body is the first operation. The game console may be characterized in that it is a movable body capable of executing the second operation when the above is executed.

The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a third operation when the power is turned on, and the third operation is a series from the start of the operation to the return to the first state. The second movable body is a movable body capable of performing the fourth movement in the third case, and the fourth movement is the second movable body. It is an operation of returning to the second state, and the first movable body is a game table characterized in that, in the fourth case, the first movable body is a movable body capable of performing the third operation. May be good.

The first movable body is a movable body capable of performing a third operation when the power is turned on, and the third operation is a series from the start of the operation to the return to the first state. The second movable body is the fourth operation when the second detecting means detects that the second movable body has not returned to the second state. The fourth operation is an operation in which the second movable body returns to the second state, and the first movable body is the second movable body. The game table may be characterized in that the movable body of the above is a movable body capable of executing the third operation when the fourth operation is executed.

<Embodiment B>
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 63) as external structures. .. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, and a door side effect not shown here are movable on the front side. The body is attached. A game area 124 (see FIG. 63) is partitioned between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a door opening sensor 609 (see FIG. 63) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 700 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (see FIG. 63) by the operation of the player, and a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 700 to emit light. And. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided. The chance button 700 also corresponds to an example of a door-side effect movable body. The door-side effect movable body referred to here corresponds to an example of a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod (not shown) that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod. Equipped with a launching mallet. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 62 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 61 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate the sprocket by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through the discharge port 152a and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play a game according to this configuration. Pay out the ball to the person.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls, and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk. Power is supplied to the payout board case 172 that houses the payout board 170 including 168, the launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to the launch of the game ball, and various electrical game devices. A power supply board including a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged.

FIG. 63 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll.

An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and ordinary symbols are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol". The effect device 206 operates the board-side effect movable body 2242 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) here. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro Liquid Crystal) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is composed of a 7-segment LED here. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs here.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and here, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure changing games (details will be described later) being held, and here, a predetermined number of special figure changing games are held. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting port 228, a first special drawing starting port 230, and a second special drawing starting port 232. A variable winning opening 234 is arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when the general winning opening 226 is won). , The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Hereinafter, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Sometimes called a ball (game ball).

The normal drawing start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and here, 1 is on the left side of the game board 200. One is arranged. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

Only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are used as prize balls in the upper plate 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and only one is arranged directly below the first special figure start port 230. The second special drawing start port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the 210 hits and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and only one is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the hammer 146. And the launching mallet 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches them into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (1st special figure start port 230, 2nd special figure start port 232), or without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal figure start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and a board-side effect movable body 2242 is arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. ing. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the board-side effect movable body 2242.

The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the center of the stage 244 in the first special drawing start port 230. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 63 includes an upper arm portion 2242a and a forearm portion 2242b that imitate a human right arm and a forearm, and includes an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm portion 2242a to a shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 2242b at the elbow position is provided. The board-side effect movable body 2242 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-like left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it.

When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a semi-transparent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the obstacle portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 64. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. It may be composed of one circuit board, or the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 is subjected to predetermined control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means). (500))), one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, and the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 400 and the second. A single unit including the sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means (for example, a sub-control means).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 has a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits). ) And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and a door opening such as a front frame door opening sensor and an inner frame opening sensor. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor and a lower plate full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined sensor circuit 322. To control the display of a symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210. Drive circuit 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, normal drawing hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) for display control. The drive circuit 330 is connected to a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the start port 232 of the second special drawing, a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the like. ing.

The random number value generation circuit 318 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derive the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number.

The random number value generation circuit 318 acquires irregular values by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 is used when the value thus acquired is used as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is also the same. The value in the above is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 built in the random number value generation circuit 318.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 send and receive communication confirmation commands when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate in both directions. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. , The first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. The ROM 406 in which is stored is connected.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a cloaking device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a cloaking device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the cloaking device 246, and a detection unit 710 for detecting the detection piece 704b4 provided on the movable part 704 of the chance button 700. Using the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the cloaking device sensor 430 and the detection unit 710 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404, the work area of the VRAM 436 is used. It is connected to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that generates a display image and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and the effect movable body sensor 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs a detection signal to the basic circuit 502 is connected. The effect movable body 224 referred to here refers to a body including at least a door-side effect movable body provided on the front frame door 106 and a board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on the game board 200. Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 517 for controlling the drive of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame. A serial communication control circuit that controls lighting by serial communication between the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game lamp 542, the game board lamp drive circuit 530, and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540. 520 and are connected.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

Further, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the payout control unit 600, and the door open command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Further, even when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Regarding the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without going through the payout control unit 600, or the payout control unit 600 may be used as a relay board. Then, the door opening sensor 609 may send a door opening command to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply the voltage after the predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the first sub-control unit 400. The launch control unit 630 may supply a predetermined voltage directly from the power supply control unit 660. Payout control unit 60
0 may be such that a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400, etc.) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and each device. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time. The payout control unit 600 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, or at least one of them. The first sub-control unit 400 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300, or at least one of them.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 at substantially the same time as the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is set so that a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. You may. The second sub-control unit 500 may directly supply a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

At the island facility installed in the game machine installation shop, the 100V AC power supply is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and the pachinko machine 100 is supplied with a 24V AC current. The 24V alternating current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 64, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit, and the DC current of 12V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit to obtain a predetermined voltage (5V). ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted into a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the supply current of 12V drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338, in which a DC current of 12 V flows, and this power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. Corresponds to. The low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power supply management unit 660 outputs the input 24V alternating current as it is, or converts it into a 36V direct current and outputs it. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 may be supplied with a current having an operating voltage (here, 5 V) via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the DC current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT3141 times out, there are cases where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a programming error, a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a fraudulent act, or the like. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set as an initial value in WDT3141. The start-up signal from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT3141 are input to the CPU 304 by a common signal line, but they may be input by a dedicated line. The start-up signal output from the start-up signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start-up signal.

In the case of a momentary power failure in which the power is cut off and immediately recovered, that is, in the case of automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and WDT3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 resets. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when executing the system reset operation, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. Subsequently, the security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to check whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the verification code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a fixed time plus a randomly selected random time. When the extension process is completed, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started. On the other hand, even when the user reset operation is executed, the values of the core and the built-in register of the CPU 304 are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. After that, the main process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, is executed, and the game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained. FIG. 65A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". conduct. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol according to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of No. 2 (which also corresponds to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2.

Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, or after the start of the "variation display of the special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is displayed. The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, and hereinafter, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of displays up to is called the symbol fluctuation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. FIG. 65 (a) shows 10 types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure J" as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display. In FIG. 65 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "Special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 61, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure" is intentionally displayed. By providing "G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first out-of-line symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second out-of-line symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 61 is also provided with a symbol other than the “special figure A” as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 65 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns here, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special symbol starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208. In each symbol display area of area 208c, "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3"-> ... "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> ... is displayed in this order. Perform "variable display of decorative pattern" to switch. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure E", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure F", or the first small hit of "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of "Special Figure I" and the second deviation of "Special Figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 63 (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 65 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the normal drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure, "Public figure A" which is a hit symbol and "Public figure B" which is a missed symbol. Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of general map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the Furu-zu fluctuating game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the Furu-zu fluctuating game. Also in FIG. 65 (c), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 66 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. Here, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (for example, 9v). Monitor whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage is less than. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 64 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, there are two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter, the normal figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer. Update the two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every about 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. It starts in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT is periodically (for example, main) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (for example, 32.8 ms) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). (Once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the control unit timer interrupt), restart is performed.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. Here, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 64 stores prize determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined prize determination pattern information (for example, no detection signal before the previous time, presence of the previous detection signal, presence of the current detection signal). When the information matches the above, the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting port 232, or passes through the normal drawing starting port 228. Judge that there was. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232 and 228 have been won. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose. Although the counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided here, the same counter may be used.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for counting the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the winning ball number storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, it is determined whether or not the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the variable winning port 234 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When the first special figure start port 230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage of the random number value generation circuit 318 corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. The value is acquired from the register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and the value is acquired from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation. The processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. When the second special figure start port 232 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230 of the random number value generation circuit 318. The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random number value, and the value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number counter for generating the random number value. Then, the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

In step S219, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (a variable game of the normal map).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the out-of-line symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 65 (c)) and the off symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 65 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332 of the above, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off. Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 65 (a) are on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and the normal figure probability change flag is on. Is the special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure. Special figure F when the probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure F when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and special figure H when the second small hit flag is on. , The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 so as to be in the special figure I when the first missed flag is on and in the special figure I when the second missed flag is on. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first missed symbol (special symbol) Confirmation display of any one of I) and the first outlier symbol (special symbol J) is performed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or the door member 234a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are won in the variable winning opening 234. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the closing period is stored in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, decoration. The effect standby period is shown in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times 100 times is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on. The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, there is a higher possibility of hitting the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special-figure variable game are shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state. Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of games will be played in the variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game, and many games will be played in the second special figure starting opening 232 until the game ball enters the jackpot. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases due to the ball entering the ball and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is different, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure start port 232. However, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230 is notified with priority.

In step S233, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (for example, basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, door open command, etc. The command type can be specified), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the special figure The value of the probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has been won, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 has been won. Including presence / absence.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

Further, when the door opening command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the door opening command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The same applies when the door opening command is directly transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 without going through the payout control unit 600. Further, when the main control unit 300 directly receives the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609, when the detection signal is transmitted, the door opening command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. , When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display are displayed via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 66 is performed. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. Details will be described later, but when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected as a result of the determination, a process of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 700, or a chance. When the pressing operation of the button 700 is valid, a process of preparing the effect data corresponding to the operation reception effect described later is performed. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the pressing operation of the chance button 700, while the second sub-control unit 500 controls the drive of the movable unit 704 of the chance button 700. The detection process and drive control related to the button 700 may be performed by one control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500)).

In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S319, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, when the effect data read in step S309 includes a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 (for example, a control command related to the effect movable body 224 or a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700). Is set to output this control command, and returns to step S303. If a door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the door opening command is set to be output to the second sub control unit in step S321.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with the timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 68 (a). Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random value value update process, and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S601, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 406 to VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in S701. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S709, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S713, the process returns to step S703 after performing the movable body control process. Details will be described later, but in this movable body control process, when a control command related to the effect movable body 224, a control command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700, or the like is received from the first sub-control unit 400, the control command is used. Perform various corresponding processes.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute with.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 69 (a). Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

<Movable body control process>
FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body control process (step S713) of the second sub-control unit main process, and FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the flow of the movable body interrupt process. be.

In step S1001 of the movable body control process shown in FIG. 6A, various received command processes are performed based on the commands received from the first sub-control unit 400. Examples of the various reception command processes include the effect movable body process performed when a command related to the effect movable body 224 is received, and the chance button movable body process performed when a command related to the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 is received. Can be mentioned.

Specifically, as described above, the effect movable body 224 includes at least a door-side effect movable body provided on the front frame door 106 and a board-side effect movable body 2242 provided on the game board 200. In the description using FIG. 70, the door-side effect movable body and the board-side effect movable body 2242 will be described without distinction. However, in the effect movable body processing, for example, when a control command relating to the effect movable body 224 is received, , The operation data (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the effect movable body 224, which is included in the control command, is stored in the effect movable body drive storage area provided in the RAM 508. .. Further detailed control processing of the door-side effect movable body will be described later.

Further, in the chance button movable body processing, the control information included in the control command is newly stored in the chance button driving storage area provided in the RAM 508, and the control information stored in the chance button driving storage area is newly stored as new information. Performs processing such as updating to and discarding old information.

The second sub-control unit 500 executes the movable body interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms), triggered by the timer interrupt described above. In step S1101 of the movable body interruption process, it is determined whether or not the control information (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the drive unit 708 is stored in the above-mentioned chance button drive storage area. When the corresponding control information is stored, the control information is output to the drive circuit 517. As a result, the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is driven (details will be described later).

Further, it is determined whether or not the operation data (excitation, torque, rotation direction, etc.) to be output to the effect movable body 224 is stored in the above-mentioned effect data for driving the effect movable body, and the corresponding operation data is stored. If so, the operation data is output to the drive circuit 516. As a result, the effect movable body 224 is driven.

In step S1102, a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 is input via the sensor circuit 518, position information of the effect movable body 224 is detected based on the detection signal, and is stored in the RAM 508. When the sensor is not detected, the initial position return (origin return) process of the effect movable body 224 is performed. Here, the detection process of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 by the detection unit 710 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, but it may be performed in this step S1102.

In step S1103, the output information update process is performed. In this output information update process, the operation data of the effect movable body 224 and the control information of the drive unit 708 of the chance button 700 are updated.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the flow of the door-side effect movable body control process executed by the second sub-control unit 500.

The door-side effect movable body control process shown in FIG. 71 is executed in various reception command processes shown in FIG. 70. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not the door opening command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1201), proceeds to step S1205 if not received, and if received, proceeds to step S1205. Based on the position information of the door-side effect movable body stored in the RAM 508, it is determined whether or not the current position of the door-side effect movable body is the initial position (step S1202). If it is not the initial position, the above-mentioned storage area for driving the effect movable body is rewritten with operation data (for example, closing operation data) for returning to the initial position (step S1203), and this door-side effect movable body control process ends. On the other hand, if it is the initial position, the standby instruction information indicating the standby is set in the above-mentioned storage area for driving the movable body (step S1204), and the process ends. In this case, in the output information update process (step S1103) shown in FIG. 70B, the operation data is not updated, and in step S1101 in the next movable body interrupt process, the drive circuit is related to the door-side effect movable body. No operation data is sent. Note that operation data that maintains the same position as the current position (here, the initial position) may be transmitted.

Further, in step S1205, which is executed when the door opening command is not received, the received operation data included in the control command related to the effect movable body 224 is set in the above-mentioned effect movable body drive storage area. And it ends.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the flow of the door-side effect movable body control process when the power is turned on, which is executed by the second sub-control unit 500.

When the power is turned on, a predetermined voltage is first supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 determines that the power is turned on when the voltage value from the power control unit 660 exceeds a certain value, and starts the door-side effect movable body control process at the time of turning on the power shown in FIG. 72. .. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not the door opening command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1301), and if not, stores the effect movable body driving storage area described above. , The operation data for returning to the initial position (for example, closing operation data) is set (step S1302), and the door-side effect movable body control process at the time of turning on the power is completed. On the other hand, if it has been received, the standby instruction information indicating that the user is to be made to stand by is set in the above-mentioned storage area for driving the movable body (step S1303), and the process ends. If the execution of step S1101 in the above-mentioned movable body interrupt processing is delayed when the power is turned on, the operation data related to the door-side effect movable body may be transmitted to the drive circuit 516 before ending. good.

The door-side effect movable body control process described above may be executed by the first sub-control unit 400.

Subsequently, the characteristic points of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 corresponding to the embodiment of the present invention is opened.

A door-side effect movable body 2241 that opens forward (on the player side) is provided above the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73. The door-side effect movable body 2241 is a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact, and corresponds to an example of the first movable body. Further, the game board 200 is provided with a board-side effect movable body 2242 that falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 above the decorative symbol display device 208. The board-side effect movable body 2242 is a movable body provided at a position where the player cannot contact by the transparent plate member 118 provided on the front frame door 106, and corresponds to an example of the second movable body. The door-side effect movable body 2241 and the board-side effect movable body 2242 are drive-controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516 as the effect movable body 224 as described above. The initial (origin) position of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is the closed position (position housed in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. Is the position above the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 73 (a), with the front frame door 106 closed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol, that is, during the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 2B, the door-side effect movable body 2241 opens, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in the figure (c) while the effect movable body 224 is operating as shown in the figure (b), the game board 200 is shown as shown in the figure (d). The board-side effect movable body 2242 provided in the front frame door 106 continues to operate, but the door-side effect movable body 2241 provided in the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position.

After the front frame door 106 is opened, it returns to the initial position. That is, it does not mean the effect operation of returning to the initial position according to the effect data, but means that the initial position return control (step S1203 shown in FIG. 71) forcibly returning to the initial position is performed. (same as below). In addition, it continues to operate. This includes returning to the initial position according to the effect data. That is, it means that the effect operation is continuously performed and the initial position return control is not performed (hereinafter, the same applies).

The board-side effect movable body 2242, which did not return to the initial position by opening the front frame door 106, returns to the initial position when, for example, an abnormality occurs in the decorative symbol display device 208. If an abnormality occurs in the decorative symbol display device 208, the door-side effect movable body 2241 does not return to the initial position (hereinafter, the same applies). Other conditions (corresponding to the second condition) for performing the initial position return operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 include the following conditions. For example, the initial position may be returned due to an abnormality (position is not detected, etc.) of the board-side effect movable body 2242 itself. Further, every time the symbol change starts, the control to return the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position may be performed. Further, in the case of a specific gaming state (for example, during probabilistic change, during time reduction, etc.), control may be performed to return the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position. Further, when the initial position of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is not detected, the initial position may be returned every time the symbol change starts, and the board may be returned to the initial position due to a specific symbol change (for example, the change or the change in hold). When performing an effect using the side effect movable body 2242, the initial position may be returned. That is, at least one condition may be that the effect command for driving the board-side effect movable body 2242 is received. Further, when the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, control may be performed to return the board-side effect movable body 2242 to the initial position. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the state in which the game ball has not entered the first special figure start port 230 (second special figure start port 232), the board-side effect movable body 2242 is returned to the initial position. You may.

According to the example shown in FIG. 73 described above, the first movable body (here, the door-side effect movable body 2241) performs the first operation (initial position return operation). That is, when the door body (here, the front frame door 106) is opened while the first movable body is moving, the first drive control means (here, the second sub-control unit 500 and the drive circuit 516) causes the first movement. Move one movable body to the initial position. By doing so, it may be possible to prevent the first movable body from coming into contact with an external device or a person. Further, the second movable body (here, the board-side effect movable body 2242) continues to operate regardless of the operating status of the first movable body. Generally, when the door body (front frame door 106) is opened, it is a disadvantageous situation for the player (for example, a ball is clogged between the game nails 238 and the game cannot be played). By continuing the operation of the second movable body while the door body is open, it may be possible to show the effect to the player and prevent the player's motivation to play. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from touching the board surface (particularly around the second movable body) while the door is open. Similarly, when the sensor for detecting the first movable body is provided at a position other than the initial position, the initial position return operation is performed regardless of the position of the first movable body other than the initial position.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened in the first modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73. Hereinafter, in the description of the modification, the components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the reference numerals used so far. In addition, items that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted.

A first door-side effect movable body 2241a that opens upward is provided at the upper right portion of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 74 in the front view. A protruding second door-side effect movable body 2241b is provided. Further, in the game board 200, like the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73, a board-side effect movable body 2242 that falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided above the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The initial (origin) position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is the closed position (position in which the front frame door 106 is stored) shown in FIG. The initial (origin) position is the retracted position (position in which the front frame door 106 is housed) shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 74 (b), with the front frame door 106 closed, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b protrudes forward to form a board. The side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in the figure (c) while the effect movable body 224 is in operation as shown in the figure (b), the game board 200 is also provided in this first modification. The board-side effect movable body 2242 continues to operate, but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a provided on the front frame door 106 returns to the initial position and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b also returns to the initial position. return.

A dedicated drive circuit may be provided for each of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and the board-side effect movable body 2242. Alternatively, a drive circuit may be provided separately for the door-side effect movable body and the board-side effect movable body. Further, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be paired (for example, those having the same shape).

A third movable body controlled by the same control means as the first movable body (here, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) may be provided. The third movable body may have the same shape as the first movable body, for example, at the upper left portion of the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 74 in the front view, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a. A third door-side effect movable body having the same shape as the above may be provided. The first movable body and the third movable body are provided at positions where there is a possibility of contact with external devices or people when the door body (here, the front frame door 106) is opened while the movable body is operating. It may be the one that was given. The first movable body and the third movable body may be controlled by the same control means and operate at the same time. Further, when the door body is opened while the first movable body and the third movable body are operating, both of them may perform the first operation (initial position return operation), or one of them. Only the first operation (initial position return operation) may be performed, or both operations may be stopped. Further, the third movable body may be controlled by a control means different from that of the first movable body (for example, a drive circuit is different), or has a shape different from that of the first movable body. You may. Further, unlike the first movable body, the third movable body may be provided at a position where it does not hit an external device or a person even when the door body is opened. In this case, even if the door body is opened while the third movable body is operating, the initial position return operation may not be performed, for example, the operation may be continued or stopped on the spot. You may.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened in the second modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73.

A first door-side effect movable body 2241a that opens upward is provided at the upper right portion of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. A second door-side effect movable body 2241b to be opened is provided. Further, the game board 200 is provided with the same board-side effect movable body 2242 as before. The initial (origin) position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is the closed position (position housed in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. The initial (origin) position of is also the closed position (position housed in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), with the front frame door 106 closed, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b opens forward, and the board. The side effect movable body 2242 falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in the figure (c) while the effect movable body 224 is operating as shown in the figure (b), the game board 200 is shown as shown in the figure (d). The board-side effect movable body 2242 provided in the above continues to operate, but the second door-side effect movable body 2241b opened forward, which has a relatively high possibility of coming into contact with the player, returns to the initial position. On the other hand, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a opened upward, which is relatively unlikely to come into contact with the player, stops its operation. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a is a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact it, but if it is rotated upward and opened, there is a possibility that it will come into contact with the player at the initial stage. It will be as low as when it returns to its position. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a opens upward via a horizontal posture opened forward, and returns to the initial position via a horizontal posture opened forward. Therefore, even if the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is opened, if the front frame door 106 is opened in the horizontal posture opened forward, it returns to the initial position or, conversely, is rotated upward. Move.

According to the example shown in FIG. 75 described above, either the initial position return operation or the stop at the spot is performed depending on the position of the first movable body (door side effect movable body). A sensor for detecting the door-side effect movable body is provided at a position where the operation is completed, and when the door-side effect movable body is detected by the sensor, there is a high possibility that the position where the operation is completed will come into contact with the player. Depending on whether it is in the position or not, it is decided whether to perform the initial position return operation or to stop it on the spot. The same applies when the sensor is provided near the position between the initial position and the position where the operation is completed. Further, when it is determined that the door-side effect movable body is located behind the sensor provided at the initial position (position farther than the initial position), the initial position return operation may be performed.

When the front frame door 106 is closed while the door-side effect movable body is stopped, even if the front frame door 106 is closed, the door-side effect movable body is kept stopped and a predetermined trigger (for example,). , When receiving the symbol change start command, when operating any of the movable bodies, etc.), the initial position return operation may be performed. Alternatively, when the front frame door 106 is closed, the initial position return operation may be performed.

Further, in this example as well, the second movable body (board-side effect movable body 2242) continues to operate regardless of the operating status of the first movable body.

In the above description, "the first movable body (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241a or the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) provided at a position where the player can contact the player).
A second movable body (for example, a board-side production movable body 2242) provided at a position where the player cannot contact, and
It is a game table equipped with
When the first condition (for example, opening of the front frame door 106) is satisfied, the first movable body is in the first position (for example, the front frame door 106) which is the initial position of the first movable body. Returned to the stored position)
When the second condition (for example, an abnormality occurs in the decorative symbol display device 208) is satisfied, the second movable body is returned to the second position, which is the initial position of the second movable body.
The first condition is different from the second condition.
A game table characterized by that. ] Was explained.

According to this game table, maintainability can be improved. Further, since the initial position return operation is performed according to the conditions, it may be possible to make it easier to notice the failure of the effect movable body.

If the door body is opened during movement, the first drive control means may continue the operation of the first movable body. Further, when the first movable body performs the initial position return operation, the second drive control means may cause the second movable body to perform the initial position return operation. Further, when the first movable body performs the initial position return operation, the second drive control means may stop the operation of the second movable body. Further, when the door body is closed while the first movable body is stopped, the first drive control means is the continuation of the time when the first movable body is stopped by the first movable body. It may be operated. Further, when it is determined that the first movable body is located behind the detecting means provided at the initial position (position farther than the initial position) for detecting the first movable body, at least the detecting means side (initial position) is determined. It may be retracted to the position side). Further, a third movable body controlled by the same control means as the first movable body may be provided. In this case, the third movable body may have a shape different from that of the first movable body, or may have the same shape (including a point-symmetrical shape and a line-symmetrical shape).

In addition, "a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, a front frame door 106) and
A movable body control means (for example, a second sub-control unit 500 and a drive circuit 516) that controls the first movable body and the second movable body, and
Have,
The first movable body is provided at least on the door body, and the first movable body is provided on the door body.
The door body includes at least a door opening detection means (for example, a frame door opening sensor 609) capable of detecting that the door body has been opened.
The first condition includes at least a condition that is satisfied when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body.
The movable body control means does not return the second movable body to the second position when the first condition is satisfied.
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to prevent the door-side effect movable body 2241 from coming into contact with an external device or a person. Further, by continuing the operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 while the front frame door 106 is open, it may be possible to show the effect to the player and prevent the player from being discouraged from playing. Further, it may be possible to prevent the player from touching the board surface (particularly around the board side effect movable body 2242) while the front frame door 106 is open.

The movable body control means may have a control means provided for each movable body.

Further, "The movable body control means is a control for returning the first movable object to the first position when the first condition is satisfied while the first movable object is moving ( For example, step S1203) shown in FIG. 71 is executed.
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

This game table may also prevent the first movable body from coming into contact with an external device or a person.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing stepwise how the front frame door 106 is opened when the power is turned on in the third modification of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 73.

The upper part of the front frame door 106 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 76 is provided with a first door-side effect movable body 2241a having a convex arc shape that protrudes forward, and a lower part that protrudes forward. A second door-side effect movable body 2241b having a convex arc shape is provided. Further, the game board 200 is provided with the same board-side effect movable body 2242 as before. Both the initial position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the initial position of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b are at the retracted positions (positions housed in the front frame door 106) shown in FIG. be. When the power is turned on with the first door-side effect movable body 2241, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 at the initial positions shown in FIG. 76 (a). , The pachinko machine 100 performs an initial position return operation (power-on operation) when the power is turned on. That is, step S1302 shown in FIG. 72 is executed, and first, the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is performed. As shown in FIG. 3B, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a once protrudes forward, and as shown in FIG. 3C, returns to the initial position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a. It is confirmed that the current position is the initial position. The operating speed (first speed) of the door-side effect movable body (first door-side effect movable body 2241a, second door-side effect movable body 2241b) in the power-on operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. It may be faster or slower than the operating speed (second speed) in the initial position return operation of the door-side effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is opened. When it is fast, the power-on operation can be completed quickly, and when the front frame door 106 is opened, it is possible to prevent injury even if it comes into contact with a person when returning to the initial position. Normally, the power-on operation is performed before the store opens and is often performed in the absence of the player, while opening the front frame door 106 is often performed in front of the player due to ball clogging or the like. Considering this, a fast case is preferable. On the contrary, when the front frame door 106 is opened faster (it is slower when the power is turned on), there is an advantage that the initial position return operation can be completed without contacting a person at the time of initial position return. There is. In this case, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the initial position return operation may be performed at the maximum speed of the door-side effect movable body. It should be noted that the speed at the time of power-on operation (first speed) and the speed at the time of opening the front frame door 106 (second speed) may be the same without necessarily providing a difference between the two. For example, both may be set to the maximum speed of the door-side effect movable body.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3D, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b once protrudes forward. When the front frame door 106 is opened as shown in FIG. 72 during the power-on operation, step S1303 shown in FIG. 72 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 72, the second door side effect is produced. The movable body 2241b stops on the spot.

As shown in FIG. 3F, when the front frame door 106 is closed, the power is turned on for the next effect movable body (here, the board side effect movable body 2242), and the second door side is stopped. The effect movable body 2241b remains stationary as it is, and returns to the initial position when a command to perform the effect is sent.

When the front frame door 106 is closed, the power-on operation of the stopped effect movable body may be restarted.

Further, when the door body (front frame door 106) is open, the first movable body (door side effect movable body 2241) operates for a predetermined time (or a predetermined distance), and then the first movable body (door side effect movable body 2241) is operated. The initial position return operation of the movable body may be performed.

Further, in this example, the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is performed first, and then the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed, but the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed first. After going to, the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body may be performed.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a modified example of the power-on operation described with reference to FIG. 76.

The front surface just before the power-on operation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a (see FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (c)) is completed and the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is started. When the frame door 106 is opened, in the example shown in FIG. 3D, the entire series of power-on operations is temporarily interrupted. Therefore, the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is not started either. In addition, the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is not started. By doing so, it becomes easy to confirm whether the effect movable body is normal when performing maintenance.

On the other hand, in the example shown in the figure (d2), when the front frame door 106 is opened, the power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body is skipped, and even if the front frame door 106 is opened, it does not come into contact with an external device or the like. The power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is executed first. Thereby, the time until the power-on operation is completed can be shortened as compared with the example shown in (d1).

As shown in FIG. 6E, when the front frame door 106 is closed, the continuation of the power-on operation is executed. That is, in the example shown in FIG. (D1), the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed, and then the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 2D, if the power-on operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is completed, the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed. If there are a plurality of board-side effect movable bodies and the power-on operation of all the board-side effect movable bodies is not completed, the power-on operation of all the board-side effect movable bodies is performed, and then the second operation is performed. The power-on operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241b may be performed, or the power-on operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed first, leaving the board-side effect movable body for which the power-on operation is not performed. May be done.

FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a state in which power is cut off and restored instantaneously while the door-side effect movable body is operating in the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 75.

In FIG. 78 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the decorative symbol, and in FIG. 78 (b), the first door side effect movable body 2241a opens upward and the second door side. The effect movable body 2241b opens forward. At this time, a power failure occurs, the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes pitch black, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b stop.

The figure (c1) shows an example when the power is instantly restored. Both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b are open or closed, that is, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106. , The initial position return operation is performed to confirm that the current position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is the initial position, and the current position of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be the initial position. Determine.

If the front frame door 106 is opened after the initial position return operation is performed, the power-on operation described above is not performed, and the power-on operation is performed after the front frame door 106 is closed. May be good. On the contrary, even if the front frame door 106 is closed, the power-on operation may not be performed. Further, in the figure (c1), the initial position return operation is performed regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, but when the front frame door 106 is opened at the time of power recovery, the initial position return operation is performed. Instead, the initial position return operation may be performed after the front frame door 106 is closed.

The figure (c2) shows another example when the power is instantly restored. In this example, both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b perform the initial position return operation when the front frame door 106 is opened. The initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106. For example, even if the front frame door 106 is opened before the initial position return operation is performed after the power is restored, the initial position return operation is performed and the front frame door 106 remains closed. Also, the initial position return operation may be performed.

The example described with reference to FIG. 78 (c1) and FIG. 78 (c2) may be as follows. When the power is restored, the initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the current position of the board-side effect movable body. Further, the initial position return operation may be performed only when the position is not in the initial position. Further, when the power is restored, the initial position return operation may be performed regardless of the current position of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a (second door-side effect movable body 2241b). Further, the initial position return operation may be performed only when the position is not in the initial position.

In the above description, "a power supply means for supplying electric power (for example, a power supply control unit 660) is provided.
When the power supply is started by the power supply means, the first movable body moves to the first position at the first speed (for example, a power-on operation).
When the first condition is satisfied, the first movable body moves to the first position at a second speed different from the first speed.
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, when the first condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the first movable body from being injured even if it comes into contact with a person, or it is initially shortly after it comes into contact with a person. The position return operation can be completed.

The first speed (second speed) may be the first speed (second speed).

Further, when the power supply is started by the power supply means, the second movable body moves to the second position at a third speed, and the second movable body is the second movable body. When the condition is satisfied, the vehicle may move to the second position at a fourth speed different from the first speed.

The third speed referred to here may be a speed faster than the fourth speed, may be a slower speed, or may be the same speed as the fourth speed.

Further, the first speed (second speed) may be slower than the third speed. Since the movement of the first movable body is relatively slow at the start of power supply, the safety of the player, the maintainer, etc. can be ensured, and the movement of the second movable body is relatively fast. , The power-on operation is performed in a short time.

Further, the first speed (second speed) may be faster than the third speed. It is possible to prevent contact with the outside, and it is possible to improve maintainability by making it easier for the maintainer to understand that the second movable body is not in the original position.

Further, the first speed (second speed) may be the same speed as the third speed.

Further, the first speed (second speed) may be slower than the fourth speed. The safety of the player, the maintainer, etc. can be ensured, and if there is something hidden by the operation of the second movable body, the second movable body returns to the initial position relatively quickly. Therefore, what was hidden can be seen quickly, and it may be possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

Further, the first speed (second speed) may be faster than the fourth speed. There is also an advantage that contact with the outside can be prevented and the player can easily notice the abnormality.

Further, the first speed (second speed) may be the same speed as the fourth speed.
In addition, "equipped with a power supply means to supply electric power,
The movable body control means is a first initial operation process (for example, the step shown in FIG. 72) for moving the first movable body to the first position when the power supply is started by the power supply means. Execute S1302),
The movable body control means is one of the second initial operation processes (for example, one of the power-on operations) for moving the second movable body to the second position when the power supply is started by the power supply means. Department)
The movable body control means performs at least one initial operation process of the first initial operation and the second initial operation process, and then performs the other initial operation process (for example, in FIG. 76). Example shown),
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.
In addition, "equipped with a power supply means to supply electric power,
The movable body control means is a first initial operation process (for example, the step shown in FIG. 72) for moving the first movable body to the first position when the power supply is started by the power supply means. Execute S1302),
The movable body control means is one of the second initial operation processes (for example, one of the power-on operations) for moving the second movable body to the second position when the power supply is started by the power supply means. Department)
The movable body control means performs the second initial operation process during execution of the first initial operation process (for example, the example shown in FIG. 77 (d2)).
A game table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

According to this game table, by performing the power-on operation of the second movable body during the power-on operation of the first movable body, it may be possible to shorten the period during which it is difficult for the player to play the game.

Even if the movable body control means performs the second initial operation process while the first initial operation process is temporarily interrupted and the first initial operation process is interrupted. good.

Further, although the description has been given so far in relation to the opening of the front frame door 106, even when the main body 104 is opened, the door side effect movable body 2241 is similarly returned to the initial position. However, if it takes more time to open the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 together due to the weight of the front frame door 106 and the main body 104 than when only the front frame door 106 is opened, the first The timing to start the initial position return operation of the movable body (door side production movable body 2241) is delayed, but on the contrary, a movable object that comes into contact with an external device when tilted downward due to the weight of the main body 104 minutes Assuming a certain case, the timing of starting the initial position return operation may be accelerated.

Further, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, when a load is applied from the outside during or after the operation of the door side effect movable body 2241 (for example, a load from the player), the door side effect movable body 2241 You may want to stop the operation of. Further, even when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from the player) during the initial position return operation of the door side effect movable body 2241 while the front frame door 106 is open, the door side effect movable body 2241 also operates. May be stopped.

Further, regardless of the open / closed state of the front frame door 106, when a load is applied from the outside during or after the operation of the door side effect movable body 2241 (for example, a load from the player), the door side effect movable body 2241 May be made to perform the initial position return operation. Further, when a load is applied from the outside (for example, a load from the player) during the initial position return operation of the door side effect movable body 2241 while the front frame door 106 is open, the initial position of the door side effect movable body 2241 The position return operation may be continued.

As a method of determining the load from the outside, a detection means may be provided at a position other than the initial position.

Further, in the case of a rotary gaming machine (slot machine), the first movable body is provided at a position where the player of the door body can contact, and a position (liquid crystal display device) inside the door body where the player cannot contact. A second movable body is provided on the front side of the door, inside the lamp, inside the decorative panel, etc. where people can see).

<Chance button>
Next, the structure of the above-mentioned chance button 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. 79 is a side sectional view for explaining the movement of the chance button 700, FIG. 79A is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 at the initial position, and FIG. 79B is an operation completion position. A side sectional view of the entire chance button 700, FIG. 3C is a side sectional view of the entire chance button 700 when the player presses the chance button 700 at the operation completion position. Further, FIGS. (D) to (f) are views showing only the lower case 704b and the rotating member 708b extracted in each of the states of FIGS. (A) to (c). The chance button 700 corresponds to an example of a first movable body provided at a position where the player can contact.

Further, FIG. 80 (a) is an external perspective view of the area around the door 108 with the ball storage plate when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 80 (b) shows the chance button 700 moved from the initial position to the operation completion position. The external perspective view of the area around the door 108 with the ball storage plate in the operating state (during operation), and the figure (c) is the external perspective view of the area around the door 108 with the ball storage plate when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. be.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the chance button 700 has a fixed portion 702 (702a, 702b) fixed to the door 108 with a ball storage dish and a movable portion 704 (movable portion 704) that can move up and down with respect to the fixed portion 702. 704a, 704b), a spring 706 that is contracted between the movable portion 704 and the door 108 with a ball storage plate to urge the movable portion 704 upward, and a drive that enables the movable portion 704 to move up and down. It is configured to include a unit 708 (708a, 708b) and a detection unit 710 that can detect the position of the movable unit 704. Although not shown, the chance button lamp 138 is arranged at a predetermined position of the chance button 700.

The fixing portion 702 is composed of two rod-shaped fixing shafts 702a erected on the door 108 with a ball storage dish and a disk-shaped fixing plate 702b fixed to the tips of these two fixing shafts 702a. ing. As shown in FIG. 79 (d), the two fixed shafts 702a are members that are inserted into the insertion holes 704b1 formed in the lower case 704b, which will be described later, and play a role of guiding the lower case 704b in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the fixing plate 702b is a member that plays a role of restricting the upward movement of the lower case 704b.

The movable portion 704 has a cylindrical upper case 704a having an opening on one side and an operation surface 704a1 on which the player's fingers and hands come into contact, and an upper case 704a so as to close the opening of the upper case 704a. It is composed of a disk-shaped lower case 704b fixed to the case 704a. As shown in FIGS. 79 (d) to 79 (f), the lower case 704b has two insertion holes 704b1 inserted into each of the fixed shafts 702a and a center through which the rotating member 708b of the drive unit 708 described later is inserted. Detection of the insertion hole 704b2, the engaging piece 704b3 protruding toward the center of the central insertion hole 704b2 with the inner edge of the central insertion hole 704b2 as the base end, and the engaging piece 704b3 protruding downward with the lower surface of the lower case 704b as the base end. Pieces 704b4 and are formed.

The drive unit 708 is composed of a drive source 708a composed of a motor, a solenoid, or the like, and a cylindrical rotating member 708b that is rotationally driven around the axis by the drive source 708a. A concave groove portion 708b1 is formed linearly from one side to the other side in the longitudinal direction on a part of the outer edge of the rotating member 708b, and the lower case 704b is engaged with the lower end side of the concave groove portion 708b1. An engaging recess 708b2 that can be engaged with the piece 704b3 is formed.

As shown in FIG. 79 (d), the rotating member 708b has the movable portion 704 moved upward by the urging force of the spring 706 when the engaging recess 708b2 engages with the engaging piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. As shown in FIG. 79 (e), the movable portion 704 is attached with the spring 706 by disengaging the engaging recess 708b2 and the engaging piece 704b3 of the lower case 704b. It is rotatable between permitted positions that allow forces to move upwards.

The detection unit 710 is composed of an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b can move forward and backward between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. Based on the detection result of the detection unit 710, the first sub-control unit 400 is in a state where the movable unit 704 is not pressed downward (the chance button 700 is pressed) as shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b). The detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is not operated and does not enter between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the detection unit 710), and the movable part 704 is downward as shown in FIG. 79 (c). (A state in which the chance button 700 is pressed and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is inserted between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the detection unit 710) can be determined.

In the initial positions shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 80 (a), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the permitted position to the regulated position, and the movable portion 704 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating member 708 and downward. It is in a state where it can be moved only to. In this initial position, when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, so that the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected. be.

At the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 80 (c), the rotating member 708b is rotated from the restricted position to the permitted position, and the movable portion 704 is released from the restriction on the upward movement of the spring 706. It moves upward by the urging force, comes into contact with the fixing plate 702b, and is restricted from moving upward again, and is in a state where it can move only downward. Even in this operation completion position, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), when the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710. , The pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be detected.

The state shown in FIG. 79 (c) is a state when the button is pressed when the player presses the upper case 704a downward at the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 80 (c). In the present embodiment, when the movable portion 704 is pressed to near the lower limit and the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection portion 710, the drive portion 708 is driven to move the rotating member 708b from the permitted position to the regulated position. The movable portion 704 is configured to return to the initial position shown in FIG. 79 (a) by rotating in.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operating state shown in FIG. 80 (b), that is, the chance button 700 is located in FIGS. 79 (a) and 80 (a) from the initial position shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 80 (a). In the state of moving to the operation completion position shown in (c), the upper case 704a is pressed downward by the player, and even if the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the detection unit 710, the detection result of the detection unit 710. Is configured to be ignored (so that the operation of pressing the chance button 700 is not judged to be valid).

With such a configuration, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 becomes effective at a timing unintended by the player, such as when the player accidentally presses the chance button 700 while the chance button 700 is operating. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is ignored during the operation of the chance button 700, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing operation of the chance button 700 during the operation is enabled. You may.

Further, if the chance button is pressed before the operation of the chance button (when the chance button is pressed before the detection is accepted), the operation of pressing the chance button may be ignored, or the chance button may be configured to be ignored. The pressing operation of may be enabled. Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button is valid, the chance button may be operated or the chance button may not be operated. Further, in these cases, the chance button may be produced so that it can be accepted, or the chance button may not be produced so that it can be accepted.

<Operation reception production>
Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the operating state of the chance button 700, whether or not the detection result of the pressing operation of the chance button 700 can be accepted, and whether or not the operation acceptance effect can be executed.

Further, FIG. 82A is an external perspective view of the area around the door 108 with the ball storage plate when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 82B is a ball when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. The external perspective view around the door 108 with a storage plate, FIG. 3C, shows the vicinity of the door 108 with a ball storage plate when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down). It is an external perspective view. Further, FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the chance button 700 is in the initial position, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect when the chance button 700 is in the operation completion position. It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform, and FIG. It is a figure which showed.

<Operation reception production / initial position>
When the chance button 700 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 82 (a) (before the operation shown in FIG. 81), the first sub-control unit 400 uses the detection unit 710 to make the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b. It becomes a detectable state (a state in which the detection result can be accepted). Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at this initial position, the chance button effect is set according to the pressing operation of the chance button 700. Here, as the chance button effect, for example, an effect of changing an image or a character displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the number of times the chance button 700 is pressed and the pressing speed, or a timing of pressing the chance button 700. It is possible to give an effect of changing an image, characters, etc. according to the above, but the present invention is not limited to these. That is, at least a part of the mode (display (for example, animation, image, character, etc.), sound, movement, color, etc.) may be changed according to the operation of pressing the chance button 7000.

In addition, some of these aspects may be one or plural, for example, in the case of plural, a combination with the same category (display, sound, movement, color, etc.) (for example, LED1 The color may change from red to blue, LED2 may change from white to blue, etc., and the combination with different categories (for example, display on the liquid crystal display (change from display A to display B)) and the chance button It may be its own operation (change from no operation to rotational operation).

Further, when the chance button 700 is stopped at the initial position (before operation), the first sub-control unit 400 lights the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 82 (a). In addition, it is suggested to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), and as shown in FIG. 82 (d), it is decorated. An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed using the symbol display device 208 (in this example, the character display "Press the chance button !!" and the blue color at the initial position. An image display imitating the chance button 700 that emits light and an image display of a downward arrow) are performed.

In this way, if the chance button 700 is made to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the operation of pressing the chance button is effective, and the player can surely perform the operation at the initial position. The pressing operation can be performed. The operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative pattern display device 208, for example, an effect using various lamps 418, an effect using the speaker 120, and a movable body (for example, a shielding device 246, an effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed. That is, the operation reception effect may be an effect that suggests to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed.

<Operation reception production / in operation>
The first sub-control unit 400 detects when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 82A to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 82B (during the operation shown in FIG. 81). Even if the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b is detected by the unit 710, the detection result is ignored (so that the detection result cannot be accepted). Therefore, the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute the above-mentioned chance button effect. After accepting the detection result of the chance button 700 (after the operation of pressing the chance button 700 is enabled once), it is determined whether or not the chance button 700 is operating, and the operation is in progress. In some cases, the chance button effect may not be executed.

Further, when the chance button 700 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (during operation), the first sub-control unit 400 does not light the chance button lamp 138 and does not perform the operation reception effect. It is configured as follows. In this way, if the chance button 700 is not emitted and the operation reception effect is not executed, the player can easily grasp that the operation of pressing the chance button is invalid, which is disadvantageous due to an erroneous operation. Will not suffer.

<Operation reception production / operation completion position>
When the chance button 700 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 82 (b) (after the operation is completed shown in FIG. 81), the first sub-control unit 400 uses the detection unit 710 to detect the lower case 704b. 704b4 is in a detectable state (a state in which the detection result can be accepted). Further, when the pressing operation of the chance button 700 is detected at the operation completion position, the above-mentioned chance button effect is performed.

Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 stops the chance button 700 at the operation completion position (after the operation is completed), the first sub-control unit 400 lights the chance button lamp 138 at a predetermined timing, and in FIG. 82 (b), the chance button lamp 138 is turned on. As shown, it is suggested to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed by causing the chance button 700 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red), and as shown in FIG. 82 (e). , Operation reception effect suggesting to the player that the chance button 700 can be pressed by using the decorative symbol display device 208 (in this example, the character display "Press the chance button !!" and the operation are completed. An image display imitating the chance button 700 that emits red light at the position and an image display of a downward arrow) are performed.

In this way, if the chance button 700 is made to emit light or the operation reception effect is executed, the player can easily grasp that the operation of pressing the chance button is effective, and the player can be sure at the operation completion position. It is possible to perform a pressing operation.

<Operation reception effect / Stop between the initial position and the operation completion position>
As shown in FIG. 82C, the first sub-control unit 400 can detect the detection piece 704b4 of the lower case 704b by the detection unit 710 even when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position. (A state in which the detection result can be accepted). Here, the case where the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position is, for example, the case where the movable portion 704 of the chance button 700 is caught by the fixed portion 702 and the movable portion 704 cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position. As an example, there is a case where the urging force of the spring 706 of the chance button 700 is weakened and the movable portion 704 cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position.

Further, even when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the first sub-control unit 400 can press the chance button 700 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 82 (f). An operation reception effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect (effect shown in FIG. 82 (e)) performed after the operation is completed) that suggests to the player that it is possible is performed.

In this way, even when the chance button 700 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the chance button 700 can be accepted, the chance button 700 can be operated even if the chance button 700 breaks down. Because it is possible to accept, the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Further, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 700 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and it is possible to encourage the player to operate. can.

In this example, when the chance button 700 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, the chance button 700 does not emit light in a predetermined color, but for example, a color different from the initial position or the operation completion position. It may emit light in (for example, green), or may emit light in the same color (for example, blue or red) as before or after the operation is completed.

Further, in this example, an example in which the chance button 700 is made to emit light in a predetermined color is shown, but for example, blinking may be performed in a predetermined color. In this case, the initial position, the operation completion position, the initial position and the operation completion may be performed. The blinking pattern may be changed for each of the stops between the positions. For example, in the initial position, blinking is repeated in the first cycle (for example, 1 second), and in the operation completion position, blinking is repeated in the second cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds) shorter than the first cycle, and the initial position is repeated. When stopped between the operation completion position and the operation completion position, the blinking is repeated in a third cycle (for example, 3 seconds) longer than the first cycle.

With such a configuration, the player can grasp that the pressing operation is possible in each state, and can also grasp that each state is in a different state. It may be possible to perform a pressing operation suitable for the state of.

As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operating means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, first operation unit 756, second operation) that can be operated by the player. A unit 758, a bet button 132, and a pressing surface of these buttons and operation units), an effect means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least performing an effect, and a means to be moved (for example, the upper case 704a). , A game table including a movement control means (for example, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least performing movement control for moving the base 754), wherein the operation means is the movement by the movement control means. When control is performed, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 80 (a), 82 (a), 83 (a), and 93 (a)) to the second position (for example, the initial position). , FIG. 80 (c), FIG. 82 (c), FIG. 83 (b), and the operation completion position shown in FIG. 93 (c). As a result, when the operating means moved to the second position is operated, at least a special effect can be executed, and the effect means can perform the movement control even though the movement control is performed. Even when the operating means does not move to the second position, at least the special effect (for example, the effect when the button is pressed shown in FIG. 96C) is produced according to the operation of the operating means. ) Is a game table characterized by being feasible.

Further, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operating means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet) that can be operated by the player. Button 132, the pressing surface of these buttons and operation units), the effect means capable of at least performing the effect (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a, the base 754). A game table including a movement control means (for example, a second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least performing movement control for moving the moving means, and the operation means is subjected to the movement control by the movement control means. In this case, the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIGS. 80 (a), 82 (a), 83 (a), and 93 (a)) to the second position (for example, FIG. 80 (for example)). It is moved to c), the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 82 (c), 83 (b), and 93 (c), and the effect means is when the special effect execution condition is satisfied (c). For example, when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position and the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at that position), a special effect (for example, pressing the button shown in FIG. 96 (c)) is performed. The effect of time) can be executed at least, and the special effect execution condition is satisfied when any one of the plurality of conditions is satisfied, and the first of the plurality of conditions is satisfied. One condition is satisfied when the operating means moved to the second position is operated by performing the movement control, and the second condition among the plurality of conditions is the said. Even if the operation means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed, the operation means is established in response to the operation of the operation means. It is a game table.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the operating means cannot be moved to the second position where the operating means should originally move due to a failure of the operating means or the like, the operating means is operated by the player. By enabling the production according to the above, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation has been accepted and give the player a sense of security. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play is diminished due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, operation receiving means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet button 132, and these buttons and operations can at least accept operations by the player. The operation means may be provided on the operation reception means, and the surface of the portion (including the surface other than the button) is provided.

Further, the special effect may not be performed even if the operating means is operated during the execution of the movement control.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operating means, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of reception of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

Further, the effect means may at least be able to perform the effect in response to the operation of the operating means by the player even when the moved means is located at the first position. ..

With such a configuration, by increasing the period in which the operation can be detected, the player may have more opportunities to operate the operation unit, and the interest of the game may be improved.

Further, the notification means is provided with at least a notification means capable of performing a notification prompting the operation of the operation means, and the notification means moves the operation means to the second position even though the movement control is performed. Even if there is no such notification, the notification may be performed.

Further, the gaming table according to the present embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) is a gaming table provided with an operating means (for example, a chance button 700) that can be operated by the player, and the operating means includes a player. A contactable operation unit (for example, the upper case 704a) is provided, and the operation unit is moved from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 80 (a)) to the second position (for example, FIG. 80 (for example)). A drive means (for example, a drive unit 708) that can move at least to the operation completion position shown in c), a drive control means that can control the drive of the drive means (for example, a second sub-control unit 500), and the drive. When the operating unit is operated by the player after the operating unit is moved to the second position by the means, the effect means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least performing the effect, and The effecting means moves the operating unit to the second position after the driving means controls to move the operating unit from the first position to the second position. Even if it has not been performed (for example, when the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 82 (c)), the effect is produced according to the operation of the operating means by the player. At least it is feasible (for example, when the chance button 700 is pressed at the timing when the machine stops between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the chance button 700 is pressed. It is possible to produce a chance button according to the situation).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, the operating means is operated by the player even when the operating unit cannot move to the second position where the operating unit should originally move due to a failure of the operating means or the like. By enabling the production according to the above, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation has been accepted and give the player a sense of security. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play is diminished due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect means is in the middle of control for the driving means to move the operation unit from the first position to the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 80 (b)). May be configured so that the effect is not executed even if the operating means is operated by the player.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operating means, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of reception of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

Further, even when the operation unit is located at the first position, at least the effect may be executed according to the operation of the operation means by the player.

With such a configuration, by increasing the period in which the operation can be detected, the player may have more opportunities to operate the operation unit, and the interest of the game may be improved.

Further, the notification means (for example, chance button lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing notification for prompting the operation of the operation means is provided, and the operation unit is in the second position of the notification means. The notification (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f)) may be performed even when the device has not been moved to.

With such a configuration, the player misses the opportunity to operate the operating means by notifying that the operating unit can be operated even if the operating means has not moved to the originally moving position. It may be possible to prevent it. In addition, the player may be able to operate with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to perform notification different from the case where the notification means is moved to the second position, the player may feel uncomfortable, and the operation means may be refrained from being operated or the operation means should be carefully selected. It may be possible to handle it. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from diminishing.

Further, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operating means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet) that can be operated by the player. The button 132, the pressing surface of these buttons and operation units, the effect means capable of at least performing the effect (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the notification means capable of at least performing the notification (for example, the chance button). The lamp 138, the decorative symbol display device 208), and the movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least performing the movement control for moving the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a and the base 754). The operating table is provided with a first position (for example, FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 82 (a), FIG. 83 (for example)) when the movement control is performed by the movement control means. a), the second position from the initial position shown in FIG. 93 (a) (for example, the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 80 (c), 82 (c), 83 (b), 93 (c)) When the operating means moved to the second position is operated due to the movement control being performed, the effect means is moved to a special effect (see FIG. 96 (c)). At least the effect of pressing the indicated button) can be executed, and the notification means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed (for example,). , Even when stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 82 (c), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example,). , It is possible to perform an operation reception effect as shown in FIG. 82 (f)).

Further, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment has operating means (for example, chance buttons 700, 750, first operation unit 756, second operation unit 758, bet) that can be operated by the player. The button 132, the pressing surface of these buttons and operation units, the effect means capable of at least performing the effect (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), and the notification means capable of at least performing the notification (for example, the chance button). The lamp 138, the decorative symbol display device 208), and the movement control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of at least performing the movement control for moving the moved means (for example, the upper case 704a and the base 754). The operating table is provided with a first position (for example, FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 82 (a), FIG. 83 (for example)) when the movement control is performed by the movement control means. a), the second position from the initial position shown in FIG. 93 (a) (for example, the operation completion position shown in FIGS. 80 (c), 82 (c), 83 (b), 93 (c)) The effect means can at least execute a special effect (effect when the button is pressed as shown in FIG. 96 (c)) when the special effect execution condition is satisfied. , The special effect execution condition is satisfied when any one of the plurality of conditions is satisfied, and one of the plurality of conditions is that the movement control is performed. This is established when the operating means that has been moved to the second position is operated, and the notification means is such that the operating means is moved to the second position even though the movement control is performed. Even when the player does not move (for example, when the player stops between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown in FIG. 82 (c)), the player can operate the operation means. The gaming table is characterized in that it can at least be notified (for example, it is possible to perform an operation reception effect as shown in FIG. 82 (f)).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the operating means cannot move to the second position where the operating means should originally move due to a failure of the operating means or the like, the game is performed by giving a notification prompting the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate the operation unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play is diminished due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the notification means may be configured not to notify that the player can operate the operation means when the movement control is being executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operating means, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of reception of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

Further, the notification means notifies that when the operation means is moved to the second position due to the movement control, the operation means has moved to the second position. (For example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (e)) was executed, and the notification means did not move to the second position even though the movement control was performed. Even in the case, it is configured to at least execute the same suggestion (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f)) as the notification suggesting that the operation means has moved to the second position. May be good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the position where the player was originally supposed to move, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with when the player moves to the position where the player originally moves. In some cases. For example, when it is shown that "this fluctuation can be expected" by driving the operating means, the player is notified that "this fluctuation can be expected" by not moving to the position where the operating means originally moves. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes impossible. In addition, the player may be able to operate with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

Further, the notification means are a plurality of notification means (for example, two of the chance button lamp 138 and the decorative symbol display device 208), and the player can operate the operation means of the plurality of notification means. It may be possible to notify by at least one of the notification means.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

Further, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) and that the player can operate the operation means. A game table provided with various notification means (for example, chance button lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and the operation means is provided with an operation unit (for example, upper case 704a) that the player can contact. The driving unit is at least movable from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 80 (a)) to the second position (for example, the operation completion position shown in FIG. 80 (c)). The operation unit is moved to the second position by the means (for example, the drive unit 708), the drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of driving control of the drive means, and the drive means. After that, when the operating means is operated by the player, the effect means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least performing the effect, and the notification means is operated by the driving means. When the operation unit is not moved to the second position after the control for moving the unit from the first position to the second position is performed (for example, in FIG. 22C). Even when stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (f)). It is a game table characterized by the fact that it is possible to perform operation reception effects).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the operation unit cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation means or the like, the game is performed by giving a notification prompting the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate the operation unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play is diminished due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the notification means is in the middle of control for the driving means to move the operation unit from the first position to the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 80 (b)). May be configured so that the operating means is not notified that the player can operate it.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operating means, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of reception of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

Further, the notification means are a plurality of notification means (for example, two of the chance button lamp 138 and the decorative symbol display device 208), and among the plurality of notification means, the player can operate the operation means. It may be possible to notify by at least one or more notification means.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate by performing a plurality of notifications prompting the operation.

Further, the effect means is configured so that when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position, at least an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (for example, a chance button effect) is not performed. You may.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by not producing the result of accepting the operation, and it is possible to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. In some cases. In addition, it may be possible to give a player a sense of discomfort and make it easier to notice a failure of the operating means.

Further, when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position, it may be configured not to accept the player's operation by the operation means (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored). May be configured to do).

With such a configuration, by not accepting the detection of the operation, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it may be possible to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. In addition, it may be possible to give a player a sense of discomfort and make it easier to notice a failure of the operating means.

Further, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification means indicates that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 82 (e)). Even if the operation unit is not moved to the second position by performing at least the operation reception effect (shown), the same suggestion (same as the notification suggesting that the operation unit has moved to the second position) is performed. For example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f) may be at least performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the position where the player was originally supposed to move, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with when the player moves to the position where the player originally moves. In some cases. For example, when it is shown that "this fluctuation can be expected" by driving the operating means, the player is notified that "this fluctuation can be expected" by not moving to the position where the operating means originally moves. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes impossible. In addition, the player may be able to operate with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to perform notification different from the case where the notification means is moved to the second position, the player may feel uncomfortable, and the operation means may be refrained from being operated or the operation means should be carefully selected. It may be possible to handle it. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from diminishing.

<Modification example of chance button>
Next, a modified example of the chance button will be described. FIG. 83A is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 before the operation, and FIG. 83B is an external perspective view showing the periphery of the chance button 750 after the operation is completed. Further, FIG. 84 is a front view of the chance button 750 as viewed from the direction of the second operation unit 758.

The chance button 750 is provided on a substantially triangular prism-shaped base 754 whose side view is an isosceles triangle, a first operation unit 756 provided on the first surface of the base 754, and a first surface of the base 754. A second operating unit 758 provided on the second orthogonal surface, a first gear 754b fixed to a rotating shaft 754a on one side of the base 754, and a second gear 754b that meshes with the first gear 754b. It is configured to have a gear 754c and a drive source 754d including a motor or the like that rotationally drives the second gear 754c. By activating the drive source 754d, the base 754 of the chance button 750 is centered on the rotation axis 754a between the initial position shown in FIG. 83 (a) and the operation completion position shown in FIG. 83 (b). It is configured to be rotatable.

The first operation unit 756 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor or a sensor circuit capable of detecting a pressing operation of the first operation unit 756. This detection unit enables the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 when the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 83 (a), while the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 83 (b). When it is in the operation completion position shown in (1), the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is invalidated. That is, the player can perform the operation by the first operation unit 756 only when the base 754 is in the initial position shown in FIG. 83 (a). Even when the base 754 is in the operation completion position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 may be valid.

Further, the second operation unit 758 includes a detection unit (not shown) including a sensor or a sensor circuit capable of detecting the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758. This detection unit validates the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 when the base 754 is in the operation completion position shown in FIG. 83 (b), while the base 754 is in FIG. 83 (a). ), The detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 is invalidated. That is, the player can perform the operation by the second operation unit 758 only when the base 754 is in the operation completion position shown in FIG. 83 (b). Even when the base 754 is in the initial position, the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be enabled.

Further, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the present embodiment can notify that the player can operate the operation means (for example, the chance button 700) and that the player can operate the operation means. A game table provided with various notification means (for example, chance button lamp 138, decorative symbol display device 208), and the operation means is provided with an operation unit (for example, upper case 704a) that the player can contact. The driving unit is at least movable from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 80 (a)) to the second position (for example, the operation completion position shown in FIG. 80 (c)). The operation unit is moved to the second position by the means (for example, the drive unit 708), the drive control means (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) capable of driving control of the drive means, and the drive means. After that, when the operating means is operated by the player, the effect means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least performing the effect, and the notification means is operated by the driving means. When the operation unit is not moved to the second position after the control for moving the unit from the first position to the second position is performed (for example, in FIG. 82 (c)). Even when stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position as shown), it is possible to at least notify that the player can operate the operating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (f)). It is a game table characterized by the fact that it is possible to perform operation reception effects).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if the operation unit cannot move to the second position where it should originally move due to a failure of the operation means or the like, the game is performed by giving a notification prompting the operation. In addition to being able to operate the operation unit with peace of mind, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate the operation unit. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play is diminished due to a failure of the operating means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the notification means is in the middle of control for the driving means to move the operation unit from the first position to the second position (for example, during the operation shown in FIG. 80 (b)). May be configured so that the operating means is not notified that the player can operate it.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an operation during the operation of the operating means, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an erroneous operation. In addition, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection of reception of the operating means due to vibration or the like.

Further, the notification means are a plurality of notification means (for example, two of the chance button lamp 138 and the decorative symbol display device 208), and among the plurality of notification means, the player can operate the operation means. It may be possible to notify by at least one or more notification means.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing an opportunity to operate by giving a notification prompting the operation. It should be noted that at least it may be notified that the player can operate the operation means by a plurality of notification means, and the first notification means and the second notification means of the plurality of notification means play the operation means. You may at least notify that the person can operate.

Further, the effect means is configured so that when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position, at least an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (for example, a chance button effect) is not performed. You may.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by not producing the result of accepting the operation, and it is possible to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. In some cases. In addition, it may be possible to give a player a sense of discomfort and make it easier to notice a failure of the operating means.

Further, when the operation unit has not been moved to the second position, it may be configured not to accept the player's operation by the operation means (for example, the detection result of the chance button 700 is ignored). May be configured to do).

With such a configuration, by not accepting the detection of the operation, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it may be possible to refrain from operating the operating means or to handle the operating means carefully. In addition, it may be possible to give a player a sense of discomfort and make it easier to notice a failure of the operating means.

Further, when the operation unit is moved to the second position, the notification means indicates that the operation unit has moved to the second position (for example, in FIG. 82 (e)). Even if the operation unit is not moved to the second position by performing at least the operation reception effect (shown), the same suggestion (same as the notification suggesting that the operation unit has moved to the second position) is performed. For example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 82 (f) may be at least performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the position where the player was originally supposed to move, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as compared with when the player moves to the position where the player originally moves. In some cases. For example, when it is shown that "this fluctuation can be expected" by driving the operating means, the player is notified that "this fluctuation can be expected" by not moving to the position where the operating means originally moves. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes impossible. In addition, the player may be able to operate with peace of mind by performing the same notification as when moving to the second position.

On the other hand, if the notification means is configured to perform notification different from the case where the notification means is moved to the second position, the player may feel uncomfortable, and the operation means may be refrained from being operated or the operation means should be carefully selected. It may be possible to handle it. Further, since the operation is accepted when the operation is performed, it may be possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from diminishing.

<Operation reception production of chance button 750>
Next, the operation reception effect of the chance button 750 will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The figure (a) is a side sectional view of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the initial position, and the figure (b) is the side of the chance button 750 when the chance button 750 is in the operation completion position. The cross-sectional view and the figure (c) are the side sectional views of the chance button 750 when the chance button 700 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position (for example, when a failure occurs).

Further, FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the chance button 750 is in the initial position, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of the operation reception effect when the chance button 750 is in the operation completion position. It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform, and FIG. It is a figure which showed.

<Operation reception production / initial position>
As described above, the pachinko machine according to the modified example enables the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operating unit 756 when the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 85 (a). On the other hand, it is configured to invalidate the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758.

When the chance button 750 is stopped at the initial position, the first operation unit of the chance button 750 is used at a predetermined timing by using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 85 (d). Operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the pressing operation of 756 is possible (in this example, the character display "Press the chance button !!", the image display imitating the first operation unit 756, and the downward direction Image display of the arrow).

In this way, if the operation reception effect is executed at the timing when the first operation unit 756 can be operated, the player can easily grasp that the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 is effective. , The player can surely perform the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the initial position.

It should be noted that, instead of (or in addition to) such an operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 can be pressed by causing the first operation unit 756 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue). You may suggest to the player that there is. Further, the operation reception effect is not limited to the effect using the decorative pattern display device 208, for example, an effect using various lamps 418, an effect using the speaker 120, and a movable body (for example, a shielding device 246, an effect). An effect using the movable body 224) or an effect combining these may be performed.

<Operation reception production / in operation>
In the pachinko machine according to the modified example, when the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 85 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 85 (b) (during operation), the first operation unit It is configured to invalidate both the detection result of the pressing operation of 756 and the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758. Further, when the chance button 750 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position, the operation reception effect is not performed.

<Operation reception production / operation completion position>
The pachinko machine according to the modified example enables the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 when the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 85 (b), while enabling the detection result. It is configured to invalidate the detection result of the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756. In this way, by disabling the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 at the operation completion position, when the chance button 750 returns from the operation completion position to the initial position, an object is placed between the chance button 750 and the main body. In some cases, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's hand is pinched, and it is possible to improve safety.

When the chance button 750 is stopped at the operation completion position, the second operation of the chance button 750 is performed at a predetermined timing by using the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 85 (e). An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the pressing operation of the unit 758 is possible (in this example, a character display different from that of the first operation unit 756, such as "Press the super chance button !!" An image display imitating the second operation unit 758 and an image display of a downward arrow) are performed. In this way, when there are a plurality of types of operation units, if the mode of the operation reception effect corresponding to each operation unit is different, it is possible to avoid a mistake in pressing the operation unit, and the motivation for playing due to an operation error can be avoided. It may be possible to prevent the decline. It should be noted that, instead of (or in addition to) such an operation reception effect, the second operation unit 758 can be pressed by causing the second operation unit 758 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red). You may suggest to the player that there is.

The content of the operation reception effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 85 (e). For example, it is not necessary to display an image imitating the second operation unit 758 (operation unit), and the downward arrow indicates. It is not necessary to display the image. Further, when the operation unit is made to emit light, the brightness of the operation unit may be lower than the brightness of other parts (for example, the outer frame 102 or the game board 200), or higher than the brightness of the other parts. You may. With such a configuration, the operation unit can be made more conspicuous than other parts, so that the position of the operation unit that can be operated by the player can be easily recognized, and the convenience of the player may be improved. be.

Further, as an operation reception effect, a display indicating the period during which the operation can be accepted (for example, a meter or a time display) may be performed. In this case, the remaining time during which the operation of the operation means can be accepted may be displayed. good.

Further, the pressing operation of the first operation unit 756 and the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 may be detected at the same time. In this case, as an operation reception effect, the first operation unit 756 and the second operation unit 758 may be detected. Operation reception effect that suggests to the player that both pressing operations are possible (for example, the character display "Press the chance button or the super chance button !!" and the first operation unit 756 and the second operation It is preferable to display an image imitating the part 758 and display an image of a downward arrow). With such a configuration, it is possible to expand the variation of operations by the player, and it may be possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

Further, the operation reception effect in this case is an effect suggesting that one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit can be pressed (for example, "press the chance button !!"). Character notation) may be used. Further, when both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are operated, only one of the operation reception notifications may be sent.

<Operation reception effect / Stop between the initial position and the operation completion position>
The pachinko machine according to the modified example is configured to enable the detection result of the pressing operation of the second operation unit 758 even when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position. Here, when the chance button 750 stops between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, the base 754 of the chance button 750 is caught by the main body or the like and is caught from the initial position to the operation completion position (or from the operation completion position). An example is the case where the rotation cannot be completed (to the initial position).

Further, even when the chance button 750 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, the player is informed that the chance button 750 can be pressed at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 85 (f). The suggested operation reception effect (in this example, the same effect as the operation reception effect (effect shown in FIG. 85 (e)) performed after the operation is completed) is performed.

In this way, even when the chance button 750 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the chance button 750 can be accepted, the chance button 750 can be operated even if the chance button 750 breaks down. Because it is possible to accept, the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Further, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the chance button 750 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and it is possible to encourage the player to operate. can.

It should be noted that the mode of the operation reception effect (for example, the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 85 (e)) performed when the vehicle is in the operation completion position and the operation reception effect (for example, the operation reception effect) performed when the vehicle stops between the initial position and the operation completion position. , The mode of the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 85 (f) may be different. For example, for the operation reception effect performed when the operation is completed, the first type of notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device and two types of lamps) is used, while between the initial position and the operation completed position. A second type of notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, and a speaker) different from the first type may be used for the operation reception effect performed when the vehicle is stopped.

Further, the same type of notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp, etc.) is used for both the operation reception effect performed when the operation is completed and the operation reception effect performed when the vehicle is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. And a speaker), while some of the notification means may be different. For example, in the operation reception effect performed when the operation is completed, the operation is performed when the first display (for example, character display and image display) is performed by the liquid crystal display device and the operation is stopped between the initial position and the operation completed position. In the reception effect, a second display (for example, only character display) different from the first display may be performed by the liquid crystal display device, and the lamp and the speaker may perform the same mode of effect.

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify whether the chance button 750 is in a predetermined position or a position other than the predetermined position, and it may be possible to prompt an operation according to the state of the chance button 750.

<Example of slot machine>
Next, an example of a slot machine will be described. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 86 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114. The valid winning line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three medals are valid and three medals are bet, the five lines with the addition of the right-down winning line and the upper-right winning line will be valid as the winning line. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to 5, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, and the right. Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be set as valid winning lines, or the same number of winning lines may be uniformly set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 also functions as a chance button that changes the mode of production by the operation of the player. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button 132. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be. The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image) arranged behind the shutter 163. A display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has become.

FIG. 87 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. A sub-control board storage case 220 containing a sub-control board is disposed on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side when facing the main control board storage case 210. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device, is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300, the sub control unit 400, and 500, which will be described later, and each device. do. Further, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 264, and the power cord 264 connected to the power cord 264 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the effect device 160 and the effect control board (which controls the effect device 160) are placed on the upper part of the design display window 113. An upper speaker 272 (not shown) is provided. At the lower part of the symbol display window 113, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. There is. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 88. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel stop. A ROM 306 for storing the position and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring the time and the number of times. , WDT (Watchdog Timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 314 as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 314 is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 has a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535, and a start signal output circuit that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 includes a 338, and when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts main control unit main processing described later).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110 , The index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) are monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that received this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 to detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 are installed on the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 131 sensor are installed in each of the bet button 130 and the bet button 131, and are inserted when the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect the operation. Further, the bet button 132 sensor is installed on the bet button 132, and when the bet button 132 functions as a medal insertion button, the medal electronically stored in the RAM 308 is inserted as a medal to be inserted into the game. When the bet button 132 is functioning as a chance button, the pressing operation of the chance button is detected.

The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through. It becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. The drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 338 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129 are game startable lamp 121, number of stored sheets. A drive circuit 328 for driving a display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal plate 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and an external hall computer (not shown) or the like is connected to the main control unit 300 via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bet button lamp) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. (Lamp that emits light from the bet button 132), etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404. Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 425, and the drive circuit 425 is connected to a drive unit 427 that drives the bet button 132 up and down. The operation of the bet button 132 will be described in detail in the following <Bet button 132>.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is composed of a plurality of control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various production drive devices. May be good.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512 and. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, the operation is permitted to the WDT 314, and the initial setting is performed. Set the value, etc. In step S103, the medal insertion / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and the winning line indicator lamp 120 is turned on according to the insertion of a medal. If the player wins the re-game in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S104.

In step S105, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a valid winning line is determined. In step S107, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired. In step S109, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S107. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of the winning combination is turned ON. In step S111, reel stop data is selected based on the internal lottery result.

In step S113, the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started. In step S115, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, any of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is selected in step S111 for reel stop control. Stop based on the data. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S117. In step S117, the winning determination is made. Here, when a pattern combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is judged as a bell winning. In step S119, if any winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S121, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the normal game, the BB game, the RB game, and the internal winning game is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition and the end condition are satisfied. With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 90. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Further, when the information that the detection signal is present is stored in the signal state storage area corresponding to the bet button 132, the first sub-control unit 400 is prepared to transmit the bet button reception command.

In step S207, various game processes are performed. Specifically, the interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on the signals from various sensors 318), and processing is performed according to this status (for example, the interrupt status of each of the acquired stop buttons 137 to 139). (Stop button reception processing is performed based on). In step S209, the timer update process is performed. Various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S211 the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in the present embodiment, and bits 15 are strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is set) and bits 11. ~ 14 are command types (in this embodiment, a basic command, a start lever reception command, a bet button reception command, a production command associated with the production lottery process, a rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, and a stop button 137 to Stop button reception command associated with acceptance of 139 operations, stop position information command associated with stop processing of reels 110 to 112, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, command indicating game status, etc.), bits 0 to 0 Reference numeral 10 is composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data. In step S213, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 338, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219.

In step S219, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 65. On the other hand, in step S221, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 65.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, the process corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S313, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S315, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the drive circuit 424 of the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S316, the movable object control process is performed based on the process result of step S309. For example, if there is a command to the drive unit 427 of the bet button 132 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 425.

In step S317, information output processing is performed in which a control command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 91A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S502, the control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S315, the effect random number value is updated, and the like.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 92. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of the figure (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input / output port initial setting, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S607, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S609, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S607, the process corresponding to this command is performed. This process includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 506, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated. In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S609, image control corresponding to this command is performed (details will be described later), and the process returns to step S603.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 92A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S803, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S611 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S903, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S905. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S905, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 536, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S907, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S909, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S911. If not, the generation end interrupt signal Wait for to be entered. In step S911, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Bet button 132>
FIG. 93 (a) is an external perspective view of the area around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 93 (b) shows a state (operation) in which the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position. The external perspective view around the bet button 132 in (middle), and the figure (c) is an external perspective view around the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position.

The bet button 132 has substantially the same structure as the chance button 700 included in the pachinko machine 100, and the initial position shown in FIG. 93A is shown by controlling the drive unit 427 by the first sub-control unit 400. It is configured to be movable up and down between the operation completion position and the operation completion position shown in FIG. 93 (c).

<Bet button 132 / initial position>
At the initial position shown in 25 (a), the movable portion of the bet button 132 is in a state where its upward movement is restricted by a rotating member (not shown) and it can move only downward. In this initial position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, the bet button 132 detection piece (not shown) is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, so that the bet button 132 is pressed. Is detectable.

<Bet button 132 / operation completion position>
At the operation completion position shown in FIG. 93 (c), the movable portion of the bet button 132 is released from the regulation of upward movement and moves upward by the urging force of the spring (not shown), and the fixed plate (not shown). ), And the upward movement is restricted again, and it is in a state where it can move only downward. Even in this operation completion position, when the bet button 132 is pressed downward by the player, the detection piece (not shown) of the bet button 132 is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, so that the bet button 132 is pressed. The operation is detectable.

<Bet button 132 / in operation>
During the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), that is, during the operation in which the bet button 132 is moving from the initial position shown in FIG. 93 (a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 93 (c), the bet button 132 is played. Even if the bet button 132 detection piece is detected by the bet button 132 sensor, the detection result of the bet button 132 sensor is ignored (do not judge that the bet button 132 pressing operation is valid). It is configured.

With such a configuration, when the player accidentally presses the bet button 132 while the bet button 132 is operating, the bet button 132 is pressed at a timing unintended by the player. In some cases, it is possible to prevent such a situation. In the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is ignored during the operation of the bet button 132, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing operation of the bet button 132 during the operation is enabled. You may.

<When using the bet button 132 as a medal insertion button>
FIG. 94A is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button. The slot machine 100 is provided with the above-mentioned notification lamp 123, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 124, game start possible lamp 121, and game medal insertion lamp 129, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the game medal insertion lamp 124 is lit, and the number of lighting of the game medal insertion lamp 129 is less than the specified number of medals required for one game (3 in this example). The state is a state in which the player can start the game by inserting a predetermined number of medals, and the medals can be electronically inserted by pressing the bet button 132. That is, in this state, the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button, the first sub-control unit 400 lights the bet button lamp (not shown), and the bet button 132 has a predetermined color (for example, yellow). ) Is made to indicate to the player that the reception of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective. Further, when a predetermined number of medals are inserted by the player, as shown in FIG. 3B, the game start enable lamp 121 is lit to notify that the game start operation is possible. NS.

Further, the game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is turned off when the number of medals that can be electronically stored in the slot machine 100 reaches the maximum storage number (for example, 50), and it is notified that medals cannot be inserted. .. If a medal is inserted while the game medal insertable lamp 124 is off (when an attempt is made to insert a medal exceeding the maximum number of stored medals), the medal is forcibly ejected from the medal ejection port 155. It is configured.

<When the bet button 132 cannot be used>
FIG. 94B is a diagram for explaining a state in which the bet button 132 cannot be used as the medal insertion button. As shown in FIG. 3B, the game medal insertion lamp 124 and the game start possible lamp 121 are lit, and the number of lighting of the game medal insertion lamp 129 is the same as the specified number (3 in this example). In this state, the player can start the game, and the reels 110 to 112 can be started to rotate (start the game) by pressing the start lever 135.

Further, when the game startable lamp 121 is lit, since the specified number of medals have been inserted, no medals are inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed (the detection result of pressing the medal insertion button is not accepted). , The bet button 132 cannot be used as a medal insertion button). In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to suggest to the player that the reception of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is invalid by turning off the bet button lamp.

It is possible to use the bet button 132 as a chance button even when the game start enable lamp is lit. For example, while the re-game lamp 122 is lit, medals cannot be inserted even if the bet button 132 is pressed. On the other hand, for example, as an effect between the game in which the replay player wins a prize and the start of the next game (until the start lever 135 is pressed and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating), the effect of prompting the pressing of the bet button 132 is performed. May be done. In this state, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to suggest to the player that the reception of the pressing operation of the bet button 132 is effective by turning on the bet button lamp. The effect of prompting the pressing of the bet button 132 may be performed during a period other than the illustrated period.

<When using the bet button 132 as a chance button>
FIG. 94 (c) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 95 (a) is a case where the bet button 132 is moved from the initial position to the operation completion position (operation). (Middle) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132, FIG. 95 (b) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position, and FIG. 95 (c) is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 in the initial position. It is an external perspective view of the bet button 132 when it stops between the operation completion position and the operation completion position (for example, when it breaks down).

Further, FIG. 94 (d) is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the initial position, and FIG. 95 (d) is a diagram showing an example of a normal effect. FIG. 95 (e) is a diagram showing an example of an operation reception effect performed when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position, and FIG. 95 (g) is a diagram showing between the initial position and the operation completion position of the bet button 132. It is a figure which showed an example of the operation reception effect to perform when it stopped at (for example, when it failed).

<Operation reception production / initial position>
When the bet button 132 is stopped at the initial position shown in FIG. 94 (c), the first sub-control unit 400 arrives at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the detection result of pressing the bet button is started). By turning on the bet button lamp and causing the bet button 132 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue), the player is suggested that the operation of pressing the bet button 132 is effective, and the second sub-control unit is used. As shown in FIG. 5D, the 500 is an operation reception effect (in this example, the character of the palace) that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed by using the effect image display device 157. Display an image of a sign with a bet button 132 that emits blue light.

In this example, the bet button 132 is made to emit light in different colors so that the player can easily determine whether the bet button 132 can be used as a medal insertion button or a chance button. It may be made to emit light in color. Further, in this example, an example in which the bet button 132 emits light in a predetermined color is shown, but for example, blinking may be performed in a predetermined color. In this case, the bet button 132 may be used as a medal insertion button. , The blinking pattern may be changed depending on whether the bet button 132 is used as a chance button. For example, when used as a medal insertion button, blinking is repeated in the first cycle (for example, 1 second), and when used as a chance button, a second cycle shorter than the first cycle (for example, 0. It is configured to repeat blinking in 5 seconds).

With such a configuration, the player can easily determine the function of the button, and it may be possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage due to an operation error of the button or the like. be. When the detection result of pressing the bet button can be received, the bet button lamp does not have to be turned on, the operation reception effect does not have to be performed, and the operation of the operation means (or operation unit) is urged. It is not necessary to perform the production.

<Operation reception production / in operation>
The first sub-control unit 400 is in the operation of the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 95 (a), that is, the operation completion position of the bet button 132 from the initial position shown in FIG. 94 (c) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 95 (b). When it is moved to, the bet button lamp is not turned on and the operation reception effect is not performed. In this example, the effect image display device 157 executes a normal effect as shown in FIGS. 95 (d) and 96 (a). Here, as a normal effect, in the case of a pachinko machine, a fluctuating effect, a reach effect, a jackpot effect, etc. can be mentioned, and in the case of a slot machine, a BB effect, a reel rotating effect, and a freeze effect. Production etc. can be mentioned.

The bet button lamp may be turned on during operation, or the brightness of the bet button lamp may be gradually increased. Also, when the detection of the pressing operation is enabled, the bet button lamp is lit in the first color (for example, red), and when the detection of the pressing operation is disabled, the bet button lamp is lit in the second color (for example, white). You may turn it on with. Further, when the detection of the pressing operation is enabled, the bet button lamp is lit with the first brightness, and when the detection of the pressing operation is disabled, the bet button lamp is lit with the second brightness lower than the first brightness. You may.

<Operation reception production / operation completion position>
When the bet button 132 is stopped at the operation completion position shown in FIG. 95 (b), the first sub-control unit 400 sets the bet button lamp at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 95 (b). By lighting the bet button 132 and causing the bet button 132 to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, red), it is suggested to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed, and as shown in FIG. 95 (e), the bet button 132 can be pressed. An operation reception effect that suggests to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed by using the effect image display device 157 (in this example, an image display imitating the bet button 132 that emits red light at the operation completion position). And the image display of the downward arrow).

<Operation reception effect / Stop between the initial position and the operation completion position>
The first sub-control unit 400 is in a state in which the pressing operation of the bet button 132 can be detected by the detection unit even when the bet button 132 as shown in FIG. 95 (c) is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. Become. Here, when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position, for example, when the movable portion of the bet button 132 is caught by the fixed portion and the movable portion cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position, the bet button 132 is used. One example is the case where the urging force of the spring of 132 is weakened and the movable part cannot be fully raised to the operation completion position.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 can be used as a medal insertion button and as a chance button as shown in FIG. 95 (f) even when the bet button 132 is stopped between the initial position and the operation completion position. Is also available, and as shown in FIGS. 95 (g) and 96 (b), an operation reception effect suggesting to the player that the bet button 132 can be pressed at a predetermined timing (this example). Then, the operation reception effect (the same effect as the effect shown in FIG. 95 (e)) performed after the operation is completed is performed.

In this way, even when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, if the operation of the bet button 132 can be accepted, the operation of the bet button 132 can be performed even if the bet button 132 fails. Because it is possible to accept, the player's willingness to play is not diminished. Further, by performing the operation reception effect, it is possible to clearly notify that the operation is possible even when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position, and it is possible to encourage the player to operate. can.

Further, FIG. 96 (c) is an example of a special effect displayed when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted. This effect is applicable not only when the bet button 132 is in the operation completion position and the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at the position, but also when the bet button 132 is in a position other than the initial position and the operation completion position. This is a special effect that is displayed even when the operation of the bet button 132 is accepted at the position. It should be noted that the sound may be displayed after a certain period of time (for example, after the end of the period in which the button can be accepted) without pressing the button, and the effect after pressing the button is not limited to the liquid crystal display, and the effect is movable. (The operation pattern may change), the light emitting means such as LED lights up (the light emitting pattern may change), and the sound such as BGM and sound effects can be heard from the sound output means such as the speaker. May be good.

The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game console according to the above embodiment. For example, the effect means and the notification means according to the present invention include speakers in addition to the liquid crystal display device and the lamp. Movable bodies, operating means themselves, etc. can be applied. Therefore, the production by the production means and the notification by the notification means are not limited to the display by the liquid crystal display device and the light emission by the lamp. It may be. Further, the operating means according to the present invention is not limited to the bet button, and may be any operating means that can be operated by the player.

Further, the notification means may notify that the operation means does not accept the operation, or may notify that the operation means is in an error state. Further, there is only one notification means, and the same notification mode may be performed even when the operation means is not operating to the position where it originally moves. Further, there is only one notification means, and different notification modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the position where it originally moves. Here, the "different notification mode" may be any of cases where the notification is not performed, only when the notification is performed, and only when the notification is not performed.

Further, there are a plurality of notification means, and at least one or all of the plurality of notification means may perform notification for prompting the operation. Further, there are a plurality of notification means, and different notification modes may be performed when the operation means is not operating to the position where it originally moves. Here, the "different notification mode" may include a case where a predetermined notification means does not perform notification among the plurality of notification means, or may include a case where all of the plurality of notification means do not perform notification. Further, the operating means according to the present invention may be a BET, a stop button, a lever or the like.

Further, when there are a plurality of effects as a result of receiving an operation in one notification means, at least one of the plurality of effects may not be performed when the operation means is not operating to the second position where the operation means originally moves. good. Further, the result of receiving the operation by each of the plurality of notification means may be produced, and when the operation means is not operating to the second position where the operation is originally moved, at least one of the plurality of notification means is notified. You may not perform the production of. Further, there may be one effect as a result of receiving the operation by one notification means. Further, the plurality of notification means may include those that do not produce the result of accepting the operation.

Further, although an example in which the detection of the operating means and the effect based on the detection result are performed by different control units is shown, the detection of the operating means and the effect based on the detection result may be performed by the same control unit. Further, even when the operation means is detected and the effect based on the detection result is performed by different control units, when the operation means is operated while the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position. , The operation detection result is transmitted to another control unit, and the other control unit is configured to receive the detection result. On the other hand, when the operation means is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection is performed. The result is transmitted to another control unit, but the other control unit may be configured not to accept the detection result.

Further, when the operation means is operated while the operation unit is located at the first position or the second position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit or the second control unit. While the first control unit or the second control unit is configured to receive the detection result, when the operation means is operated while the operation unit is operating, the operation detection result is used as the first control unit. Alternatively, it may be configured to transmit to the second control unit, but the first control unit or the second control unit does not accept the detection result. If the operation means is operated while the operation unit is located at the first position, the operation detection result is transmitted to the first control unit, and the operation unit is located at the second position. When the operating means is operated during operation or during operation, the detection result may be transmitted to the second control unit.

Further, the transmission destination of the operation detection result before, during, and after the operation of the operation means may be the first control unit. Further, even when the operation is performed during the operation of the operation means, the operation detection result may be accepted by another control unit. Further, when the operation means before the operation is operated, the detection result of the operation is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, and when the operation means is operated during the operation and after the operation, the second control unit sends the detection result of the operation. The operation detection result may be transmitted to the first control unit. Further, before and during the operation may be transmitted to the second control unit, and after the operation may be transmitted to the first control unit.

In addition, when the operating means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, if the notification means gives a notification suggesting the second position where it originally moves, the game will play the second position where it should have originally moved. It may be possible to inform the player so that the player is not disadvantaged as compared with when the player moves to the second position where the player originally moves. Further, when the operating means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, if the notification means gives a notification that does not suggest the second position where it originally moves, the player is confused due to the mismatch between the operating state and the notification mode. May be prevented. Further, in this case, the notification that does not suggest the second position that originally moves may notify the position of the operating means before the operation, and the notification that does not suggest the second position that originally moves is the notification before the operation. The position different from that after the operation may be notified.

Further, the operating means may include a plurality of operating units (for example, a first operating unit and a second operating unit). For example, before the operation of the operating means, the detection result of the operation of the first operating unit is obtained. It is possible to accept, and before the operation of the operating means, the detection result of the operation of the second operating unit is not accepted, and when the operating means operates to the second position where it originally moves, at least the operation of the second operating unit is performed. The detection result may be configured to be accepted.

Further, when the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result can be obtained even if the first operation unit is operated. If it is not accepted, the notification means may notify that the second operation unit can be operated. With such a configuration, since the second operating unit that can be originally operated can be operated, the same operation as when the operating means operates to the second position where the operating means originally moves can be performed, and the player can operate the player. It may be possible to prevent the disadvantage. In this case, it is not necessary to notify that the second operation unit can be operated by the notification means.

Further, when the operation detection result of the second operation unit can be received when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is received when the first operation unit is operated. In this case, it is not necessary to notify that the second operation unit can be operated by the notification means and not notify that the first operation unit can be operated. With such a configuration, since it is sufficient to operate the first operation unit or the second operation unit, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing the opportunity to operate. In this case, it is not necessary to notify that the second operation unit can be operated by the notification means, or it may be notified that the first operation unit can be operated by the notification means. You may only notify that the second operation unit can be operated by the notification means.

Also, when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves and the detection result of the second operation unit is not accepted, the operation detection result is accepted even if the first operation unit is operated. If not, the notification means may be configured to notify that the second operation unit can be operated. With such a configuration, it may be possible to refrain from operating the operating unit when the operating means is not operating to the originally moving second position, and to prevent a failure of the operating means. In this case, it is not necessary to notify that the second operation unit can be operated by the notification means.

In addition, when the operation means is not operating to the second position where it originally moves, the operation detection result is accepted when the first operation unit is operated when the detection result of the second operation unit is not accepted. In addition, it is not necessary to notify that the second operation unit can be operated by the notification means, while notifying that the first operation unit can be operated by the notification means. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort by making the operating unit that can be operated different when the operating means is not operating to the position where it originally moves. In this case, it is not necessary to notify that the second operation unit can be operated by the notification means, or it may be notified that the first operation unit can be operated by the notification means. Only the fact that the second operation unit can be operated by the notification means may be notified.

Further, the operated means according to the present invention may be an operating means. Further, the effect means has the special effect in response to the operation of the operation means when the operation means has not moved to the second position even though the movement control has been performed. You may at least not perform the production.

Further, when the operating means moved to the second position is operated due to the movement control, (1) the detecting means provided in the operating means (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the chance) It may be that the pressing operation of the operating means is detected by the detection unit of the button 750 and the detecting unit of the bet button 132), and (2) the operation means is provided after the time required for the movement control has elapsed. It may be that the pressing operation of the operating means is detected by the detected detection means (for example, the detection unit 710, the detection piece 704b4, the detection unit of the chance button 750, the detection unit of the bet button 132).

Further, the time required for the movement control may be the time required to move from the first position to the second position, and the driving means provided in the operating means (for example, the driving unit 708 (708a, 708b)). ), The drive source 754d, the drive unit 427) may be the time until the rotating member rotates from the regulated position to the permitted position. May be the time until it operates to the movement completion position.

Further, when the operation means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed, the operation is performed due to (1) a failure of the drive means or a physical factor such as pressing by the player. It may be a case where the means cannot be moved, or (2) a case where a constant drive cannot be performed by the driving means even after the time required for the movement control has elapsed. Further, it may not be detected whether or not the operating means has moved to the second position by the movement control.

Further, the movement control may be used to detect that the operation means has completed the movement to the second position. In this case, since it can be seen that the operating means could not move to the second position because it was not detected, it may be possible to perform an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect.

Further, the movement control may be used to detect that the operating means cannot move to the second position. In this case, since it is known that the operation means has been moved to the second position because it was not detected, it may be possible to perform an effect according to the detection result and increase the variation of the effect. Further, the special effect may be configured to be performed even during the execution of the movement control when the operating means is operated.

Further, the movement control is performed over the first movement period, the first movement period is a period including a second period and a third period, and the special effect is the movement. Even during the execution of control, it may be configured to be performed when the operating means is operated during the third period. Further, the special effect may be configured not to be performed when the movement control is being executed and the operating means is operated during the second period.

For example, if the movement control is started and ended in 1 second (an example of the first period), no special effect is performed for 0.5 seconds after the start (an example of the second period) even if the operating means is operated. For 0.5 seconds from the lapse of 0.5 seconds after the start to the end (an example of the third period), a special effect may be performed if the operating means is operated. Of course, when the movement control is started and ended in 1 second (an example of the movement control period), a special effect may be performed if the operating means is operated during this 1 second.

Further, when the operation acceptance period ends in a state where the operation means moved to the second position is not pressed, the operation means may be moved to the first position by the movement control. Further, when the operation acceptance period ends without pressing the operation means moved to the second position, the operation means may not return from the second position to the first position.

Further, with respect to the operation means moved to the second position, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position by the movement control during the operation acceptance period, and the operation moved to the second position may be performed. Regarding the means, the operation means may be moved from the second position to the first position during the operation acceptance period. Further, the operating means moved to the second position may move the operating means from the second position to the first position due to physical factors during the operation acceptance period.

Further, when a plurality of operating means are provided (for example, the first operating means among the plurality of operating means can be moved to the second position by the movement control, and the second operating means among the plurality of operating means is operated. The means does not move, and the notification means notifies the first operating means to be pressed (in the case of (A) below), the first is despite the movement control being performed. If the operating means does not move to the second position, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may also be detected.

Further, in the case of the above (A), when the first operating means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed, the pressing operation of the first operating means is detected. You may. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (A) above, if the first operating means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed, the pressing operation of the first operating means is not detected. You may. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected.

Further, in the case of (A) above, if the first operating means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed, the pressing operation of the first operating means is not detected. You may. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. Further, in the case of the above (A), when the second operating means moves to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may also be detected.

Further, in the case of the above (A), when the second operating means moves to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected. Further, in the case of the above (A), when the second operating means moves to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operating means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may be detected. Further, when the second operating means moves to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the first operating means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the second operating means may not be detected.

Further, when a plurality of operating means are provided (for example, the third operating means and the fourth operating means among the plurality of operating means can be moved to the second position by the movement control, and the notification means can be used. , When a notification prompting the operation of the third operating means is performed) (hereinafter, in the case of (B)), the third operating means is moved to the second position even though the movement control is performed. If it does not move, the pressing operation of the first operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may also be detected.

Further, in the case of the above (B), when the third operating means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed, the pressing operation of the third operating means is detected. You may. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected. Further, in the case of (B) above, if the third operating means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed, the pressing operation of the third operating means is not detected. You may. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

Further, in the case of (B) above, if the third operating means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed, the pressing operation of the third operating means is not detected. You may. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected. Further, in the case of the above (B), when the third operating means moves to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may also be detected.

Further, in the case of the above (B), when the third operating means moves to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected. Further, in the case of the above (B), when the third operating means moves to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may be detected.

Further, in the case of the above (B), when the third operating means moves to the second position by the movement control, the pressing operation of the third operating means may not be detected. Further, the pressing operation of the fourth operating means may not be detected.

Further, when a plurality of operating means are provided (for example, the fifth operating means and the sixth operating means among the plurality of operating means can be moved to the second position by the movement control, and the notification means can be used. , A notification prompting the operation of the fifth operating means and the sixth operating means is performed) (hereinafter, in the case of (C)), the pressing operation of the fifth operating means and the sixth operating means is detected. In that case, if the detection of the fifth operating means is faster than that of the sixth operating means (the same applies to the case of the sixth detection> the fifth detection), the detection result of the sixth operating means is not accepted. Alternatively, the detection result of the sixth operating means may be accepted after the detection process of the fifth operating means is completed, or the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be accepted when it is detected. good.

Further, in the case of the above (C), when the detection of the fifth operating means and the detection of the sixth operating means are almost simultaneous, the detection may be accepted at the same time, or both may not be accepted. Alternatively, after receiving the detection of the fifth (sixth) operating means, the sixth (fifth) operating means may be detected, or the fifth (sixth) operating means may be detected. When the detection is accepted, the detection result of the sixth (fifth) operating means may not be performed. When they are almost at the same time, one of them may be given priority. For example, among the pressed operation means, the detection of the operation means that produces an effect advantageous to the player may be prioritized, or the predetermined operation means may be preferentially detected.

Further, in the case of the above (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operating means is detected, the sixth operating means may be moved to the first position by the movement control. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, or the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected. Further, in the case of the above (C), when the pressing operation of the fifth operating means is detected, the sixth operating means may be left as it is at the second position. In this case, the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may not be detected, or the pressing operation of the sixth operating means may be detected.

In the cases of (B) and (C) above, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period ends, the movement control is performed. The third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of movement may be substantially the same for the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, and one of them moves first and is in operation or ends. The other may be moved later.

If the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation acceptance is completed, the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position. ) May be stopped as it is at the second position. If the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position after the operation acceptance period ends, the third (fifth) operating means and the third (fifth) operating means are controlled by movement. Only one of the four (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position.

In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation acceptance period, the third (fifth) operating means and the third (fifth) operating means are controlled by the movement control. The fourth (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position. In this case, the timing of movement may be substantially the same for the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means, and one of them moves first and is in operation or ends. The other may be moved later.

In addition, when the third (fifth) operating means and the fourth (sixth) operating means are in the second position during the operation acceptance period, the third (fifth) operating means and the third (fifth) operating means are controlled by the movement control. Only one of the four (sixth) operating means may be moved to the first position.

Further, the operation acceptance period indicates a period for accepting the result of detecting the pressing operation of the operation means. For example, when the operation reception period is 6 seconds, the ground detection result of the pressing operation of the operation means is accepted for 6 seconds after the operation reception is started, but the ground detection result of the operation means is not accepted after 6 seconds have passed.

In addition, a special effect can be executed when the operating means in the first position, the operating means moved to the second position by the movement control, and the operating means moved to the third position by the movement control are pressed. It may be. The third position may be a position different from the first position and the second position.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
The first movable body provided in a position where the player can contact,
A second movable body provided in a position where the player cannot touch,
It is a game table equipped with
When the first condition is satisfied, the first movable body is returned to the first position, which is the origin position of the first movable body.
When the second condition is satisfied, the second movable body is returned to the second position, which is the origin position of the second movable body.
A game table characterized in that the first condition and the second condition are different.

(Appendix 2)
In the game table described in Appendix 1,
A door body that can be opened and closed,
Production control means to control the production of the game,
With
The effect control means
The first drive control means for controlling the first movable body and
A second drive control means for controlling the second movable body, and
Have,
The first movable body is provided at least on the door body, and the first movable body is provided on the door body.
The door body includes a door opening detecting means capable of detecting that the door body has been opened.
The first condition is that the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means.
The second drive control means is a game table characterized in that the second movable body is not returned to the second position when the first condition is satisfied.

(Appendix 3)
In the game table described in Appendix 1 or 2.
Equipped with a power supply means to supply power
The first movable body moves at the first speed to the first position when the power supply is started by the power supply means.
The first movable body is a game table characterized in that when the first condition is satisfied, the first movable body moves to the first position at a second speed different from the first speed.

(Appendix 4)
In the game table described in any one of Supplementary notes 1 to 3.
When the first movable object is movable and the first condition is satisfied, the first movable object is returned to the first position by the first drive control means. A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
In the amusement machine described in any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
When the power supply is started by the power supply means, the second drive control means executes an initial operation process of moving the second movable body to a predetermined initial position.
A game table characterized in that the initial operation processing of the second drive control means is performed during execution of the initial operation processing of the first drive control means.

(Appendix A)
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
At least a directing means that can perform the directing,
A movement control means that can at least execute movement control for moving the moved means,
It is a game table equipped with
The operating means is moved from the first position to the second position when the movement control is performed by the movement control means.
The effect means can at least perform a special effect when the operation means moved to the second position is operated by performing the movement control.
Even when the operating means does not move to the second position despite the movement control being performed, the effecting means at least said that the operating means is operated. It is possible to perform a special production,
A game table characterized by that.

The operating means may be replaced with a movable body (for example, the first movable body) provided at a position where the player can come into contact with the operating means.

(Appendix B)
In the game table described in Appendix 1,
Equipped with an operation reception means that can at least accept operations by the player
The operation means is provided in the operation reception means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix C)
In the game console according to claim 1 or 2.
The special effect is not performed even if the operating means is operated during the execution of the movement control.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix D)
In the game table described in any of the appendices A to C
Even when the moved means is located at the first position, the effect means can at least execute the effect in response to the operation of the operating means by the player.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix E)
In the game table described in any of the appendices A to D,
A notification means capable of at least performing a notification prompting the operation of the operation means is provided.
The notification means performs the notification even when the operation means does not move to the second position even though the movement control is performed.
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like.

Subsequently, an embodiment of the first invention will be described. In the following description, the points different from the contents described so far will be mainly described, and duplicate explanations may be omitted. Further, the constituent requirements having the same names as the constituent requirements described so far will be described with the reference numerals used so far.

FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, in which the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are opened, as viewed from the front side (player side).

The outer frame 102 shown in FIG. 97 is a wooden frame member made of a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation store. The inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 97 is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. The inner frame 104 corresponds to an example of the first door body, and the inner frame 104 is provided so as to be at least rotatable with respect to the outer frame, and the game board is provided toward the player side (front side). The 200 is detachably mounted, and various control boards such as a main control unit 300 and sub control means (first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500) are provided on the back side (rear side). There is. The inner frame 104 is provided with an inner frame opening switch 145 (see FIG. 98) that detects the opening of the inner frame 104 when the inner frame 104 is opened. In this specification, the sensor may be referred to as a switch.

The front door 105 is a door member that has a lock function and is attached to the front surface of the inner frame 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the front door 105 corresponds to an example of the second door body, and is provided at least rotatably with respect to the inner frame 104. The front door 105 shown in FIG. 97 is provided with a frame portion 1051 and a dish portion 1052. The frame portion 1051 is formed in a frame shape, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening inside the frame portion 1051, and a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, and a payout are provided on the front side. A display LED 142 and a door-side effect movable body (not shown here) are attached. The frame portion 1051 corresponds to the portion of the front frame door 106 shown in FIG. 61. The dish portion 1052 includes an upper dish 126, a lower dish 128, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, and an operation panel 13P. The operation panel 13P is provided with various operation means such as a ball pulling button 130 and a chance button 136. The chance button 136 has a built-in chance button lamp 138, and the chance button 136 also corresponds to an example of a door-side effect movable body. The door-side effect movable body referred to here corresponds to an example of a movable body provided at a position where the player can contact. The dish portion 1052 corresponds to the portion of the door 108 with the ball storage dish shown in FIG.

The inner frame 104 is provided with a front door opening switch 147 that detects the opening of the front door 105 when the front door 105 is opened. The front door opening switch 147 is an opening detecting means (sensor) and is in an off state when the front door 105 is not in contact with the front door 105. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 turns the front door opening switch 147 into an off state. By doing so, it is detected that the front door 105 is open.

As described above, the inner frame 104 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 102, and the front door 105 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 104. Further, with respect to the outer frame 102, the front door 105 can be opened and closed together with the inner frame 104. That is, in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the front door 105 rotates together with the inner frame 104. Therefore, the combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104 can be seen as one door body.

The frame portion 1051 and the dish portion 1052 may be used as separate door members so that they can rotate independently of the inner frame 104. In this case, a door opening switch for detecting the opening of each door member is provided on the inner frame 104. Further, the frame portion 1051 may be used as an example of the second door body or the door body, and the plate portion 1052 may be used as an example of the second door body or the door body.

FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 97.

In FIG. 98, the diagonally left back side is the player side (front side), and the diagonally right front side is the back side (rear side). FIG. 98 shows the front door 105, the transparent plate unit 118U, the game board unit 200U, the inner frame 104, and the outer frame 102 from the player side.

The transparent plate unit 118U has a transparent plate member 118 and an accessory member 1181 attached around the transparent plate member 118.

The game board unit 200U has a game board 200 and a control unit CU provided on the back side of the game board. The control unit CU includes a main board case, a first sub board case, a second sub board case, and the like.

An inner frame opening switch 145 is provided in the lower corner of the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 98 on the side opposite to the hinge portion 112 toward the back side, that is, the outer frame 102. The inner frame opening switch 145 is an opening detecting means and is in an off state when it is not in contact with the outer frame 102, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is in an off state when the inner frame opening switch 145 is turned off. , Detects that the inner frame 104 is open. Further, a power supply board case 184, a payout board case 172, and a launch board case (not shown) are provided in the lower part of the inner frame 104 on the back side. Further, a power switch 178, a segment display 1044, and an error display LED 1045 are provided at the lower part of the inner frame 104 on the back side.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing how the inner frame 104 or the front door 105 is open.

FIG. 99A is a diagram showing a state in which the inner frame 104 is open to the outer frame 102 and the front door 105 is also open to the inner frame 104.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (a), the inner frame opening switch 145 is in the off state and the front door opening switch 147 is also in the off state. It detects that there is, and detects that the front door 105 is also in the open state. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the open state of the two door bodies (104 and 105).

FIG. 99B is a diagram showing a state in which the inner frame 104 is open to the outer frame 102, but the front door 105 is closed to the inner frame 104.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99B, the inner frame opening switch 145 is in the off state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the inner frame 104 is in the open state. On the other hand, the front door opening switch 147 is in the ON state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 does not detect that the front door 105 is in the open state, that is, detects that it is in the closed state.

FIG. 99 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the inner frame 104 is closed with respect to the outer frame 102, but the front door 105 is open with respect to the inner frame 104.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (c), the inner frame opening switch 145 is in the ON state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 does not detect that the inner frame 104 is in the open state, that is, the front door 105 is in the open state. Detects that it is closed. On the other hand, the front door opening switch 147 is in the off state, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that the front door 105 is in the open state.

The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 99 (b) and 99 (c) detects the open state of one of the door bodies (104 or 105).

FIG. 99 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the inner frame 104 is closed with respect to the outer frame 102, and the front door 105 is also closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 99 (d), the inner frame opening switch 145 is on and the front door opening switch 147 is also on, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is in the closed state of the inner frame 104. It detects that there is, and detects that the front door 105 is also in the closed state. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects the closed state of the two door bodies (104 and 105).

FIG. 100 shows a case where the inner frame 104 is open to the outer frame 102, but the front door 105 is closed to the inner frame 104, and the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178. It is a figure which shows an example step by step.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 100A, both the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are in the closed state, and the power switch 178 is in the off state.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 100 (b), the inner frame 104 is open with respect to the outer frame 102. The front door 105 rotates together with the inner frame 104 and remains closed with respect to the inner frame 104.

In FIG. 100 (c), the power switch 178 is turned on by turning a hand toward the back side of the inner frame 104 in the open state. That is, the power-on operation is performed. The power switch 178 is an operator that cannot be operated unless the inner frame 104 is opened. When the main power is turned on, the pachinko machine 100 starts the initial operation of the effect movable body 224. In this initial operation, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 confirms that the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position, so that even if the effect movable body 224 is actually located in the initial position, or vice versa. Even if it is not located at, the effect movable body 224 is moved to the position farthest from the initial position (maximum operating position). When the effect movable body 224 reaches the maximum operating position, the initial position return operation of returning the effect movable body 224 to the initial position is executed. A series of operations (confirmation operation) from the start of this initial operation to the return to the initial position corresponds to an example of the second operation. That is, the combination of the initial operation and the initial position return operation corresponds to an example of the second operation, and the combined operation is hereinafter referred to as a confirmation operation.

The effect movable body 224 here can reciprocate between the initial position and the maximum operating position, but the effect movable body 224 is not limited to the one capable of reciprocating, and the starting point is the initial position. It may be one that can move through the maximum operating position (for example, one that performs circular motion).

Further, in the state where the inner frame 104 is opened, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 provides an error-related notification regarding the door opening error. However, the error-related notification may not be performed for a predetermined time after the power switch 178 is operated or until the initialization process (step S113) shown in FIG. 66 is completed.

Sensors for detecting the effect movable body 224 are provided at each of the initial position and the maximum operating position, and the second sub-control indicates that the effect movable body 224 has reached the maximum operating position and has returned to the initial position. The CPU 504 of unit 500 can detect it. If it cannot be detected that the effect movable body 224 has reached the maximum operating position or has returned to the initial position, the effect movable body error is notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. When the effect movable body error occurs, the effect movable body 224 itself may be broken, the sensor may be broken, or the wiring for transmitting the sensor detection signal may be broken.

The first door-side effect movable body 2241a on the upper right shown in FIG. 100 (d) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation. Further, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 100 (e) has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position. That is, the initial position return operation is completed.

The second door-side effect movable body 2241b at the lower left shown in FIG. 100 (f) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation. Further, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 100 (g) has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position. That is, the initial position return operation is completed.

In this way, the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is performed. If there is a door-side effect movable body 2241 in addition to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, the confirmation operation is also performed for the other door-side effect movable body 2241. Will be. Further, the plurality of door-side effect movable bodies 2241 may perform the confirmation operation at the same time. On the other hand, the door-side effect movable bodies 2241 having overlapping operating ranges may perform the confirmation operation by shifting the execution timing.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 100 step by step.

When the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is completed, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed this time.

The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101 (h) has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation. Further, the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101 (i) returns from the maximum operating position to the initial position, and the initial position return operation is completed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 100 (j), the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed and is in a closed state.

If there is a board-side effect movable body 2242 in addition to the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101, a confirmation operation is also performed for the other board-side effect movable bodies 2242. Further, the plurality of board-side effect movable bodies 2242 may perform the confirmation operation at the same time. On the other hand, the board-side effect movable bodies 2242 having overlapping operating ranges may perform the confirmation operation by shifting the execution timing.

Further, in this example, the confirmation operation is executed by the door-side effect movable body 2241 before the board-side effect movable body 2242, but it may be reversed or may be executed at the same time. Alternatively, the execution timing may partially overlap.

Further, here, the front door 105 was in a closed state, but the same is true even if the front door 105 is also open together with the inner frame 104. Further, when the power is turned on in FIG. 100 (c), the inner frame 104 is closed and the front door 105 is open, or the front door 105 is also closed. Is.

As described above, the confirmation operation (second operation) when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178 is executed regardless of the open / closed state of the door body.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where the island equipment is turned on all at once.

At the island facility, the power can be turned off all at once while the power switch 178 remains on. When the power is turned off while the power switch 178 is on, the power can be turned on by the island equipment without operating the power switch 178, that is, without opening the inner frame 104 (remaining closed). be.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the power is turned on all at once by the island equipment while the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are closed, the power is turned on by operating the power switch 178. Then, the confirmation operation is executed.

The first door-side effect movable body 2241a on the upper right shown in FIG. 102 (b) is rotated from the initial position to the maximum operating position with both the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 closed. The initial operation is continuing.

Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102, and the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104. The same applies to the case where the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 when the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104. When the inner frame 104 is opened, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 provides an error-related notification regarding the door opening error. However, the error-related notification may not be performed until the initialization process (step S113) shown in FIG. 66 is completed.

Even if the door body is opened, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a continues the initial operation, and after the initial operation is completed, that is, after reaching the maximum operating position, as shown in FIG. 102 (c). In addition, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a has returned from the maximum operating position to the initial position, and has completed the initial position return operation. Here, the operation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a returning from the maximum operating position to the initial position may be the initial position returning operation in the confirmation operation, but an error triggered by the occurrence of the door opening error. It may be a dedicated operation in the generated state.

The second door-side effect movable body 2241b at the lower left starts a confirmation operation even when the inner frame 104 is opened and the front door 105 is also opened, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is shown in FIG. 102 (d). The door-side effect movable body 2241b has reached the maximum operating position from the initial position and has completed the initial operation.

Here, the front door 105 is closed with respect to the inner frame 104. On the other hand, the inner frame 104 remains open with respect to the outer frame 102. Even when only the front door 105 is opened in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 provides error-related notification regarding the door opening error. However, the error-related notification may not be performed until the initialization process (step S113) shown in FIG. 66 is completed.

The second door-side effect movable body 2241b continues the confirmation operation, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 102 (e) returns from the maximum operating position to the initial position and completes the initial position return operation. doing.

In this way, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the confirmation operation, the door-side effect movable body 2241 performs the confirmation operation in the same manner as when the door bodies (104, 105) are closed. continue. Even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial operation, the door-side effect movable body 2241 performs the initial operation in the same manner as when the door bodies (104, 105) are closed. It continues, and after the initial operation is completed, the initial position return operation is started. Further, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial position return operation, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is initially subjected to the same as when the door bodies (104, 105) are closed. The position return operation is continued.

When the confirmation operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is completed, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is performed this time.

Even when the front door 105 is also open, the board-side effect movable body 2242 starts the confirmation operation, and the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 102 (f) reaches the maximum operating position from the initial position. And the initial operation is completed.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 102 step by step.

The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 103 (g) returns from the maximum operating position to the initial position even when the inner frame 104 is open, and completes the initial position return operation.

In this way, even when the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is in the open state, the board-side effect movable body 2242 performs a confirmation operation in the same manner as when the door bodies (104, 105) are closed. Run. Even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104, 105) like the door-side effect movable body 2241. ) Continues as if it were closed. Further, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104, 105) like the door-side effect movable body 2241. ) Is closed, the initial operation is continued, and after the initial operation is completed, the initial position return operation is started. Further, even if the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 is opened during the initial position return operation of the board side effect movable body 2242, the board side effect movable body 2242 is also the door body (104) like the door side effect movable body 2241. , 105) continues the initial position return operation in the same manner as when it is closed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 103 (h), the inner frame 104, which has been opened so far, is closed and is in a closed state.

As described above, the examples shown in FIGS. 102 and 103 are at least different from the examples shown in FIGS. 100 and 101 in the open / closed state of the inner frame 104, but even if the open / closed state of the inner frame 104 is different, the confirmation operation ( Initial operation + initial position return operation) is executed. Even if the open / closed state of the front door 105 is different, the confirmation operation is executed in the same manner.

Next, opening of the door body during the production operation will be described.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where the inner frame 104 is opened during the effect operation.

In each of the drawings ((a) to (f)) of FIG. 104, the entire pachinko machine 100 is shown on the left side, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the board-side effect movable body 2242 of the pachinko machine shown on the left side are enlarged on the right side. (There is a similar figure in the following figures).

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (a), both the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 are closed, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a, the second door side effect movable body 2241b, and the board side effect movable body 2241b. The bodies 2242 are all located at their respective initial positions. Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. Further, the board-side effect movable body 2242 is located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (b), the jackpot game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side displays the effect image of the first round. Further, as a movable body effect (first effect) during the jackpot game period, the first door side effect movable body 2241a is operating.

The effect data of the movable body effect (first effect) during the jackpot game period in this example is that (1) the first door side effect movable body 2241a is opened, and (2) the first door side effect movable body 2241a is opened. Closed to open the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, (3) close the second door-side effect movable body 2241b to open the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, and thereafter (2) and the above This is data in which (3) is repeated until the jackpot game is completed.

The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 104 (b) is rotated upward and opened according to the effect data of the above (1).

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (c) also continues the jackpot game in the first round, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side continuously displays the effect image in the first round. .. Further, according to the effect data of (2) above, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 104 (c) closes, returns to the initial position, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b rotates forward. Is open.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 104 (d), the big hit game in the second round is started, and the effect image in the second round is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side. Further, according to the effect data of (3) above, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 104 (d) is closed and returned to the initial position, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is directed upward again. Is rotating.

Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (d) is displayed with characters (door opening error) as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also displays an error occurrence notification sound (door) as a notification regarding the door opening error. Is open) is output. The front door 105 rotates together with the inner frame 104 and remains closed with respect to the inner frame 104. However, even when the front door 105 is also opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the following Same as the description.

When a door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a returns to the initial position ignoring the effect data. That is, the initial position return operation is performed. This initial position return operation is not an operation according to the effect data. For example, even when the first door-side effect movable body 2241a operates (here, rotates) to the maximum operation commission position according to the effect data. If a door opening error occurs before reaching the maximum operating position, the operation toward the maximum operating position is canceled and the position returns to the initial position. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (e) also displays characters (door opening error) as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also outputs the voice of the error occurrence notification. In the error occurrence notification from the speaker 120, "the door is open" and "please close the door" are alternately and repeatedly output.

Subsequently, the hold consecutive villa production is started with the inner frame 104 open. This hold consecutive villa effect is an effect of notifying (notifying) that there is a hit in the special figure start hold during the big hit game, and the notification (notice) image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is movable. Body production (second production) is also performed. The effect data of the movable body effect (second effect) here is that (a) the board side effect movable body 2242 is dropped to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and (b) the board side effect movable body 2242 is raised. It is the data to be made.

A preview image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (f). Although a character display for notifying a door opening error is also made, this character display is more difficult to see due to the notice image than when the notice image is hidden. Further, according to the effect data of (a) above, the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 104 (f) falls to the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, making it difficult to see a part of the preview image. Combined with the preview image, the effect is enhanced. In this example, when the inner frame 104 is in the open state, the door-side effect movable body 2241 cancels the effect operation and returns to the initial position, but the board-side effect movable body 2242 performs the effect operation according to the effect data. Run. The board-side effect movable body 2242 may also cancel the effect operation and return to the initial position.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 104 step by step.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side of the pachinko machine 100 with the inner frame 104 opened, which is shown in FIG. 105 (g), displays a continuation of the preview image shown in FIG. 104 (f). As the character appears, the characters "Congratulations" are displayed. Although characters are displayed as a notification regarding the door opening error, the error-related character display is also more difficult to see due to the preview image than when the preview image is hidden. Further, the speaker 120 also continuously outputs a voice as a notification regarding the door opening error. Further, according to the effect data of (b) above, the board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 105 (g) is raised to the initial position.

Here, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (h), the character display for notifying the door opening error disappears, and instead, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with the characters "holding continuous chan confirmed". .. In addition, a character is displayed as a broadcast image. Further, the content of the error-related notification output from the speaker 120 has changed, and the voice "The door has closed" (the voice of the error cancellation notification) is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 105 (h). .. The combination of this error release notification and the error occurrence notification corresponds to an example of notification regarding a door opening error (error-related notification). The audio output of the error release notification from the speaker 120 continues for the first period (for example, 15 seconds). As described above, the speaker 120, which corresponds to an example of the notification means, is related to the door opening error even after the inner frame 104 is closed and the front door 105 is also closed (first state). Continue error-related notification (corresponding to an example of notification).

In the pachinko machine 100 in which the inner frame 104 is closed, which is shown in FIG. Is displayed. However, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 has not been restarted, and both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b remain closed (remain in the initial position). ).

After that, the round digestion of the jackpot game is continued with the inner frame 104 closed, but the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not restarted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 105 (j). Is displayed with a production image of the end effect of the jackpot game, and it is notified that the jackpot game can be expected once again after this.

As described above, in this example, the door body is closed and the error is cleared, but until the big hit game ends, more strictly, until the big hit game end effect ends, the effect of the door side effect movable body 2241 The operation does not start. In other words, the door-side effect movable body 2241 should perform the effect operation according to the effect data of the above (1) to (3) from the start to the end of the jackpot game. That is, the operation period of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and the effect operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not restarted until the operation period ends.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing stepwise a first modification of the example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105.

The state shown in FIG. 106 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 105 (g). It is done by 2242.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 106 (b), the inner frame 104 that had been opened so far is closed, and the state is the same as that shown in FIG. 105 (h). The character display related to the door opening error has disappeared, the voice output of the error occurrence notification has ended, and the voice output of the error release notification has started in the speaker 120.

The state shown in FIG. 106 (b) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 105 (i), and although the third round has been entered, the audio output of the error release notification is continued. That is, the error has been cleared, but the error-related notification continues.

Eventually, the error-related notification ends. When the error-related notification is completed, in this modified example, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 is restarted. That is, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not restarted during the period when the error is cleared but the error-related notification is not completed. In the pachinko machine 100 in which the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 105 (d) is closed and the error-related notification is completed, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 is restarted and canceled in the middle of the above (3). ), The rotation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a according to the effect data of) is started.

In addition, instead of restarting from the production data canceled in the middle, it is possible to return to the beginning of the production data and restart, or to determine the restart point in advance and always restart from the production data of the restart point. You may. Further, even if the error-related notification is not completed, the effect operation using the door-side effect movable body 2241 may be restarted from the time when the error is cleared.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 106 (e), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a closes and returns to the initial position according to the effect data of the above (2), and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b moves forward. It rotates and opens.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing stepwise a second modification of the example shown in FIGS. 104 and 105.

In the following description, the differences from the examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 will be mainly described, and duplicate description will be omitted.

Each state shown in FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (c) is the same as each state shown in FIGS. 104 (b) to 104 (d).

When a door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a provided on the side (open end side) opposite to the hinge portion 112 side (rotating shaft side) , Ignores the production data and returns to the initial position. On the other hand, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b provided on the hinge portion 112 side (rotating shaft side) continues to operate according to the effect data, and here, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b moves forward. It has started to rotate toward it. The same applies even when the front door 105 is open to the inner frame 104.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 107 (e), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data of the above (3), but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a remains stopped at the initial position. However, it does not operate.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 107 (f), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b rotates forward according to the effect data of the above (2), but the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is It still remains stationary in its initial position and does not operate.

FIG. 108 shows that the second modification shown in FIG. 107 is that the effect movable body that continues the operation according to the effect data due to the door opening error and the effect movable body whose operation is prohibited are replaced with each other. It is a figure which shows an example.

Even if a door opening error occurs, as shown in FIG. 108A, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a on the open end side continues to operate according to the effect data, and here, the first door side. The effect movable body 2241a continues to rotate to the maximum operating position. On the other hand, the operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241a on the hinge portion 112 side (rotating shaft side), which has returned to the initial position according to the effect data in (3) above, is prohibited. The same applies even when the front door 105 is open to the inner frame 104.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 108 (b), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed according to the effect data of the above (2), but the second door-side effect movable body 2241b remains stopped at the initial position. However, it does not operate.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 107 (c), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a rotates upward according to the effect data of the above (3), but the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is It still remains stationary in its initial position and does not operate.

Here, when considered together with the examples shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, when a door opening error occurs, at least one of the plurality of effect movable bodies (here, the door side effect movable body 2241) is movable. The movement of the body may be restricted (prohibited) at the initial position, and the remaining effect movable bodies may continue the effect operation according to the effect data.

FIG. 109 is a diagram stepwise showing an example of a case where the door body is opened with the effect movable body at a position deviated from the initial position by an external force.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 109 (a) is in a demo state without a game being played, and a demo screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown on the right side thereof. The title is displayed.

In FIG. 109 (b), someone touches the first door-side effect movable body 2241a in the initial position, and as shown in FIG. 109 (c), lifts the first door-side effect movable body 2241a upward. There is. Then, while the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is lifted upward, the inner frame 104 is opened by fraudulent acts.

Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, characters are displayed on the demo screen as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also notifies the error occurrence as a notification regarding the door opening error. Audio is output. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 109 (d) is located at a position deviated from the initial position.

When the door opening error occurs, the effect movable body (here, the first door side effect movable body 2241a) is not the effect operation, but when it is not in the initial position, the effect is as shown in FIG. 109 (e). The operation of returning the movable body (first door-side effect movable body 2241a) to the initial position is performed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 109 (f), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is located at the initial position, and the inner frame 104 is also closed.

If the effect movable body deviates from the initial position due to an external force during the effect operation, the effect operation may be continued.

FIG. 110 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the inner frame 104 is opened during the effect operation of a movable body different from the one described so far as the door side effect movable body 2241.

In each of the drawings ((a) to (c)) of FIG. 110, the entire pachinko machine 100 is shown at the left end, the operation panel 13P of the pachinko machine shown at the left end is enlarged and shown at the center, and the operation panel 13P of the pachinko machine shown at the left end is enlarged and shown at the right end. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown at the left end is enlarged and shown (the same applies to FIGS. 111 to 114).

In this example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 is a chance button 136. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 110 is an effect movable body that protrudes upward when the chance button effect is started. The chance button 136 protrudes to the maximum operating position, but if it is pressed before reaching the maximum operating position, it returns to the initial position without reaching the maximum operating position.

In FIG. 110A, the chance button effect is started. In the chance button effect referred to here, it is urged to press the chance button 136, and when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation acceptance period, a new effect is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (a), the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and a screen prompting the user to press the chance button 136 is displayed. An image of the chance button 136 is shown on this screen. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 110A is in the initial position, and the image of the chance button 136 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also an image of the chance button 136 in the initial position.

When the chance button effect is started, the chance button 136 gradually protrudes upward from the initial position with the passage of time. The protrusion of the chance button 136 improves both the effect of encouraging operation and the effect of improving interest.

The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 110B projects upward from the initial position, reaches the maximum operating position, and is in the most protruding state. The image of the chance button 136 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (b) is also an image of the chance button 136 in the most protruding state.

Here, the inner frame 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (c) displays characters as a notification regarding the door opening error, and the speaker 120 also outputs an error notification sound as a notification regarding the door opening error. The chance button 136, which is one of the door-side effect movable bodies 2241, does not return to the initial position even if a door opening error occurs, and remains in the most protruding state (remains in the maximum operating position). This is because the protruding direction of the chance button 136 is upward, which is unlikely to lead to danger to the player due to the opening of the door and failure of the pachinko machine. ing.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 110 step by step.

In FIG. 111 (d), the player is trying to press the chance button 136 in the most protruding state while the inner frame 104 is open.

In FIG. 111 (e), the chance button 136 is pressed while the inner frame 104 is open, and the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Here, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button 136 may return to the initial position according to the effect data, or may return to the initial position by the force (pushing force) pressed by the player. There may be. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (e), a new effect is started by pressing the chance button 136. That is, a character has appeared, and a notice has been given about the currently performed symbol variation display. It should be noted that this new notice may be a pre-reading notice or the like for the symbol variation display (holding) that is started after the symbol variation display that is currently being performed.

Here, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (f), the character display for notifying the door opening error has disappeared. Further, the content of the error-related notification output from the speaker 120 has changed, and the sound of the error release notification "The door has closed" is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 111 (f). Further, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 has developed into a reach effect.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing stepwise modifications of the examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111.

The state shown in FIG. 112 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 110 (c), the inner frame 104 is opened, and the notification regarding the door opening error is started by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120. .. The chance button 136 is in the most protruding state until just before the inner frame 104 is opened. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the chance button 136 in the most protruding state is displayed as a screen for urging the player to press the chance button 136.

In this modification, when a door opening error occurs, the chance button 136, which is one of the door-side effect movable bodies 2241, is returned to the initial position. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 112 (b) has returned to the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the chance button effect is continued even if a door opening error occurs, but in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (b), the image of the chance button 136 returned to the initial position is displayed. It is not displayed, and the image of the chance button 136 in the most prominent state is still displayed. As mentioned above, since the protruding direction of the chance button 136 is upward, it should be less likely to lead to danger to the player due to the opening of the door body or failure of the pachinko machine, but in this modified example, just in case. , The chance button 136 is returned to the initial position. However, since the chance button effect is continuing, the effect of urging the operation by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is maintained. The image display of the chance button 136 in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be an image display in which the chance button 136 has returned to the initial position in accordance with the actual state of the chance button 136.

Here, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed. From the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (c), the character display for notifying the door opening error has disappeared. Further, the sound of the error release notification is output from the speaker 120. In this modification, even if the error is cleared, the chance button 136 remains in the initial position and does not start the operation by the error clearing, but the operation is started by the error clearing and the state before the error occurs ( Here, it may return to the most prominent state).

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 112.

In this modified example, the chance button 136 was not operated within the operation valid period.

The pachinko machine 100 in which the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 113D is closed is the one immediately after the operation validity period of the chance button 136 has elapsed, and the chance button 136 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the operation validity period. Even though it was not operated inside, a normal notice has started as a new production. That is, in the chance button effect in this modified example, a new effect is forcibly performed at the timing when the operation valid period is over, even if the operation is not performed within the operation valid period. Is started. Regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated, a new effect may be started when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Alternatively, a new effect may be started at the timing when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position only when the chance button 136 is not operated. Further, a new effect may be started at the earlier timing of the timing when the operation valid period has passed and the timing when the chance button 136 returns to the initial position. Further, the effect execution lottery may be performed based on the operation of the chance button 136, and a new effect may be started only when the effect is won. Alternatively, even if the chance button 136 is operated, a new effect may not be started uniformly.

Subsequently, errors other than the door opening error will be described.

FIG. 114 is a table summarizing the main errors other than the door opening error.

When an error occurs, an error occurs in the payout display LED 142 shown in FIG. 97 or the segment display 1044 or the error display LED 1045 provided in the lower part on the back side of the inner frame 104 shown in FIG. 98, depending on the type of error. A display is displayed to inform you that you have done so. The segment display 1044 and the error display LED 1045 cannot be confirmed unless the inner frame 104 is opened, but the payout display LED 142 can be confirmed without opening the inner frame 104. The "display" shown in the table of FIG. 114 means a 7-segment display displayed on the segment display 1044.

In the state where no error has occurred, "0" is displayed on the segment display 1044, and the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 remain off.

The lower plate full tank error is an error that occurs when the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 97 is full. “1” is displayed on the segment display 1044, and the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 are turned off. In this state, for example, an error notification is made from the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120. The lower plate full tank error is canceled when the ball discharge lever 132 is operated to remove the ball and the lower plate full tank sensor is turned off.

The payout number shortage error is an error that occurs when the planned number of payouts is not executed, "2" is displayed on the segment display 1044, and both the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 are lit. do. Since the payout number shortage error is a disadvantageous error for the player, the payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105, which can be confirmed by the player, is turned on. This error of insufficient number of payouts is canceled when the retry is successful.

The payout quantity switch error painted in gray is an error when a connection abnormality of the switch (sensor) for detecting the payout quantity occurs, and is an error irrelevant to the main board of the main control unit 300. When this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped, and "3" is displayed on the segment display 1044.

Similarly, the illegal payout error painted in gray is an error when the payout of the game ball is detected (the payout number switch counts) when the payout request is not generated. Even if this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped and "4" is displayed on the segment display 1044.

The overpayment error, which is also painted in gray, is an error when it is detected that the number of prize balls or the number of loaned balls has been paid out. That is, it is an error when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls actually paid out is detected with respect to the number of payout requests. Even if this error occurs, the payout operation is stopped and "5" is displayed on the segment display 1044.

In all of these three types of payout system errors, the error display LED 1045 is lit, but the payout display LED 142 remains off. Although the error notification from the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 is not performed, it may be performed. To release each error, the inner frame 104 is opened and the error release switch 168 (see FIG. 62) provided on the back side of the inner frame 104 is operated, or the inner frame 104 is also provided on the back side. It is necessary to turn on the power (operate the power switch 178) accompanied by the operation of the error clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 62). That is, these three types of payout system errors are errors that cannot be cleared unless the inner frame 104 is opened. The state in which these three types of payout system errors occur corresponds to an example of the second error state.

Even in a state where such an error that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is opened occurs, the confirmation operation can be started. In addition, the production operation can also be started.

The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a magnet sensor and a vibration sensor, and the magnet sensor error when the magnet sensor detects the magnetic force and the vibration sensor error when the vibration sensor detects the vibration are also detected in the inner frame 104. This is an error that cannot be cleared unless is released. That is, in order to cancel the magnet sensor error, it is necessary to open the inner frame 104 and turn on the power (operate the power switch 178) accompanied by the operation of the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 62), and the vibration sensor. To cancel the error, it is necessary to open the inner frame 104 and turn on the power again by the power switch 178.

The CR unit communication error is an error when a communication abnormality is detected from the pachinko machine 100 side in transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit, and "6" is displayed on the segment display 1044. The main control communication error is an error when an operation confirmation signal is not returned to the main control unit 300 in transmitting and receiving signals between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600, etc., and "7" is displayed on the segment display 1044. Is displayed. The CR unit non-connection error is an error when the connection with the card unit cannot be confirmed on the pachinko machine 100 side, and "8" is displayed on the segment display 1044. In all of these three types of communication system errors, the error display LED 1045 and the payout display LED 142 remain off. Although the error notification from the decorative symbol display device 208 or the speaker 120 is not performed, it may be performed. The cancellation of each error is as shown in the table.

Among the errors described above, the error that makes the game unsustainable, that is, the game is stopped due to the occurrence of the error (ball launch impossible and symbol fluctuation stop), and the game is restarted (ball launch and symbol fluctuation start) unless the error is cleared. ) Is the only error that cannot be made, and the period during which this magnet sensor error occurs (the period from the occurrence of the error to the cancellation) corresponds to an example of the second period. The door-side effect movable body 2241 returns to the initial position when the door body (104, 105) is opened in a state where a magnet sensor error has occurred during the effect operation according to the effect data. On the other hand, the period in which the payout quantity switch error, the illegal payout error, the payout excess error, and the vibration sensor error occur is a period in which the game can be continued, and corresponds to an example of the first period.

Here, the error may overlap with the above description, but it should be supplemented.

The lower plate full tank error is that the lower plate full tank sensor signal is turned on by payout control from the main control unit 300 when a predetermined input port on the main board of the main control unit 300 reads on once by a timer interrupt (off ⇒ on). It is output to unit 600.

In the payout device error, the payout number (count number of payout number switches) is the payout request within the next interrupt after the payout motor finishes driving for the number of payout requests (actually, after the + braking period + non-excitation period elapses). Detects the occurrence of a payout device error when the number is less than the number. When the payment is completed one by one (retry processing), the error is cleared.

The main control communication error is an error that occurs when the off state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected or when the on state of the main control operation confirmation signal is continuously detected for two interrupts, and is the main of the main control unit 300. Command reception from the board becomes impossible. However, if the number of withdrawal requests remains, up to that amount will be paid out. The error is cleared when the on state of the main control connection confirmation signal is detected and when the off state of the main control operation confirmation signal is continuously detected for two interrupts.

The CR unit communication error is an error in the CR unit and the interface. This is an error that occurs when the ON state of the BRQ signal is detected before the loan request is generated. After notifying the communication abnormality from the gaming machine side, the error is cleared when the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are turned off.

The CR unit non-connection error is also an error in the CR unit and the interface. This is an error that occurs when the OFF state of the CR unit connection signal (VL signal) is detected and continues for 16 ms when the CR unit non-connection error is in the release state. This error does not affect the suspension of lending (payment of prize balls). The error is cleared when the ON state of the CR unit connection signal is detected and it continues for 16 ms. After the error is cleared, the communication with the CR unit is disabled until the CR unit READY signal (BRDY signal) and the CR unit lending request completion confirmation signal (BRQ signal) are turned off.

Examples of the signal transmitted in the order of CR unit → interface → payout board include a CR unit connection signal, and the CR unit READY signal includes a CR unit lending request confirmation signal. The CR unit connection signal is a VL signal (+ 18V power supply in the CR unit). The CR unit READY signal is a BRDY signal, which is a signal for transmitting that the CR unit is in the process of renting out. The CR unit lending request confirmation signal is a BRQ signal, which is a signal for the CR unit to transmit 25 lending requests and lending instructions for the basic unit.

Examples of the signal transmitted in the order of the payout board → interface → CR unit include a CR gaming machine rental completion signal and a CR gaming machine READY signal. The CR gaming machine lending completion signal is an XS signal, which is a signal for transmitting the acceptance of the request for 25 basic units and the completion of lending to the CR unit. The CR gaming machine READY signal is a PRDY signal, which is a signal for transmitting to the CR unit that a payout operation is possible.

When the power is turned on, the PRDY signal is turned on, and when the lending operation (the player presses the lending operation button) is turned on, the BRDY signal is turned on. Then, when the BRQ signal is turned ON, a loan request is made. After confirming the lending request, the payout CPU turns on the EXS signal to approve the lending. After that, the BRQ signal is turned off and a loan instruction is given. After performing 25 payout control means, the payout control means turns off the EXS signal and completes the loan. If the BRQ signal is turned ON again while the BRDY signal is ON, the lending operation is repeated, and when all the signals are finished, the BRDY signal is turned OFF.

Subsequently, a case where an error (hereinafter, referred to as a second error) that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is released occurs during the effect operation will be described.

FIG. 115 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in the case where a second error occurs during the effect operation.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (a), game balls are stored in the upper plate 126 to near full tank. On the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100, the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 shows a payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105. The payout display LED 142 shown in each figure ((a) to (f)) of FIG. 115 remains off.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (b), the jackpot game is started, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) is opened, the ball is entered into the variable winning opening 234, the prize ball is paid out, and the lower plate 128 is used. Also, game balls are starting to accumulate. Further, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 115 (b) is rotated upward and opened according to the effect data.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (c), more balls are accumulated in the lower plate 128, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a closes and returns to the initial position according to the effect data, and the second door-side effect is produced. The movable body 2241b rotates forward and opens.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 115 (d), the second round big hit game is started, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b closes, returns to the initial position, and returns to the first door side according to the effect data. The effect movable body 2241a is rotating upward again.

Eventually, the lower plate 128 became full, and a lower plate full tank error (hereinafter referred to as a third error) occurred, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Prompting characters are displayed.

Even if the third error occurs, the big hit game is continued, and the movable body effect by the door side effect movable body 2241 is not canceled. In FIG. 115 (e), the first door side according to the effect data. The effect movable body 2241a is closed, returned to the initial position, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward again to be opened.

Here, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated, the ball is pulled out from the lower plate 128, and the lower plate full tank error (third error) is released. In FIG. 115 (f), the big hit game of the third round is started, the movable body effect by the door side effect movable body 2241 is continued, and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is closed according to the effect data, and the initial stage. Returning to the position, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is rotated upward and opened.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 115 step by step.

Also in FIG. 116 (g), according to the effect data, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward again and opened.

The lined digestion of the big hit game has progressed, and in FIG. 116 (h), the 8th round big hit game has started. According to the production data, the second door-side production movable body 2241b is closed and the first door-side production is movable. The body 2241a rotates upward and opens. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 116 (i), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotating forward according to the effect data.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 116 also shows a payout display LED 142 provided on the front door 105. The payout display LED 142 shown in FIGS. 116 (g) to 116 (i) remains off.

Here, the second error, the payout quantity switch error, occurs. This payout quantity switch error is an error that cannot be cleared unless the inner frame 104 is opened. Even if the second error occurs, the big hit game is continued, and the movable body effect by the door side effect movable body 2241 is not canceled. In FIG. 116 (j), the second door side according to the effect data. The effect movable body 2241b is closed, and the first door side effect movable body 2241a is rotating upward. Even if the second error occurs, the payout display LED 142 remains off, and the notification means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 does not perform the error-related notification. As described above, depending on the type of error, the player may not be notified.

Further, in FIG. 116 (k), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotating forward according to the effect data.

Here, in order to operate the error release switch 168 (see FIG. 62) provided on the back side of the inner frame 104, the inner frame 104 is opened and a door opening error (hereinafter referred to as a first error) occurs. do. Even if the first error occurs, the payout display LED 142 remains off, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (k) is displayed with characters as a notification regarding the first error. The speaker 120 also outputs an error notification sound as a notification regarding the first error. Here, two types of errors such as the second error (payout quantity switch error) and the first error (door opening error) overlap, but due to the occurrence of the first error, FIG. 116 (l) As shown in the above, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b returns to the initial position ignoring the effect data. Further, the movement of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a that has returned to the initial position is restricted, and the movement remains at the initial position.

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 116 step by step.

In FIG. 117 (m), since the jackpot game of the 10th round is started and the inner frame 104 is opened (first error state), the first door side effect movable body 2241a is also the second door. The movement of the side effect movable body 2241b is also restricted, and both remain in the initial positions.

In FIG. 117 (n), the error release switch 168 is operated by turning a hand toward the back side of the inner frame 104 in the open state. Then, the second error (payout quantity switch error) is canceled. On the other hand, since the inner frame 104 is in the open state, the first error (door opening error) continues, and even in FIG. 117 (n), the first door-side effect movable body 2241a also has the second door-side effect. The movement of the movable body 2241b is also restricted, and both remain in the initial positions.

Next, the inner frame 104 that has been opened so far is closed, and the first error is also cleared. The character display for notifying the door opening error disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (o), and the error release notification sound is output from the speaker 120. In this example, when the first error is cleared and the error-related notification is completed, the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door-side effect movable body 2241 is restarted even before the end of the big hit game.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 117 step by step.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 118 (q), the jackpot game in the 15th round is started, and a considerably large number of balls are stored in the lower plate 128. Further, the movable body effect according to the effect data is restarted, and in FIG. 118 (q), the first door side effect movable body 2241a is closed and the second door side effect movable body 2241b is moved forward according to the effect data. It rotates again and opens.
Therefore, according to the effect data, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed, returned to the initial position, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated forward and opened.

Eventually, the lower plate 128 became full, the lower plate full tank error (third error) occurred again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (r) displayed characters prompting the ball to be removed as an error-related notification. Has been made. The third error generated here is not resolved until FIG. 119 (z), and the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the character display prompting the ball to be removed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (r) also displays an effect image of the end effect of the big hit game, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probability change state after the end of the big hit game. Further, in the door-side effect movable bodies 2241a and 2241b shown in FIG. 118 (r), the final movable body effect is also performed according to the effect data.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (s) displays the final screen of the end effect of the jackpot game. On the decorative symbol display device 208, one hold icon h11 indicating the hold of the special figure is displayed, but the hold icon h11 hides a part of the character display (error-related notification) prompting the ball to be removed. , The character display for urging the ball to be removed is more difficult to see than before the hold icon h11 was displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (t) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol after the end of the big hit game, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In FIG. (V), the super reach is entered. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (v), the screen display of the super reach effect is made, but this screen display hides a part of the character display (error-related notification) for prompting the ball to be removed, and the ball is displayed. The character display that prompts the removal is more difficult to see than before the screen display was made. In some cases, all error-related notifications may be hidden by other displays.

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 118 step by step.

Even in FIG. 119 (w), the lower plate full tank error (third error) has not been resolved, and the error-related notification is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is hidden by the display, and part of it is difficult to see.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (x), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 119 (y), a jackpot game is started. Even at this stage, the lower plate full tank error (third error) has not been resolved. On the other hand, since the big hit game is started, the operation period of the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door side effect movable body 2241 is reached. The operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not affected by the influence of the error that occurs before the arrival of this operation period and is not resolved even at the start of the operation period. Here, it is the third error that is not inherently affected, but even if it is the first error that is inherently affected (door opening error), the error occurrence timing should be earlier than the operation start timing. If so, it will not be affected. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 119 (y) rotates upward and opens according to the effect data.

Although the third error occurs first here, the effect operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is not affected even when the second error occurs first.

Here, the ball discharge lever 132 is finally operated, the ball is pulled out from the lower plate 128, the lower plate full tank error (third error) is canceled, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 119 (z) shows. The error-related notification disappears. Further, in FIG. 119 (z), according to the effect data, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is closed, and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is rotated to the front and opened.

FIG. 120 is a diagram stepwise showing an example in which the operation according to the effect data of the door-side effect movable body 2241 is prohibited even if the error occurrence timing is earlier than the operation start timing.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (a), variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

Here, the inner frame 104 is opened, and a door opening error (first error) occurs. Even when the front door 105 is opened with respect to the inner frame 104, the same description as the following description applies. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (b) is in the reach state, but the display screen is displayed with characters as a notification regarding the first error, and the speaker 120 is also the first. As a notification regarding the error, the voice of the error occurrence notification is output.

On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (c), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in the above, a big hit game is started. Even at this stage, the inner frame 104 is still open, and the door opening error continues. On the other hand, since the big hit game is started, the operation period of the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door side effect movable body 2241 is reached, but here, the first error that occurred earlier is not resolved. Therefore, the operation of the door-side effect movable body 2241 according to the effect data is prohibited from the beginning. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 receives an error occurrence command, an error resolution command, or a command including the contents of the error occurrence and error resolution from the main control unit 300, and the first sub-control unit 400 is the main. Even if the jackpot start command is received from the control unit 300, if the error resolution command is not received while the error occurrence command is received first, the first sub-control unit 400 is the door-side effect movable body 2241. However, the control according to the production data is not started. As a result, the movements of both the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the second door-side effect movable body 2241b shown in FIG. 120 (d) are restricted, and both remain in the initial positions.

Next, the inner frame 104 that had been opened so far is closed, the first error is canceled, the character display for notifying the door opening error disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (e), and the speaker. From 120, the sound of the error release notification is output. In this example, when the first error is cleared and the error-related notification is completed, the movable body effect according to the effect data by the door-side effect movable body 2241 is restarted even before the end of the big hit game. , If the operation is not performed at the beginning, even if the error cancellation or the error-related notification is completed, the operation may not be performed until the jackpot game is completed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a stepwise example of a case where the power is turned off during the confirmation operation and the power is instantly restored.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 121 (a) is in a state where the main power is not turned on, and then the power is turned on all at once by the island equipment.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 121 (b), the confirmation operation is started, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a reaches the maximum operating position from the initial position and completes the initial operation. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (b) is provided with a character display for notifying that a process such as an initialization process including a confirmation operation is being performed by turning on the power. This character display is displayed until, for example, step S115 shown in FIG. 66 or the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 67 is started.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 121 (c), as a confirmation operation, the initial value return operation is performed for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, and the maximum for the second door-side effect movable body 2241b from the initial position. It is rotating toward the operating position.

In FIG. 121 (d), the power supply is cut off (power cutoff). The timing at which the power failure occurs may be the timing before the second door-side effect movable body 2241b reaches the maximum operating position by the initial operation, or the timing when the second door-side effect movable body 2241b reaches the maximum operating position. , The timing may be during the initial value return operation. Due to the power failure, the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, which was in the confirmation operation, stops the operation and remains in the open state as shown in FIG. 121 (e).

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 121 step by step.

In this example, after the power failure occurs, the power is instantly restored, that is, the power is turned on again without the simultaneous power turning on by the island equipment, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (f) is displayed. Is the same as the character display in FIG. 121 (b), and the character display for notifying that the process such as the initialization process is in progress is performed. This character display is displayed regardless of whether or not the ram clear switch (RWM clear switch) 180 (see FIG. 62) is operated, that is, regardless of whether or not the RAM is cleared. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (f), the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, which has stopped its operation due to the previous power failure, remains open.

In the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is not backed up at the time of power failure. I can't figure out if it was broken. Therefore, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the power recovery command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the confirmation operation from the beginning.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (g), the confirmation operation is restarted from the beginning, and the first door-side effect movable body 2241a reaches the maximum operating position from the initial position and completes the initial operation. The second door-side effect movable body 2241b is still in the open state.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (h), as a confirmation operation, an initial value return operation is performed for the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, and the confirmation operation of the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is completed. There is.

In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 122 (i), the confirmation operation of the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is performed. Here, regardless of the position where the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is stopped, it is temporarily moved to the maximum operating position by the initial operation, and then returned to the initial position by the initial position return operation. Therefore, although the power is restored (the power is turned on again), the effect movable body is held in the state at the time of the power interruption, so that the movement may be different from the confirmation operation before the power interruption.

If the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is stopped at the maximum operating position, the initial operation is omitted if the second door-side effect movable body 2241b can be confirmed by the sensor provided at the maximum operating position. , Only the initial position return operation may be performed. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 may instruct the execution of the initial operation, but in this case, before the second door-side effect movable body 2241b moves, the second is performed by the sensor provided at the maximum operating position. The door-side effect movable body 2241b is detected, and the initial operation is practically not performed.

Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 backs up at the time of power interruption, the confirmation operation may be restarted from the middle of the confirmation operation interrupted by the power interruption after the power is restored. Further, when the door bodies (104, 105) are opened immediately after the power is restored, the execution of the confirmation operation may be restricted (prohibited). Further, not only when the power is restored, but also when the door bodies (104, 105) are opened during the confirmation operation, the effect movable body may be returned to the initial value, or the operation may be stopped in the middle. ..

Further, even if a power interruption occurs during the production operation according to the production data and the power is restored, the same as described above may occur.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a modified example of the board-side effect movable body 2242.

The board-side effect movable body 2242 shown in FIG. 101 and the like and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 63 operate in a plane, but the board-side effect movable body is in the front-rear direction (player side and back side). It may operate in the direction of).

FIG. 123 (a) shows a shielding device 246 composed of a plurality of members (246a and 246b) that perform a planar operation, and a character accessory 247 that can at least perform an operation in the front-rear direction. The character accessory 247 is hidden behind the shielding device 246, and the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened to advance forward (player side). The initial position of the character accessory 247 is on the back side of the shielding device 246.

FIG. 123 (1) shows a shielding device 246 in a state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the character accessory 247 is located at the initial position, and the character accessory 247 is visible to the player. No.

In FIG. 123 (2), the left door 246a and the right door 246b are all rotated, and the character accessory 247 advances from the back. The advance / retreat of the character accessory 247 is due to a stepping motor (not shown) and a rack and pinion mechanism 2471.

In FIG. 123 (3), the character accessory 247 has advanced beyond the shielding member 246 to the front side of the shielding member 246. The position of the character accessory 247 shown in FIG. 123 (3) corresponds to the maximum operating position of the character accessory 247.

In the movable body effect, the operation as shown in FIG. 123 (1) → FIG. 123 (2) → FIG. 123 (3) → FIG. 123 (2) → FIG. 123 (1) is possible. That is, the character accessory 247 can move forward and backward, and can move back and forth. Further, the shielding device 246 is also capable of reciprocating. Further, both the shielding device 246 (XY-direction movable effect means) and the character accessory 247 (Z-axis direction movable effect means) can vibrate (fine reciprocating motion) on the way.

Here, when only the inner frame 104 and / or the front door 105 or the front door 105 is opened, the operation may be continued until the movement of the shielding device 246, and the character accessory 247 may collide or the like. Operation may be regulated by possibility. Further, the operation of each movable body (246, 247) is enabled by a plurality of stepping controls (commands), and when a door opening error occurs, the movable body based on the control command currently being executed. It may be configured to continue until the operation (directing operation or confirmation operation) and regulate each response operation based on the next command operation. Further, if a door opening error occurs at the timing when only the shielding device 246 and / or the character accessory 247 or the character accessory 247 returns to the initial position by the effect operation, the effect being executed is performed as an operation to return to the initial position. It may be configured to continue the operation.

In addition, in the content described above, the matter targeting the first door-side effect movable body 2241a and the matter targeting the second door-side effect movable body 2241b may be exchanged. Further, the matter targeting the first door-side effect movable body 2241a is limited to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a, and may not be applied to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b. Often, the matter targeting the second door-side effect movable body 2241b is limited to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b, and does not apply to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a. good.

Further, the matter targeting the door-side effect movable body 2241 can be applied to the matter targeting the board-side effect movable body 2242 (corresponding to an example of the third movable body). For example, by opening the front door 105, the effect operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped, while the confirmation operation may be continued. Alternatively, conversely, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped while the effect operation may be continued. Further, even if the front door 105 is opened, the effect operation and the confirmation operation may be continued on the board side effect movable body 2242. If the front door 105 of the board-side effect movable body 2242 is closed, the risk of touching the player is low. Further, in the case of the shielding device 246 (the XY direction movable effect means) described with reference to FIG. 123, the risk of touching the player is low even if the front door 105 is open. On the other hand, in the case of the character accessory 247 (Z-axis direction movable effect means) described with reference to FIG. 123, even if the board side effect movable body 2242 is used, there is a risk of touching the player if the front door 105 is open. Therefore, the operation may be restricted. Further, regardless of the open / closed state of the front door 105, the effect operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped by opening the inner frame 104, while the confirmation operation may be continued. Alternatively, conversely, the confirmation operation of the board-side effect movable body 2242 may be stopped while the effect operation may be continued. Furthermore, both the effect operation and the confirmation operation may be continued.

Further, a fourth movable body, a fifth movable body, etc. may be provided as the door side effect movable body 2241, and a fourth movable body, a fifth movable body, etc. may be provided as the board side effect movable body 2242. May be provided.

Further, the operation of returning the effect movable body from the maximum operating position to the initial position may be the initial position returning operation in the confirmation operation, but it may be a dedicated operation in the error occurrence state triggered by the error occurrence. good. Further, the operation of returning from the maximum operating position to the initial position may be performed only on the target movable body, or may be performed on all other movable bodies.

Further, if the error is resolved during the operation of returning to the initial position on condition that an error occurs, the effect operation may be performed immediately, or the effect operation may be restarted after the operation is completed. good. Further, the execution of the effect operation may be restricted until another condition (end of various gaming states, start of another gaming state, etc.) is satisfied.

Further, the maximum movable position is a range in which the movable body is actually moved when the movable body is produced or an error is notified. For example, if there is a play space provided outside the operating range of the movable body, that space is provided. Is also the maximum movable position.

Further, although the initial operation has been described as an operation of operating up to the maximum movable position, it does not necessarily have to be the maximum movable position. For example, a detection sensor for a movable body at a position different from the initial position and within the operating range. It may be an operation that operates up to the position where is provided.

In the above explanation,
"A movable body provided at least in a position where the player can contact (for example, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a) and
At least multiple doors that can be opened and closed,
It is a game table equipped with
At least one of the plurality of door bodies is a first door body (for example, an inner frame 104).
At least one of the plurality of door bodies is a second door body (for example, the front door 105).
The movable body is at least provided on the second door body, and is
The movable body can at least return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied while the movable body is in a position different from the first position (for example, FIG. The first door-side effect movable body 2241a) shown in 107 (e),
The first position is the initial position of the movable body.
The movable body is capable of at least performing the second operation when the second condition is satisfied.
The first condition is at least a condition that can be satisfied by opening the first door body.
The first condition is at least a condition that can be satisfied by opening the second door body.
The second condition is at least a condition that can be satisfied when the power is turned on.
The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position.
When the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the initial operation in the second operation, the movable body can return to the first position after continuing the initial operation. (For example, the first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 102 (c)).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the movement of a movable body.

Further, when the second door body provided with the movable body has a configuration in which the movable body is rotatably provided with respect to the first door body, not only the opening of the second door body itself but also the opening of the first door body is opened. Even if this happens, the second door will be open. Therefore, the possibility that the person (player or clerk) at the opening destination will be injured by the movement of the movable body is reduced, and the second door body as the game table comes into contact with another game table or the like, and the movable body is moved. The possibility of failure may also be reduced.

Here, the initial operation may be an operation in which the movable body moves to the second position farthest from the first position. The second position may be the maximum moving position of the movable body. The movable body may be capable of reciprocating between the first position and the second position. The second door body may be provided on the player side (front side) of the first door body. Further, the opening / closing shaft of the second door body may be provided on the player side (front side) of the opening / closing shaft of the first door body. The second door body is provided on the player side (front side) of the game board, and the first door body may hold the game board.

The movable body can also be contacted by a clerk at a game store. Further, the movable body may be one provided on both the door body different from the door body and the one provided on both of the door body (for example, one provided straddling the two).

Further, when the first condition is satisfied while the movable body is in a position different from the first position, the movable body returns to the first position and then is in another position (for example,). , Maximum operating position), or may go through another position (eg, maximum operating position) before returning to the first position and then return to the first position.

Further, the movable body executes the second operation when the second condition is satisfied, and after the second operation, another operation (for example, an effect operation based on the effect data) is continued. It may be something to do.

Further, the conditions such as the first condition and the second condition describe an example that is satisfied, and may be a condition that is satisfied by another operation or the like. For example, the first condition is satisfied when the first door body and the second door body are opened, but it may be a condition which is satisfied by an operation or the like unrelated to the door body. The second condition is a condition that is satisfied by turning on the power, but the second condition is satisfied by another operation such as operating the error release switch, starting a predetermined gaming state, or returning from the demo state. You may. Further, the second condition may be a condition that is also satisfied by opening the door body (for example, when the door body is opened and the power is automatically turned on).

Further, the conditions such as the first condition and the second condition may not be satisfied even if the operation described in the present specification is performed. It should be noted that the content described as "... is possible" in the operation of the movable body in the claims of the present application and the embodiment may include a case where ... is not performed.

In addition, the "position where the player can at least contact" includes a position where the player comes into contact with nature and a position where the player normally does not come into contact but sometimes comes into contact with the player. "Returnable" includes that it is possible to return normally, but in some cases it may not be possible to return (hereinafter, the same applies). "Executable" includes that it can be executed normally, but it may not be possible in some cases (hereinafter, the same applies). The first condition is normally satisfied when the door body is opened, but in some cases (for example, when the opening angle of the door body is insufficient), it may not be satisfied. .. The second condition is normally satisfied when the power is turned on, but may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the voltage is insufficient even when the power is turned on).

again,
"The movable body can at least return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during the first operation (for example, FIG. 104 (e)).
The first operation is an effect operation according to the effect data.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to prioritize the safety of people and the game table over the production operation.

Here, the movable body may be one that immediately returns to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation, or the first movement. It may be one that continues a part of the operation and then returns to the first position.

When the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation, the movable body returns to the first position and then further moves to another position (for example, the maximum operating position). Alternatively, it may return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position.

again,
"The movable body can return to the first position without continuing the first operation when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation. (For example, FIG. 104 (e)),
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, it may be possible to prioritize the safety of people and the game table over the production operation.

again,
"The movable body attempts to return to at least the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the movable body receives an external force and is not in the first position (. For example, FIG. 109 (e)),
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the position of the movable body is displaced due to an external force or the like, it can be returned to the original position when the door is opened.

The external force referred to here corresponds to a force received by contact with a player or the like, a force received from a tool such as a magnet, or the like.

In addition, when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the movable body receives an external force and is not in the first position, the movable body returns to another position (after returning to the first position). For example, it may move further to the maximum operating position), or may go through another position (for example, the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position and then return to the first position.

again,
"The movable body returns at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation.
The first operation is an effect operation according to the effect data.
The movable body attempts to continue the operation according to the effect data even when the movable body receives an external force during the execution of the first operation and moves to a position different from the position according to the effect data. Is a thing,
A game table characterized by that. "
It may be.

again,
"The movable body does not at least perform the first operation even when an operation instruction regarding the first operation is received in a state where the first condition is satisfied (for example, the movable body". The first door-side effect movable body 2241a) shown in FIG. 107 (f),
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, if the door is opened first, safety may be prioritized over the production.

Even if the movable body receives an operation instruction regarding the first operation while the first condition is satisfied, the movable body does not perform the first operation and further operates another operation. (For example, an effect operation based on different new effect data) may not be performed.

again,
"The movable body may continue the first operation when it receives an operation instruction regarding the first operation while the first condition is satisfied."
again,
"The movable body is capable of at least performing the second operation when receiving an operation instruction regarding the second operation while the first condition is satisfied (for example, FIG. 100). 1st door side effect movable body 2241a shown in (d),
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, even if the door opening is established first, the second operation may be prioritized. For example, when opening the door, the clerk may turn on the power while maintaining the game area when the hall is opened, so prioritizing the second operation does not reduce the work efficiency on the hall side. .. Further, since the power is turned on intentionally, it may be better to give priority to the second operation. Further, before the store is opened, it is unlikely that the player or the like is on the open side of the door body, so that safety may be ensured.

When the movable body receives an operation instruction regarding the second operation while the first condition is satisfied, the movable body executes the second operation, and after the second operation, Other actions (eg, the first action) may also be performed.

Further, even if the movable body receives an operation instruction regarding the first operation before the first condition is satisfied and the movable body returns to the first position, the first operation is performed. The movable body may be capable of performing at least the first operation after returning to the first position.

Further, the movable body returns to the first position when the operation instruction regarding the second operation is received before the first condition is satisfied and the movable body returns to the first position. Later, the second operation may be at least feasible, or may return to the first position and at least not perform the second operation.

Further, when the movable body receives an operation instruction regarding the second operation while the first condition is satisfied, the movable body gives priority to returning to the first position without performing the initial operation. It may be something to do.

again,
"The second door body is provided with at least a second movable body (for example, a second door-side effect movable body 2241b).
The second movable body is capable of at least continuing the third operation when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the third operation (for example, FIG. 107 (e)). 2241b), the second door-side production movable body shown in
The third operation is an effect operation according to the effect data.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, there are cases where only a predetermined movable body can perform a special operation.

The second door body may be provided with a lamp, a speaker, or the like in addition to the second movable body. The second movable body continues the third operation when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the third operation, and after the third operation, another operation ( For example, an effect operation based on different new effect data) may be continued.

In addition, "sustainable" includes that it can be continued normally, but in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied), it may not be possible to continue (hereinafter, "sustainable"). same).

again,
"The second door body is configured to be at least rotatable with one end as a rotation shaft (for example, a hinge 112).
The movable body (for example, here, the relationship between the movable body and the second movable body is reversed and the second door side effect movable body 2241b) is the second movable body (for example, the first door side effect movable body). It is provided at a position closer to the rotation axis than the body 2241a) (FIG. 108).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, a movable body close to the rotation axis may come into contact with an adjacent game table (such as the open end side of the table or the CR unit between the tables) depending on the angle at which the door is opened. Therefore, it may be possible to prevent a failure by restricting the effect operation while the door is open.

In addition to being rotatable, the second door body may be configured to be removable with one end as a fulcrum.

Further, the second movable body may be provided at a position closer to the rotation axis than the movable body (FIG. 107). By doing so, since the movable body on the open end side has a large amount of movement due to the opening of the door, there is a high risk of contact with the player, so it may be possible to ensure safety by returning it to the initial position. ..

Further, "rotatable" includes that although it can normally rotate, it may not be able to rotate in some cases (for example, when it is locked) (hereinafter, it is possible to rotate). ,same).

again,
"The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 97).
The first door body (for example, the inner frame 104) is provided at least rotatably with respect to the outer frame (for example, the outer frame 102).
The second door body (for example, the front door 105) is provided at least rotatably with respect to the first door body.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

The first door body may be provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the island equipment or the second door body. The second door body may be provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame.

Here, "the first detecting means for detecting that the first door body has been opened, and
A second detecting means for detecting that the second door body has been opened, and
With
The first detection means may be a detection means different from the second detection means, or is a detection means common to the second detection means.
A game table characterized by that. May be. That is, it may be detected by different detection means, or the opening of any door body may be detected by one detection means.

again,
"Equipped with a notification means (speaker 120)
The notification means is a means capable of at least executing notification (for example, error-related notification regarding a door opening error) when the first door body is opened.
The notification means is a means capable of at least executing notification (for example, error-related notification regarding a door opening error) when the second door body is opened.
The notification means is a means capable of continuing the notification (for example, error release notification) for at least the first period (for example, 15 seconds) even after the first state is reached (for example, FIG. 105 (h)). ,
The first state is a state in which the first door body is closed.
The first state is a state in which the second door body is also closed.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

That is, the notification means can at least continue the notification even after the first door body is closed and the second door body is also closed.

According to this game table, by giving priority to the fact that the door was open during the first period, it may be possible to reliably notify even if the door opening time is short, and it is possible to detect fraudulent activity. It can be expected to contribute.

The notification means is in a state in which the second door body is closed even when the first door body is in a closed state and the second door body is in a state in which the second door body is still open. Even if the first door body is left open, the notification can be continued.

Summarizing the above, the inner frame 104 corresponds to the "first door body" as an example, and the front door 105 corresponds to the "second door body" as an example. The "movable body" corresponds to the first door-side effect movable body 2241a or the second door-side effect movable body 2241b as an example. The initial position of the movable body corresponds to the "first position" as an example. The "first operation" corresponds to the effect operation according to the effect data as an example, and the "second operation" is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position. A certain confirmation operation corresponds as an example. The "first condition" corresponds to the opening of the first door body or the second door body as an example, and the "second condition" corresponds to the operation of the power switch 178 or the simultaneous power-on by the island equipment. Correspond as an example. The "second movable body" corresponds to the second door-side effect movable body 2241b or the first door-side effect movable body 2241a as an example. The "third operation" corresponds to an effect operation according to the effect data of the second movable body as an example. The "first state" corresponds to a state in which the first door body is closed and the second door body is also closed as an example.

In addition, in the above explanation,
"A movable body (for example, a door-side effect movable body 2241) provided at least in a position where the player can contact, and
At least a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, a combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 when the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104).
It is a game table equipped with
The movable body is at least provided on the door body, and is
At least one of the plurality of error states is the first error state (for example, a state in which a door opening error has occurred).
At least one of the plurality of error states is a second error state (for example, a state in which an error that cannot be canceled unless the door body is opened).
The movable body is at least in the first position when the first condition (for example, the occurrence of a door opening error) is satisfied during the execution of the first movement (for example, the movement according to the effect data). It is possible to go back
The movable body can at least continue the first operation when the second condition (for example, the occurrence of a payout number switch error) is satisfied during the execution of the first operation. ,
The first position is the initial position of the movable body.
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first error state occurs.
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second error state occurs.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was explained.

According to this game table, it is possible to provide a game table characterized by the movement of a movable body. In addition, it may be possible to select the movement of the movable body according to the severity of the error. Further, when returning to the initial position, it may be possible to contribute to prevention of failure of the movable body and the like.

The movable body can also be contacted by a clerk at a game store. Further, the movable body may be one provided on both the door body different from the door body and the one provided on both of the door body (for example, one provided straddling the two).

Further, the door body may be removable as well as openable and closable.

Further, when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation, the movable body returns to the first position and then further moves to another position (for example, the maximum operating position). Alternatively, it may return to the first position after passing through another position (for example, the maximum operating position) before returning to the first position. Further, when the second condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation, the movable body continues the first operation, and after the first operation, another operation (for example,). , The production operation based on different new production data) may also be continued.

In addition, the conditions such as the first condition and the second condition (the same applies to the third condition and the fourth condition described later) describe an example in which they are satisfied, and may be in another state or the like. It may be a condition that is satisfied by the operation of.

Further, the conditions such as the first condition and the second condition may not be satisfied even if the operation described in the present specification is performed. It should be noted that the content described as "... is possible" in the operation of the movable body in the claims of the present application and the embodiment may include a case where ... is not performed.

In addition, the "position where the player can at least contact" includes a position where the player comes into contact with nature and a position where the player normally does not come into contact but sometimes comes into contact with the player. In addition, "openable and closable" includes that it can be opened and closed normally, but in some cases (for example, when it is locked), it may not be possible to open and close (the same applies hereinafter). .. "Returnable" includes that it is possible to return normally, but in some cases it may not be possible to return (hereinafter, the same applies). "It is possible to continue" includes that it can be continued normally, but in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied), it may not be possible to continue (hereinafter, it is possible to continue). ,same).

Here, the error state is, for example, a state in which the door body is open.

Further, "the movable body is intended to at least return to the first position when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the movable body receives an external force and is not in the first position. There is (for example, FIG. 109 (e)), which is a game table characterized by the above. ”

Further, the door body may be the inner frame 104 alone or the front door 105 alone. The movable body may be capable of reciprocating between the first position and the second position farthest from the first position. Here, the second position may be the maximum moving position of the movable body. The door body may be provided on the player side (front side) of the game board, or may hold the game board.

again,
"The movable body can at least perform a second operation (for example, a confirmation operation) when the third condition is satisfied.
The third condition is at least a condition that can be satisfied when the power is turned on.
The second operation is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position.
The movable body (first door-side effect movable body 2241a shown in FIG. 102 (c)) is the first condition when the first condition is satisfied during the execution of the initial operation in the second operation. After continuing the initial operation, it returns to the first position.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, in the initial operation when the power is turned on, the operation of the movable body can be prioritized even when the first condition is satisfied due to the first error state.

The movable body executes the second operation when the third condition is satisfied, and after the second operation, another operation (for example, the three conditions are satisfied). Other dedicated actions of the case) may also be performed. Furthermore, the requirement for the establishment of the third condition may include that the door body is opened and the power switch is operated, or that the door body is closed (island equipment without the door body being opened). It may also include that the power was turned on all at once.

In addition, "executable" includes that it can be executed normally, but it may not be executed in some cases (hereinafter, the same applies). Further, the third condition is normally satisfied when the power is turned on, but may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the voltage is insufficient even when the power is turned on). be.

Here, if the above three conditions are satisfied after the power supply is once turned off, the second operation may be different from the operation executed before the power supply is once turned off. You may.

Further, the initial operation may be an operation in which the movable body moves to a second position (for example, the maximum operating position) farthest from the first position.

again,
"The first error state is a state in which the door body is at least open.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The period in which the second error state occurs (for example, the period in which the payout quantity switch error occurs) may include the first period.
The first period is at least a period during which the game can be continued.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

again,
"The period during which the second error state occurs (for example, the period during which the magnet sensor error occurs) may include the second period.
The second period is at least a period during which the game cannot be continued.
The second error state is an error state that can be canceled at least when the fourth condition is satisfied.
The fourth condition is a condition that can be satisfied with at least one condition of opening the door body (for example, operating a power switch 178 that cannot be operated unless the door body is opened). ,
The movable body can at least return to the first position when the fourth condition is satisfied while the second condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation. ,
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, the movable body can be returned to the initial position with priority given to the safety of the game table and the player.

The fourth condition may be a condition that is satisfied only by opening the door body (for example, when the door body is opened, the power is automatically turned on again).

In addition, "can be released" includes that it can be released normally, but it may not be possible to release it in some cases (hereinafter, the same applies).

Further, the fourth condition may not be satisfied in some cases (for example, when the opening angle of the door body is insufficient) even if the door body is opened.

Here, the second error state may be released by operating the operating means (error release switch 168, ram clear switch 180) provided on the back side of the game table. That is, the fourth condition may be a condition that satisfies the operation of the operating means as at least one condition. In other words, the error canceling operation means that can be operated at least by opening the door body is provided, and the fourth condition is a condition that is satisfied as at least one condition that the error canceling operation means is operated. You may.

again,
"The movable body does not at least start the first operation in the first error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 105 (f) or the like).
The movable body can at least start the first operation in the second error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 116 (i) and the like).
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game table, by not starting the first operation only in the first error state, it may be possible not to restrict the production of the movable body more than necessary.

The movable body may not start an operation different from the first operation (for example, an operation that moves in response to a player's operation) in the first error state, and further, the first operation. In the second error state, the second operation may be started in addition to the first operation.

In addition, "startable" includes that it should be started normally, but it may not be started in some cases (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied) (for example, when an emergency stop condition is satisfied). same as below).

again,
"The movable body is capable of at least starting the second operation in the first error state (for example, the door-side effect movable body 2241 shown in FIG. 102).
The movable body is capable of at least initiating the second operation in the second error state.
A game table that specializes in that. 』\
Was also explained.

According to this game console, the operation at the time of turning on the power may be given the highest priority.

The movable body may be capable of initiating an operation different from the second operation (for example, an operation that moves in response to a player's operation) in the first error state, and further, the above. In addition to the second operation, the first operation may be started in the second error state.

again,
"The first operation is an operation according to the production data.
A game table characterized by that. 』\
Was also explained.

Summarizing the above, the door-side effect movable body 2241 corresponds to the "movable body" as an example. As an example, the "door body" corresponds to a combination of the inner frame 104 and the front door 105 in a state where the front door 105 is not opened with respect to the inner frame 104. The "first error state" corresponds to the state in which the inner frame 104 is open as an example, and the "second error state" includes an error that cannot be cleared unless the inner frame 104 is opened. The state corresponds as an example. The initial position of the movable body corresponds to the "first position" as an example. The "first operation" corresponds to an operation according to the effect data as an example, and the "second operation" is a series of operations from the start of the initial operation to the return to the first position. A certain confirmation operation corresponds as an example. As a result, the "first condition" corresponds to the opening of the inner frame 104 as an example, and the "second condition" corresponds to the occurrence of an error that cannot be canceled unless the inner frame 104 is opened. The "three conditions" correspond to the operation of the power switch 178 or the simultaneous power-on by the island equipment as an example, and the "fourth condition" corresponds to the opening of the inner frame 104 as an example.

The following will be added, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix a)
Equipped with a production means that can at least perform the production,
The movable body is an operating means that can be operated by the player at least.
The effect means can at least execute the effect when the operation means is operated.
The operating means returns at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied while the operating means is in a position different from the first position.
The effect means does not at least execute the effect even when the operation means is operated.
A game table characterized by that.

For example, in a slot machine or the like, if the operation method related to the stop order or the like does not match a predetermined operation method, the symbols constituting the winning combination may not be aligned (the winning may not be possible). In this case, a period (assist time) for notifying the operation method may be provided on the sub control unit side regardless of the main control unit. Granting this period is a privilege for the player, and the period may be extended by winning a predetermined role, winning a lottery, or the like. This extension (the number of additional games) is also a privilege for the player. According to the game console described in Appendix 1, when the door body is opened due to fraudulent activity, it may be possible to prevent fraudulent game by restricting the production related to the granting of benefits.

(Appendix a)
Equipped with a production means that can at least perform the production,
The movable body is an operating means that can be operated by the player at least.
The effect means can at least execute the effect when the operation means is operated during the valid period.
The operating means returns at least to the first position when the first condition is satisfied while the operating means is in a position different from the first position.
The effect means is capable of at least performing the effect after the validity period has expired.
The effect means that even when the operation means is operated (regardless of the timing at which the operation means is operated), the effect can be at least executed after the valid period has expired. Is,
A game table characterized by that.

In addition, even if the constituent requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, the embodiment, the modified example, the various examples, the appendices, etc. described above, the constituent requirement may be the other embodiment or the embodiment. It may be applied to a modified example, various examples, an appendix, and the like.

<Embodiment C>
The overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 by the operation of the player, a chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136, and a game store. A ball lending operation button 140 that gives an instruction to lend a ball to the installed card unit (CR unit), a return operation button 142 that gives an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a player's balance and a card. It is provided with a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the state of the unit. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 125 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 124 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 and the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and has flowed down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate the sprocket by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, there is a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub that performs control processing related to the effect based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls, and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk. Power is supplied to the payout board case 172 that houses the payout board 170 including 168, the launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to the launch of the game ball, and various electrical game devices. A power supply board including a power supply switch 178 that turns on and off the power supply by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating 182 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged.

FIG. 126 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. The outer rail 202 extends from above the effect device 206 to the right, and the game ball can fly to the game area 124 on the right side of the game board 200 through the space between the upper part of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. That is, the game area 124 sandwiches the first flow-down path on the left side of the effect device 206 as a decorative member as a path through which the launched game ball flows down, and the decorative member as a path through which the launched game ball flows down. It has a second flow path on the right side. Hereinafter, launching a game ball on the first flow path may be referred to as "left-handed", and launching a game ball on the second flow path may be referred to as "right-handed".

In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center, an effect movable body 224 is arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208, and a normal symbol display device 210 and a first special symbol display device 212 are arranged below the effect movable body 224. A second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as "general symbol", the special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol", the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2".

The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later. In FIG. 126, the effect movable body 224 is located at an initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame defining the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect movable body 224 cannot be visually recognized by the player at the initial position. ing. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a display screen front plane) by a drive system (not shown). You can do it. The configuration and drive system of the effect movable body 224 will be described later with reference to the drawings.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in, for example, a horizontally long rectangular display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (Electro Liquid Crystal) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the normal figure variable games are held up to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are a predetermined number. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first normal drawing starting port 227, a second normal drawing starting port 229, and a special drawing 1 starting port 230. A special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (winning in the general winning opening 226). ), The payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls include a ball to be paid out to the player as a consideration for winning a prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "prize ball") and a ball to be lent to the player (hereinafter, referred to as a "rental ball"). There is) and is included.

The first normal figure start port 227 and the second normal figure start port 229 are composed of devices called gates and through chuckers for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. .. In the present embodiment, the first flow start port 227 is arranged in the first flow path on the left side of the effect device 206, and the second flow path is on the right side of the effect device 206. Figure The start port 229 is arranged. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball can pass through the first normal figure start port 227 by hitting left, and the game ball can pass through the second normal figure start port 229 by hitting right. The ball that has passed through the first normal drawing starting port 227 or the second normal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the game island side unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first normal figure start port 227 or the second normal figure start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal figure fluctuation game by the normal figure display device 210. .. In addition, when the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first normal drawing start port 227 in a period other than the predetermined period (for example, during the electric support state, the execution of the super reach effect, or the big hit game). , The pachinko machine 100 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute a normal symbol decorative symbol variation game with a predetermined probability.

In the present embodiment, only one start port 230 is arranged in the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, the payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is arranged below the second normal drawing starting port 229. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. , The special figure variation game by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. Since the second general drawing start port 229 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 below it are in the second flow path on the right side of the effect device 206, the first flow path on the left side of the effect device 206. The game ball that has advanced to the second normal figure does not pass through the second normal figure start opening 229 or enters the special figure 2 start opening 232. Further, since the first normal drawing start port 229 and the special drawing 1 start port 230 are in the first flow path on the left side of the effect device 206, they are on the second flow path on the right side of the effect device 206. The advanced game ball does not pass through the first normal drawing start opening 227 or enter the special drawing 1 starting opening 230.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the special drawing 1 starting opening 230 of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member 234a is closed. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. The ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and drives the launch motor 146 and the launch rod 146. The launching mallet 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches them into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or the starting opening. (Special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232), without winning any winning opening or starting port, or the first normal drawing starting port 227, the second normal drawing starting port 229 The out port 240 is reached only by passing through.

Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, the warp device 242 and the stage 244 are arranged in the rollable area of the game ball, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball. Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is transferred to the special figure 1 starting port 230 in the central part of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the ball.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-like left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the inner ends of the shielding device 246 overlap each other, and the shielding device 246 shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer edges of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice to be visible from the holes in the lattice, or the shoji portion of the holes in the lattice may be closed with a semi-transparent lens body to the rear. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the obstacle portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 127. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 temporarily stores data such as a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, in the basic circuit 302, a random number value generation circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (in this circuit, (It is assumed that two counters are built-in), a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, and a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, and an inner frame. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including an open sensor and a full tank sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined sensor circuit 322. The drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the symbol display device of the above, for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and the display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210. Drive circuit 326 and drive circuit 330 for performing display control of various status display units 328 (for example, normal drawing hold lamp 216, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 hold lamp 220, high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.) And a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 and the like that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 are connected.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special drawing 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number value generation circuit 318 also latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special drawing 2 starting port 232. , The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko machine to the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. Outputs 100 game information (for example, game state).

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 has a voltage value of the power supply. A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the value is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment) is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is started from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main processing of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 issues commands to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that signals can be transmitted, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, an effect movable body 224, and a movable object 703 described later. A drive circuit 422 for performing drive control, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position and initial position of the effect movable body 224 and the movable object 703, and a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136. A predetermined detection sensor, for example, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from an effect movable body sensor 424 or a chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data are connected. ing. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. .. A drive circuit for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the basic circuit.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path.

Next, using FIG. 128, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment stop display. And the types of general figures will be explained. FIG. 128 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure. On the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, the special figure 1 variable game is started, and the ball has entered the special figure 2 start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the start port sensor detects it. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. .. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol referred to in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is displayed. After that, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, or after the start of the "variation display of the special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is displayed. The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display referred to in the present embodiment, and hereinafter, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of displays up to is called a symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be performed a plurality of times in succession.

FIG. 128A shows 10 types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure J” as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 128 (a), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit. "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" are 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbols, and "Special Figure C" and "Special Figure D" are 15R jackpot symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the big hit game is completed. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the state shifts to the electric support state (sometimes referred to as the time saving state). The electric support state will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the electric support state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not transitioning to the electric support state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbols "Special Figure A" and "Special Figure B" are in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R big hit symbols "Special Figure C" and "Special Figure D" are special figures. Figure Low probability Normal figure High probability state. These "special figure A", "special figure B", "special figure C", and "special figure D" are symbols in which the advantage to the player is relatively large.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol and is called a sudden change. Sudden probability change becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state like the 15R special big hit symbol after the big hit game is completed. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol and is called a hidden probability change. The hidden probability change becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (latent probability change state) after the big hit game is completed. The hidden probability change does not shift to the electric support state after the jackpot game ends.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol. After the small hit game is completed, the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state (sometimes referred to as a normal state or a normal game state) is reached. In the small hit game, the attacker is released the same number of times as "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" (twice in the case of this embodiment).

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first missed symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second missed symbol, which is a symbol in which the advantage to the player is relatively small.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment draws a lottery as to whether or not it is a big hit in the hit / fail judgment, and then, based on the result of the hit / fail judgment, after displaying the symbol variation, "Special Figure A". It is configured to determine which of "Special Figure J" is to be stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 or special figure 2 display devices 212 and 214. Therefore, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the profit state after the jackpot game (for example, the special symbol probability change state) by determining the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display. (Presence / absence of electric support status and presence / absence of electric support status) are automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this, and for example, apart from the determination of the stop symbol, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to determine the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the profit state after the jackpot game by lottery. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, for example, when the stop symbol is determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is automatically determined, whereas the profit status after the jackpot game is determined by lottery. The profit states may be appropriately associated with each other.

FIG. 128 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. "Decoration 1"-> "Decoration 2"-> "Decoration 3"-> ... "Decoration 9"-> "Decoration 10"-> "Decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot and the 15R special jackpot, a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are lined up in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-decoration" 2-Decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When explicitly notifying the 15R special jackpot, a combination of three identical odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3", "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", etc.) Is stopped and displayed.

In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit, which is called the hidden probability change of "Special Figure F", and the small hit of "Special Figure G" and "Special Figure H", "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped. indicate. In addition, when notifying a 2R jackpot called a sudden change in "Special Figure E", "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of "special figure I" and "special figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 128 (b) are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of jackpot are uniquely determined, but the player may not know which combination of decorative symbols is which jackpot.

FIG. 128 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the normal drawing. There are three types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: "Public figure A" which is a hit symbol 1, "Public figure B" which is a hit symbol 2, and "Public figure C" which is an outlier symbol. be. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not the game is a hit and the determination of the stop symbol in the normal figure variation game are performed by a lottery of software random numbers. For example, the hit symbols 1 and 2 have different opening patterns of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 (electric chew). Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the first normal figure start port 227 or the second normal figure start port 229, the normal figure display device 210 lights up all seven segments. The "variable display of the normal map" is performed by repeating the lighting of one segment in the center. Then, "Fu-zu A" or "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the normal-figure variable game, and "Fu-zu C" is stopped and displayed when notifying the loss of the normal-figure fluctuating game. do. Also in FIG. 128 (c), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

FIG. 128 (d) shows an example of a decorative design for a normal design. There are three types of decorative patterns for ordinary patterns of the present embodiment: "Fu-zu decoration 1", "Fu-zu decoration 2", and "Fu-zu decoration 3". The ordinary drawing decoration 1 has a design aspect reminiscent of, for example, "○", the ordinary drawing decoration 2 has a design aspect reminiscent of, for example, "◎", and the ordinary drawing decoration 3 has, for example, "x". It has a design aspect that reminds us. On condition that the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first normal drawing start port 227 other than the predetermined period (for example, during the electric support state, the execution of the super reach effect, or the big hit game). A game of changing the display of the decorative symbol is performed with a predetermined probability on the decorative symbol display device 208 by switching the display in the order of "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3".

When notifying the hit of "Fu-zu A", "Fu-zu decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the hit of "Fu-zu B", "Fu-zu decoration 2" is stopped and displayed. When notifying the deviation of "Fu-zu C", "Fu-zu decoration 3" is stopped and displayed.

Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 129. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 129 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Allow operation and set initial values. In the present embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) as an initial value.

In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage is less than (9 V in this embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a thirth). 1 Output port to the sub-control unit 400) to output a clear signal, set to allow writing to RAM 308, and the like.

In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is used. In the case of setting the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 127 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115 following step S113, interrupt prohibition is set, and then the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial value generation for generating the initial value of the special figure determination random number value counter that generates the special figure determination random number value used for the lottery to determine the stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation game. Update the random number counter. In addition, the initial value generation random number counter for generating the initial value of the normal figure winning random number value counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value used for determining the success or failure of the normal figure variable game is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a random number value counter for determining a special figure and a random number counter for generating an initial value thereof, and a random number value counter for winning a normal figure and a random number counter for generating an initial value thereof. In step S115, the initial values of two of these initial value generation random number counters are updated. For example, if the possible numerical range of the initial value generation random number counter is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter is used. Remember in. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for generating the initial value. The other random number counters for generating initial values are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 130. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In the step S203 following the step S201, the WDT is set so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). The restart is performed periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer).

In step S205 following step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 127 stores prize determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal before the previous time, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time). In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches (information indicating that there is), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232, or the first normal drawing starting port 227 or It is determined that the second normal drawing start port 229 has passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 227, and 229 have been won. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209 following step S205, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated. In the random number for generating the initial value of the main processing of the main control unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the initial value of the random number counter for generating the random number value for determining the normal figure used in the symbol determination lottery of the normal figure is generated. The random number counter for generating the initial value of is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal figure is 0 to 99, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value for determining the normal figure provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is set to 1. Is added and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

Further, in the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process, the special figure determination random number value counter used by the main control unit 300 to generate the special figure determination random number value, and the general figure winning random number value are generated. Update the winning random number counter and the random number counter for determining the normal figure that generates the random number value for determining the normal figure. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the special figure determination random value is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special figure determination random value counter provided in the RAM 308 to generate the special figure determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original random number value counter for determining the special figure. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number value counter for determining the special figure. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, if it is determined that the random number value counter for determining the special figure has gone around, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number value counter for determining the special figure is acquired. Then, set it in the random number value counter for determining the special figure. For example, a value is acquired from a special figure determination random value counter that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to the initial value set last time (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random value counter, and is used as the special figure determination random value counter. At the same time as setting, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the special figure determination random value counter has made one round next. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determination random number counter has made one round next, the initial value storage for determining that the normal figure winning random number counter has made one round. The area is provided in the RAM 308. As the special figure determination random number value counter, a counter for acquiring the random value value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random number value for special figure 2 may be separately provided, or the same counter may be provided. May be used.

Further, for example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 65535, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is set to 1. Is added and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 65536, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter is obtained. Set to. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 65535, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the winning random number value is generated. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for use and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value in the normal figure has made one round next.

Further, for example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal figure is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value for determining the normal figure provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is obtained. Is added to 1 and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter is obtained. Set to. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random value for determining a normal figure that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value that is stored, the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random value for determining the normal figure, and for determining the normal figure. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the random value for determining the normal figure has made one round next. I will do it.

In step S211 following step S209, the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure fluctuation time determination random number value counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time determination random value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the special figure fluctuation game or its initial value is updated. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is, for example, 20000 ms in the normal-figure low-probability state and 1000 ms in the normal-figure high-probability state. The pachinko machine 100 may determine the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game by lottery using a predetermined table, and generates a random number value for determining the normal figure fluctuation time for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the normal map fluctuation game. The value of the random number value counter for determining the fluctuation time of the normal figure or the initial value thereof may be updated.

In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the special diagram 1 display device 212 is clocked. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Update various timers including a timer for timing the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S215 following step S213, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 227, and 229, the number of winning balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217 following step S215, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 start port 230, the special figure 2 start port 232, the first normal figure start port 227, the second normal figure start port 229, and the variable winning port 234 have been won. .. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

If there is a prize in the special figure 1 start port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the hold number 4 is full), the random number value generation circuit (Hard Random Number Circuit) 318 Special Figure 1 A random number value for jackpot determination generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the starting port 230 is acquired and provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determination random number value is acquired from the special figure determination random number value counter and stored in the special figure 1 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the jackpot determination random value and the special figure determination random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area (hereinafter, abbreviated as "special figure 1 random value set" or "special figure 1 start information") is special. Fig. 1 Number of reservations The same number as the number of reservations stored in the special figure 1 storage area is stored. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, every time the special figure 1 hold number decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 random value set having the highest hold order (the earliest and the earliest stored) is stored. At the same time as being erased, the data in the remaining special figure 1 set of random values is processed so as to be moved up by one. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 hold increases by one, a new set of special figure 1 random value sets is added to the next hold order of the data of the special figure 1 random value set having the lowest (last) hold order. Written.

When the special figure 2 start port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the hold number 4 is full), the random number value generation circuit Special figure 2 of 318. The value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the start port 232 is subjected to predetermined processing to acquire a random value for jackpot determination, and a special feature for jackpots provided in RAM 308. The special figure determination random value for big hits is acquired from the figure determination random value counter and stored in the special figure 2 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. Special figure 2 Random value set of random value for jackpot judgment and special figure determination random value for big hit in storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as "special figure 2 random value set" or "special figure 2 start information") Is stored in the same number as the number of special figure 2 reserved stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, every time the special figure 2 hold number decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 random value set having the highest hold order is deleted, and the remaining special figure 2 random value sets are deleted. It is processed so that the hold order of the set of data is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 hold increases by one, a new set of special figure 2 random value sets is written to the next hold order of the data of the special figure 2 random value set having the lowest hold order.

If there is a prize in the first normal figure start port 227 or the second normal figure start port 229 and the corresponding normal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is calculated from the normal figure winning random number value counter. The figure is acquired as a winning random number value and stored in the corresponding normal figure random value storage area. When a prize is won in the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

In step S219 following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221 following step S219, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal map display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), it hits when the first normal figure hit flag is on. When the second normal figure hit flag is on, the display mode is the hit symbol 2 (normal figure B) so that the display mode is the symbol 1 (normal figure A), and when the off flag is on. The 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to display the out-of-shape symbol (normal figure C), and when the normal figure hit flag is off, the out-of-line symbol is displayed. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is performed so as to be in the display mode. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms and displays one of the hit symbol 1 (general diagram A), the hit symbol 2 (FIG. 128 normal diagram B), and the outlier symbol (general diagram C). I do. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, either the first normal figure hit flag or the second normal figure hit flag is turned on based on the normal figure determination result. When the first and second solenoid hit flags are on, the solenoid status is updated at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the solenoid stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the process, the timer 308 is set to be in operation in the normal drawing, and a solenoid for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 (a part of various solenoids 332) is set for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). ), A signal for holding the blade member 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is different, the normal map hit flag is turned off as described later. When this normal figure hit flag is off, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the number of normal figure variable games and the number of normal figure variable games that are not controlled to open / close the special figure 2 start port 232 (the state of the normal figure is not operating) and are on hold. When is 1 or more, whether the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned normal figure random number value storage area. Make a hit judgment (judgment of success or failure of the normal map fluctuation game) to be decided. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the symbol is determined by a random number lottery based on the random number value for determining the normal figure stored in the random number value storage area. When the normal figure determination result is the hit symbol 1, the first normal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to on, and when the normal figure determination result is the hit symbol 2, the second normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set the hit flag to on. If the result of the hit determination is wrong, the normal figure off flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to on. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation time of the normal map in the high probability state of the normal map is 1000 ms, and the symbol variation time of the normal map in the low probability state of the normal map is 20000 ms. When the symbol fluctuation time of the normal figure is determined by lottery, the value of the random number value counter for determining the fluctuation time of the normal figure that generates the random value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal figure is acquired as the random value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal figure. Based on the acquired random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map, one time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of fluctuation times, and this variable display time is set as the variable display time of the normal map. As a result, it is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following plurality of (nine in this example) processes according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing of the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 by 1 is used as the special figure 2. Re-store in the hold count storage area. At the same time, the blinking of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 in FIG. 126 have LED numbers 1-4 in order from the left to the right in the figure, the LEDs for the number of special figures 2 hold lamps are, for example, red in order from the one with the youngest LED number. Turns on and turns off the others.

Further, for example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A or special figure B shown in FIG. 128 (a), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and the normal figure probability change flag is When it is on, the special figure C or special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure. The probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure F when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and the special figure H when the second small hit flag is on. , The 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is lit so as to be in the special figure I when the first off flag is on and in the special figure J when the second off flag is on. -The turn-off drive control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A, special figure B), a 15R big hit symbol (special figure C, special figure D), and a sudden probability change symbol (special figure E). , Hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol F), 1st small hit symbol (special symbol G), 2nd small hit symbol (special symbol H), 1st missed symbol (special symbol I), and 1st missed symbol (special symbol) The final display of any one of the symbols in J) is performed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of electric support stored in the number storage unit of the electric support provided in the RAM 308 (details will be described later) is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of electric support, and the subtraction result is 1 to 0. In that case, the time saving flag is turned off unless the special figure probability is changing (details will be described later). Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state). Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, the door member 234a is held in the open state by the solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). Along with outputting a signal, information indicating an opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and information indicating the closing period is displayed in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, the effect waiting period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of electric support times (for example, 100 times) is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this big hit game, and the RAM 308 is also set. Turn on the time saving flag provided in. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the number of times of electric support is not set in the electric support number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The time saving state here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability (probability change) state of the normal map. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation / shortness). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew opening). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. These control states due to the probability change of the normal figure, the change of the normal figure, and the extension of the electric chew are collectively called the electric support (starting port winning support by the electric tulip) state. In addition, it is called a time saving state including a control state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game is also shortened.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 will be inserted into the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, and many game balls will be inserted into the special drawing 2 starting port 232 until the game balls enter. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on as described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is more than 0, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. The notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is special. FIG. 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 2 random value set (starting information) is selected from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. Obtained and using a judgment table (not shown) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, to determine whether to make a small hit, and to determine the time from the start of the variable display of Special Figure 2 to the stop display. , The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special figure 2 is determined. After taking out the earliest set of the special figure 2 random value from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the memory of the special figure 2 random value set in the special figure 2 random value storage area is cleared and the special figure 2 is cleared. The number of holds is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 random value set is stored in a temporary area (an example of the second start information storage means) provided in the RAM 308 with the special figure 2 random value set taken out from the special figure 2 random value storage area. The above determination may be made based on the set of the special figure 2 random values stored in the temporary area.

In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is the symbol fluctuation start command, the command data includes the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the special figure related. It includes information indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the lottery process, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, it includes the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. There is. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has won a prize, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has won a prize, whether or not a variable winning port 234 has won a prize, etc. including.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the variation time of the special figure variable game selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held, etc. Set the information indicating. Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. , When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the normal drawing display device 210 and the special drawing 1 display device 212 are controlled via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. , The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 129 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 129.

Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 131. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer variable update interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes, for example, about 30 seconds.

In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. .. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309 following step S307, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S311 following step S309, when the press of the chance button is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button.

In step S313 following step S311 if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315 following step S313, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S317 following step S315, if there is a command to the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319 following step S317, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, a setting is made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S303. ..

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of. In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 131 (a). Stored in the timer variable storage area of. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S503, which is next to step S501, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400, and other effects random value value update processing is performed.

Next, the structure and operation of the effect movable body used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 152. FIG. 132 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front, as in FIG. 126. In FIG. 132, the effect movable body 224 is lowered from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame defining the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the front plane of the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state of being stopped inside.

The effect movable body 224 has a shape that imitates a sword, for example. The handle of the sword is located at. Maintaining this arrangement relationship, the effect movable body 224 can move up and down in the rectangular opening frame. Further, the effect movable body 224 moves from the upper side of the opening frame to the inside of the opening frame at the initial position and becomes invisible. It should be noted that the effect movable body 224 may move from the lower side of the opening frame to the inside of the opening frame at the maximum descent position so as to be invisible.

FIG. 133 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front, as in FIG. 132. FIG. 133 shows a state in which the base portion 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 132, and the movable object 703 imitating a blade is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle with the central portion of the base portion 701 as the center of rotation. Is shown.

Next, the structure of the movable object unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 and 135. In the following description, the side closer to the player with the pachinko machine 100 installed on the island equipment of the game store is referred to as "front" (front, front side, front end, etc.), and vice versa is "rear" (rear). , Rear side, rear end, etc.), the vertical upper side as seen from the player is "upper" (upper side, upper side, upper end, etc.), and the opposite is "lower side" (lower side, lower side, lower end, etc.). The horizontal left side is defined as "left" (left side, left side, left end, etc.) and the opposite is defined as "right" (right side, right side, right end, etc.). FIG. 134 is an external perspective view of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side. FIG. 135 is an external perspective view of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the rear side. FIGS. 134 (a) and 135 (a) show the case where the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position. In the movable object unit 700, the right drive system base 713 and the left drive system base 712 having an elongated metal plate are opposed to each other in the left-right direction, and the upper end of the right drive system base 713 and the upper end of the left drive system base 712 are connected to the elongated metal plate. It is connected by 710, and the lower end of the right drive system base 713 and the lower end of the left drive system base 712 are connected by a connecting member 711 of an elongated metal plate to be assembled in a rectangular frame shape.

A guide member 717 having an elongated columnar metal rod is fixed to the right drive system base 713 along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). A motor mr is arranged at the lower end of the right drive system base 713, a gear gr1 is fixed to a rotating shaft of the motor mr, and a gear gr2 is meshed with the gear gr1. A pulley pr is arranged at the upper end of the right drive system base 713, and a belt v is bridged between the pulley pr and the gear gr2. The belt vr is laid parallel to the extending direction of the guide member 717.

A guided member 721 is slidably attached around the columnar metal rod of the guide member 717. The guided member 721 is fixed to the belt vr. By driving the motor mr to move the belt vr, the guided member 721 fixed to the belt vr can be guided by the guide member 717 and move in the vertical direction along the columnar member of the guide member 717. .. A movable body right end holding member (not shown) for holding the right end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 721.

A guide member 715 having an elongated columnar metal rod is fixed to the left drive system base 712 along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). A motor ml is arranged at the lower end of the left drive system base 712, a gear gl1 is fixed to a rotating shaft of the motor ml, and a gear gl2 is meshed with the gear gl1. A pulley pl is arranged at the upper end of the left drive system base 712, and a belt vl is bridged between the pulley pl and the gear gl2. The belt bl is laid parallel to the extending direction of the guide member 715.

The guided member 719 is slidably attached around the columnar metal rod of the guide member 715. The guided member 719 is fixed to the belt bl. By driving the motor ml to move the belt bl, the guided member 719 fixed to the belt bl can be guided by the guide member 715 and move in the vertical direction along the columnar member of the guide member 715. .. A movable body left end holding member (not shown) for holding the left end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 719.

At the right end of the movable body 224, a motor 723 that rotates the movable object 703 with the central portion of the base 701 as the center of rotation is fixed. FIGS. 134 (b) and 135 (b) show a state in which the right drive system and the left drive system are coordinated and synchronously move the effect movable body 224 downward by a predetermined distance from the initial position. There is. In FIGS. 134 (c) and 135 (c), the movable object 703 is rotationally moved while the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIGS. 134 (b) and 135 (b). Indicates the state.

FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view (part) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the rear side. Although not shown, the right drive system of the movable object unit 700 has a similar configuration. The guided member 719, which is fixed to the belt bl and holds the guide member 715 slidably, is provided with a box-shaped region, and the box-shaped region is orthogonal to the sliding direction of the guided member 719. A claw portion 725 that can be projected by a predetermined distance in the direction of the belt is housed. The tip of the claw portion 725 is formed in a wedge shape. Further, the upper tip of the claw portion 725 is formed with a slope that can come into contact with the pin 729 described later. A spring 723 that contacts the rear end of the claw portion 725 is arranged in the box-shaped region. The claw portion 725 is always urged in the protruding direction by the action of the spring 723. The box-shaped region accommodates the claw portion 725 and the spring 723 and is closed by the lid member 727.

A movable body left end holding member 731 that holds the left end of the effect movable body 224 is slidably attached to the guide member 715 under the guided member 719. The left end holding member 731 of the movable body is formed with a claw portion 731a having a wedge-shaped tip that can be engaged with the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719.

When the movable body left end holding member 731 that holds the left end of the movable body 224 is located at the lowermost end of the guide member 715 and the motor ml is rotated in a predetermined direction to move the belt bl, the guided member is guided. The member 719 is lowered so that the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 can be engaged with each other. As a result, the left end holding member 731 of the movable body can be connected to the guided member 719. When the motor ml is rotated in the other direction to move the belt vr to raise the guided member 719 after the engagement is completed, the movable body left end holding member 731 connected to the guided member 719 is also raised. By driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700 in the same manner, the effect movable body 224 located at the lowermost end can be pulled up.

The pin 729 is projected and fixed at a position above the left drive system base portion 712, which is a predetermined distance above the initial position of the effect movable body 224 and is in contact with the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the guided member 719 rises beyond the initial position and brings the claw portion 725 into contact (collision) with the pin 729, the claw portion 725 moves by a predetermined amount in the direction of being pushed toward the box member by the pin 729. As a result, the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 can be separated. By driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700 in the same manner, the effect movable body 224 located at the highest position can be freely dropped.

In order to return the effect movable body 224 to the initial position, the guided member 719 is moved to the movable body left end holding member 731 located at the lowermost end to engage the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a, and then the guided member 719. Is moved upward, and the same operation is performed in synchronization with the right drive system, whereby the effect movable body 224 can be moved to the initial position.

FIG. 137 (a) is an exploded perspective view (part) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the rear side. FIGS. 137 (b) to 137 (d) show an enlarged circular portion of FIG. 137 (a). The disengagement operation between the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a by the pin 729 will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 (b) to 137 (d). FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which the guided member 719 holding the left end holding member 731 of the movable body is moved upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position by driving the drive system. The claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 are engaged with each other. Further, the bottom portion of the pin 729 is in contact with the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the guided member 719 moves further upward, the fixed bottom of the pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719, so that the claw portion 725 engages with the claw portion 731a of the left end holding member 731 of the movable body. Is moved in the direction of eliminating.

In FIG. 137 (c), the guided member 719 moves further upward, and the fixed bottom of the pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 to engage the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a. Indicates a state in which is resolved.

In FIG. 137 (d), the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is disengaged, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 are separated and movable. The left end holding member 731 of the body is shown in the middle of free fall.

FIG. 138 is a front view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is in an initial position where the movable object 703 is not displaced with respect to the base portion 701. FIG. 138 (b) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is displaced counterclockwise by a predetermined angle with the central portion of the base portion 701 as the center of rotation. A drive system using a motor 723, a pulley and a belt (not shown) is used to drive the movable object 703. FIG. 138 (c) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by the maximum angle counterclockwise. The movable object 703 is provided with an LED substrate inside, and can produce an effect of causing the LED to emit light.

FIG. 139 is an external perspective view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. A belt vc is bridged between a gear gt that transmits the rotation of the motor 723 (not shown) at the right end of the base 701 and a gear (not shown) that is rotatably fixed to the central portion 703c of the base 701. A movable object 703 is connected to the gear of the central portion 703c. By rotating the motor 723, the belt vc is driven and the gear of the central portion 703c is rotated, so that the movable object 703 can be rotationally moved with respect to the base portion 701.

On the left side of the central portion 703c of the base portion 701, a photosensor 740 in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are arranged so as to face each other via a space portion 740a is arranged. The photo sensor 740 has a light emitting element and a light receiving element arranged so as to face each other with the space portion 740a interposed therebetween. The light emitting element and the light receiving element (both not shown in FIG. 139) are directed toward the space portion 740a so that the optical path from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is in the horizontal front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on an island facility or the like. Have been placed. In order to prevent the emitted light from the decorative symbol display device 208 located on the rear side of the movable body 224 from entering the light receiving portion of the light receiving element of the photo sensor 740, for example, a black resin is provided in a predetermined area behind the light receiving element. The used light opaque member is provided. In this example, the wall portion 740b behind a part of the light receiving element of the housing of the photosensor 740 is used as the light opaque member.

In the vicinity of the photo sensor 740, a shutter 750 provided with a light-shielding piece 750c that enters the space 740a of the photo sensor 740 and shields the light emitted from the light-emitting element from being received by the light-receiving element is attached. The shutter 750 is rotatably fixed at the rotation center 750a. On the opposite side of the light-shielding piece 750c with respect to the rotation center 750a, a protruding piece contact portion 750b is provided on the opposite side of the light-shielding piece 750c to which the protruding piece 703s provided on the movable object 703 can come into contact. The rotation center 750a is provided with a spring mechanism (not shown) inside, and the spring mechanism urges the shutter 750 to prevent the light-shielding piece 750c from entering the space 740a of the photosensor 740 unless a force is applied from the outside. Has been done. When the projecting piece 703s abuts on the projecting piece contact portion 750b and presses it, the shading piece 750c enters the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. The vicinity of the shutter 750 is protected by attaching a lid member 701a to the base 701.

In this embodiment, the photo sensor 740 detects the presence or absence of the light-shielding piece 750c, and the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the movable object 703 is in the initial position when the photo sensor 740 detects the light-shielding piece 750c. When the photo sensor 740 does not detect the light-shielding piece 750c, it is determined that the movable object 703 is in a position other than the initial position.

FIG. 140 is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 141 (a) is an external perspective view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. 141 (b) to 141 (d) show an enlarged circular portion of FIG. 141 (a). The operation of the projecting piece 703s and the shutter 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141 (b) to 141 (d). FIGS. 140 (a) and 141 (b) show a state in which the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the projecting piece 703s abuts on the projecting piece contacting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and pushes up the projecting piece contacting portion 750b. I'm entering. In this state, the photo sensor 740 can detect the shading piece 750c.

FIGS. 140 (b) and 141 (c) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position about the central portion 703c. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703s also rotates by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. Therefore, the protruding piece 703s is separated from the protruding piece contact portion 750b of the shutter 750. Since the pressing force does not act on the protruding piece contact portion 750b, the protruding piece contact portion 750b is lowered by the urging force of the spring, and the light-shielding piece 750c is raised and exits from the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. In this state, the photo sensor 740 cannot detect the shading piece 750c.

FIGS. 140 (c) and 141 (d) show a state in which the movable object 703 rotates at a maximum angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c and comes into contact with the mechanical end to stop. Since the protruding piece 703s is separated from the protruding piece contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 and no pressing force acts on the protruding piece contact portion 750b, the protruding piece contact portion 750b is lowered by the urging force of the spring to maintain the stopped state. At the same time, the light-shielding piece 750c also rises to maintain the state of exiting from the space portion 740a of the photosensor 740. The photo sensor 740 cannot detect the shading piece 750c.

FIG. 142 is a rear view and a partial cross-sectional view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 142 (a) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, which is the same as that of FIG. 140 (a). FIG. 142 (b) shows a cross section cut along the line AA of FIG. 142 (a), and FIG. 142 (c) shows a partially enlarged cross section of FIG. 142 (b). FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (c) show a state in which the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the projecting piece 703s abuts on the projecting piece contacting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and pushes up the projecting piece contacting portion 750b. I'm entering. In this state, the photo sensor 740 can detect the shading piece 750c.

FIG. 142 (d) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, which is the same as that of FIG. 140 (b). FIG. 142 (e) shows a cross section cut along the line BB of FIG. 142 (d), and FIG. 142 (f) shows a partially enlarged cross section of FIG. 142 (e). FIGS. 142 (d) to 142 (f) show a state in which the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position about the central portion 703c. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703s also rotates by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. Therefore, the protruding piece 703s is separated from the protruding piece contact portion 750b of the shutter 750. Since the pressing force does not act on the protruding piece contact portion 750b, the protruding piece contact portion 750b is lowered by the urging force of the spring, and the light-shielding piece 750c is raised and exits from the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. In this state, the photo sensor 740 cannot detect the shading piece 750c.

FIGS. 143 to 146 schematically show a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the effect movable body 224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 146. The effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 143 to 146 show a state in which the game board 200 is viewed horizontally from left to right. In FIG. 143 (a), the effect movable body 224 as the first means is stopped at the initial position, and the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the second means arranged behind the effect movable body 224. It shows a state in which light is emitted from the front to the front. A photo sensor 740 is arranged at the base 701 of the effect movable body 224. The photosensor 740 has a pair of wall portions arranged so as to face each other with a space portion 740a formed in a predetermined width in the horizontal front-rear direction. A light emitting element 740c is arranged on the front wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and a light receiving element 740d is arranged on the rear wall portion 740b. The wall portion 740b in which the light receiving element 740d is arranged functions as a light opaque member at least in a region behind the light receiving element 740b as a third means. The entire housing of the photo sensor 740 may be a light opaque member. Further, the effect movable body 224 is provided with a movable object 703 as a fourth means. Further, since the effect movable body 224 is in the initial position and the movable object 703 is also in the initial position, the light-shielding piece 750c of the shutter 750 projects vertically into the space 740a to block the emitted light from the light emitting element 740c. Therefore, the light receiving element 740d does not detect light exceeding a predetermined threshold intensity.

Regarding the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224 has an initial position (first position) that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction and a position that overlaps at least a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction (the first position). It is possible to move the range including the second position).

In this example, the effect movable body 224 can move in a straight orbit in the vertical direction, but the effect movable body 224 moves in an orbit including a curved line or an orbit including an arc without being limited to the straight orbit. It may be possible, or it may be possible to move in the horizontal direction or the diagonal direction without being limited to the vertical direction. Further, the effect movable body 224 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate) and can emit light at any position, can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving, and can emit light even while the movable object 703 is moving. You may.

Further, the photo sensor 740 detects whether or not the movable object 703 is in the initial position depending on whether or not the light receiving element 740d receives the light from the light emitting element 740c. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c is blocked by the light shielding piece 750c and cannot be received by the light receiving element 740d. Is not blocked by the light-shielding piece 750c, so that light can be received by the light-receiving element 740d. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c can be received by the light receiving element 740d without being blocked by the light shielding piece 750c, and when the movable object 703 is moving, it can be received from the light emitting element 740c. The light may be blocked by the light-shielding piece 750c so that the light-receiving element 740d cannot receive the light.

The light-shielding piece 750c of the shutter 750 changes its position according to the movement of the movable object 703. In this example, the shutter 750 is provided separately from the movable object 703, but the movable object 703 and the light-shielding piece 750c may be provided integrally. Further, the reflectance of at least a part or all of the surface of the shading piece 750c may be lower than the reflectance of at least a part or all of the surface of the effect movable body 224 (it is difficult to reflect light).

The movable object 703 can move in a range including a third position (initial position) and a fourth position (moving position). In this example, the central portion 703c is rotationally moved around the rotation axis, and the degree of overlap with the base portion 701 of the effect movable body 224 is smaller in the fourth position than in the third position. That is, the degree to which the movable object 703 protrudes from the base portion 701 increases. Further, the movable object 703 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate) and can emit light at any position, can emit light even while the movable object 703 is moving, and can emit light even while the effect movable body 224 is moving. The light emitting mode may be different between the third position and the fourth position.

FIG. 143 (b) shows that the effect movable body 224 moves downward from the initial position as shown by an arrow and is located in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the effect movable body 224. Indicates the state of being. Light is radiated forward from the display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 as shown in the figure. Decorative pattern display device 208 The emitted light irradiates the effect movable body 224 located in front from the rear, but the wall portion 740b behind the pair of wall portions of the photo sensor 740 is at least the region behind the light receiving element 740b. Functions as a light-transmitting member. By locating a part of the members constituting the photo sensor 740 as a light opaque member behind the light receiving element 740d in this way, it is possible to prevent the light receiving element 740d from receiving the light from the decorative symbol display device 208. can do.

In FIG. 144, the movable object 703 rotates about the rotation axis of the central portion 703c from the state of FIG. 143 (b), and the effect movable body 224 is located more than the position (third position) shown in FIG. 143 (b). It shows a state of being moved to a fourth position where the degree of overlap with the base portion 701 is small. When the movable object 703 rotates by a predetermined amount, as described with reference to FIGS. 141 (b) to 141 (d), the movable object 703 comes into contact with the protruding piece contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 and presses the protruding piece contact portion 750b. Since the projecting piece 703s moves, the projecting piece contact portion 750b descends due to the urging force of the spring, and the shading piece 750c rises and exits from the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c is received by the light receiving element 740d.

FIG. 145 is a diagram schematically showing a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modified example of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. In the photosensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 145 (a), a light receiving element 740d is arranged on the front wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and a light emitting element 740c is arranged on the rear wall portion 740b. By doing so, when the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light-impermeable resin member of the photo sensor 740 provided with the light-emitting element 740c and the light-shielding piece 750c are located behind the light-receiving element 740b, which is more decorative. In some cases, the light from the symbol display device 208 may not be received by the light receiving element 740b.

The photosensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 145 (b) has a pair of wall portions arranged so as to face each other with a space portion 740a formed in a predetermined width in the vertical direction. A light emitting element 740c is arranged on the lower wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and a light receiving element 740d is arranged on the upper wall portion 740b. In the wall portion 740b in which the light receiving element 740d is arranged, the region behind the light receiving element 740b functions as a light opaque member as a third means. The entire housing of the photo sensor 740 may be a light opaque member. The shading piece 750c moves in the horizontal front-rear direction as the movable object 703 moves from the initial position. By doing so, since the wall portion 740b made of a light-impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 provided with the light-receiving element 740d is located behind the light-receiving element 740d, the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 can be more received by the light-receiving element. In some cases, it is difficult for the 740d to receive light. Further, since the direction of the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 and the direction of the light from the light emitting element 740c are orthogonal to each other, it may be difficult for the light receiving element 740d to receive the light from the decorative symbol display device 208. be.

FIG. 146 is a diagram schematically showing a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modified example of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. The effect movable body 224 shown in FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 has the same configuration as that of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. It is characterized in that the light opaque member 760 is provided. The light opaque member 760 shown in FIG. 146 (a) is arranged so as to cover at least the rear side of the photo sensor 740 on the rear side of the base 701. The light opaque member 760 shown in FIG. 146 (b) is arranged so as to cover at least the rear side and the lower side of the photo sensor 740 on the rear side and the lower side of the base portion 701. The light opaque member 760 shown in FIG. 146 (c) is arranged so as to cover at least the rear side and the upper and lower sides of the photo sensor 740 on the rear side and the upper and lower sides of the base portion 701. By arranging such a light opaque member 760 at least behind the photo sensor 740, it may be possible to more reliably prevent the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 from entering the light receiving element 740d. The light opaque member 760 is not limited to a thin plate shape, and may be, for example, a light-shielding film coated on the rear surface of the base 701 at least behind the photo sensor 740.

Next, the effect operation of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 152. FIG. 147 shows the production and the like in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in almost time series in this order. The drawings of FIGS. 147 (a), (c) to (f), and (h) show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. The device 212, the special drawing 2 display device 214, the normal drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 are extracted and shown. FIG. 147 (b) shows that the game ball passes through the starting port 227 of the first general drawing. FIG. 147 (g) shows a state in which the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is opened to the left and right.

In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in order from the top, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area a2, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3. , The fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure holding number display area a5, and the fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal figure are arranged. Further, the left side from the center of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801. The area from the center to the right side of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is a special effect area 803 for displaying a normal figure effect display or a variable icon display.

FIG. 147 (a) shows the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 1 display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Indicates the display status. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol in which the decorative symbol moves from top to bottom is performed (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 variable game is stopped, and for example, the first missed symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214 as a stop symbol mode. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variable game is stopped is displayed. Further, the normal figure variation game is stopped, and for example, the missed symbol "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display device 210 as a stop symbol mode. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal map, a display indicating that the normal map variable game is stopped is displayed.

Three LEDs are lit on the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, indicating that the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is "3". Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold displays h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, the number “3” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a look-ahead hold display for notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 1, and for example, a character image of “grandfather” is displayed. The second and third hold displays h2 and h3 are usually hold displays, and for example, an image of a black circle is displayed.

All the LEDs of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off, and it is shown that the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is “0”. Further, it is shown that the hold display is not performed in the special figure 2 hold number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display area a3, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

All the LEDs are turned off on the normal drawing hold lamp 216, indicating that the number of normal drawing hold lamps is "0". Further, in the special effect area 803, neither the normal map effect display nor the variable icon display is performed, and the default display is performed. In the normal figure hold number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a number “0” indicating the number of hold numbers of the normal figure is displayed.

FIG. 147 (b) shows that three game balls have passed through the first normal drawing start port 227 in succession.

FIG. 147 (c) shows the first time when three game balls pass through the first normal drawing start port 227 as shown in FIG. 147 (b) during the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 147 (a). It shows the state in which the normal map fluctuation game of is started. The normal map display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols of the three ordinary diagrams shown in FIG. 128 (d) are sequentially moved from top to bottom, and a variable display of the ordinary decorative symbols is performed (in the figure). , Indicated by a downward arrow). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal map, a display indicating that the normal map variable game is being executed is displayed. Two LEDs are lit on the normal drawing hold lamp 216, indicating that the number of normal drawing hold lamps is "2". Further, in the normal figure hold number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number "2" indicating the hold number of the normal figure is displayed.

FIG. 147 (d) shows, for example, that the normal figure variable game shown in FIG. 147 (c) is completed during the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. It shows a state in which the out-of-order symbol "Fu-zu C" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal figure decoration 3 (for example, an image showing a cross mark) indicating that the result of the normal figure variable game is out of order during the normal figure stop period is stopped and displayed. Has been done. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal map, a display indicating that the normal map variable game is stopped is displayed.

FIG. 147 (e) shows a state in which the second normal-figure variable game is started during the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 147 (a). The normal map display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable display of the decorative symbol of the ordinary figure is performed in which the decorative symbol of the ordinary figure is sequentially moved from the top to the bottom. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal map, a display indicating that the normal map variable game is being executed is displayed. One LED is lit on the normal drawing hold lamp 216, indicating that the number of normal drawing hold lamps is "1". Further, in the normal figure hold number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number "1" indicating the hold number of the normal figure is displayed.

FIG. 147 (f) shows, for example, that the normal figure variable game shown in FIG. 147 (e) is completed during the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 147 (a), and the normal figure display device 210 is stopped. It shows the state in which the hit symbol "Public figure B" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the normal drawing decoration 2 (for example, an image representing a double circle) indicating that the result of the normal drawing variation game is a hit is stopped during the normal drawing stop period. It is displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal map, a display indicating that the normal map variable game is stopped is displayed. The effect image g1 at the time of winning the general drawing is displayed around the special effect area 803, which is the effect display area of the decorative pattern display device 208.

When the Fahrenheit Fahrenheit game is won as shown in FIG. 147 (f), the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is opened to the left and right as shown in FIG. 147 (g).

FIG. 147 (h) shows an example of an effect in which the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is performed in the electric chew open state shown in FIG. 147 (g). In the special production area 803, a character image of "Den" indicating that the electric chew is open is displayed, and in the balloon area indicating the vocalization of the electric chew, for example, a tutorial (game table explanation) image g2 "Opening the electric chew!" Is displayed. Has been done. As described above, in this example, the normal map effect display corresponding to the normal map variable game as shown in FIG. 147 is performed.

FIG. 148 shows the production and the like in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. The drawings of FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 show the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 126, the normal figure display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure 2 display device. 214, the normal drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 are extracted and shown.

In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in order from the top, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area a2, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3. , The fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure holding number display area a5, and the fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal figure are arranged. Further, the left side from the center of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the special figure 1 reserved number display area 801. The area from the center to the right side of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the special figure 2 reserved number display area. The central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is a special effect area 803 for displaying a normal figure effect display or a variable icon display.

FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is completed. On the special figure 1 display device 212, “special figure J” of the second off-target symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating the detachment is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 variable game is stopped, and for example, the first missed symbol "special figure I" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214 as a stop symbol mode. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variable game is stopped is displayed. Further, the normal figure variation game is stopped, and for example, the missed symbol "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display device 210 as a stop symbol mode. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal map, a display indicating that the normal map variable game is stopped is displayed. Further, in the special effect area 803, neither the normal map effect display nor the variable icon display is performed, and the default display is performed.

Three LEDs are lit on the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, indicating that the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is "3". Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold displays h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, the number “3” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first and second hold displays h1 and h2 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 are normal hold displays, and for example, an image of a black circle is displayed. The third hold display h3 is a look-ahead hold display for notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 1, and for example, a character image of "grandfather" is displayed.

All the LEDs of the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off, and it is shown that the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is “0”. Further, it is shown that the hold display is not performed in the special figure 2 hold number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display area a3, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

All the LEDs are turned off on the normal drawing hold lamp 216, indicating that the number of normal drawing hold lamps is "0". Further, in the special effect area 803, neither the normal map effect display nor the variable icon display is performed, and the default display is performed. In the normal figure hold number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a number “0” indicating the number of hold numbers of the normal figure is displayed.

FIG. 148 (b) shows the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 1 display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Indicates the display status. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol in which the decorative symbol moves from top to bottom is performed (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. Since the hold of special figure 1 is reduced by one with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, two LEDs are lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the number of holds of special figure 1 is "2". It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, two hold displays h1 and h2 are displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 2. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, the number “2” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a normal hold display, and the second hold display h2 is a look-ahead hold display for notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 1. In the special effect area 803 at the center of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable icon is displayed by a black circle image as if the digested hold has moved.

FIG. 148 (c) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after a predetermined time has elapsed in the special figure 1 variable game.

FIG. 148 (d) shows a state in which decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, respectively. ing.

In FIG. 148 (e), decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b is a decorative symbol. It shows the state of variable display.

FIG. 148 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. On the special figure 1 display device 212, “special figure J” of the second off-target symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 7" indicating the detachment is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

FIG. 148 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of the special figure 1. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 perform variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. Since the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, one LED is lit on the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, and the number of holds of the special figure 1 is "1". It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, one hold display h1 is displayed, and it is shown that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, the number “1” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a look-ahead hold display for notifying the look-ahead result of the special figure 1. In the special production area 803, an image of a black circle is displayed as if the digested hold has moved.

FIG. 148 (h) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after a predetermined time has elapsed in the special figure 1 variable game. Further, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration symbols are variablely displayed in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, respectively.

FIG. 149 shows the production and the like in the special figure 1 variable game. FIGS. 149 (a) to 149 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. Further, the state shown in FIG. 149 (a) continues from the state shown in FIG. 148 (h).

In FIG. 149 (a), the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b is the decorative symbol. It shows the normal reach state where the fluctuation display is performed.

FIG. 149 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. On the special figure 1 display device 212, “special figure J” of the second off-target symbol is stopped and displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" indicating the detachment is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed.

FIG. 149 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variable display of the special figure 1. Variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is displayed. Since the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, all the LEDs of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are turned off and the number of holds of the special figure 1 is "0". It is shown. Further, it is shown that the hold display is not displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold number of the special figure 1 is 0. Further, in the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, a number “0” indicating the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative pattern display device 208, a variable icon is displayed by an image of "grandfather" as if the digested hold has moved. Further, in the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button press suggestion display is displayed with an image imitating the chance button 136 together with the message "Press the button!". In addition, a button acceptance period display image showing a period for accepting the press of the chance button 136 is provided.

When the player presses the chance button 136 or the button reception period elapses within the remaining time shown in the button reception period display image, as shown in FIG. 149 (d), an image imitating the Hinomaru is displayed in the special figure 1 variable game. It is displayed as a preview image that announces the result of. The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

In FIG. 149 (e), the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b is performing the variable display of the decorative symbol. It shows the normal reach state.

FIG. 149 (f) shows a state in which normal reach has evolved into super reach. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the display area is used as the effect display area. In this example, a super reach image is displayed in which the samurai yells "It's a game!".

In FIG. 149 (g), the samurai wins the game and the characters "win" are displayed, and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c. Shows the state.

In FIG. 149 (h), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, which were reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, move to the center of the display area to indicate a big hit. 7 ”is enlarged to indicate the stopped display state. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, a display indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is stopped is displayed. As described above, in this example, the special figure effect display corresponding to the special figure variable game as shown in FIGS. 148 and 149 is performed.

FIG. 150 shows an example of production with the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 150A illustrates a time setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 150B illustrates an effect setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 150 (c) illustrates a volume setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 150 (d) illustrates a brightness setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player can make various settings for the pachinko machine 100 by using the screens shown in FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (d).

FIG. 150 (e) illustrates a hit display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The large screen in the center of the display area is used as the production display area, and in this example, a hit-and-middle display image in which a samurai riding a horse is moving on a mountain road is displayed. Around the display area, for example, a special jackpot image of the number "7" indicating that the jackpot is a special jackpot is displayed in the upper left corner. In addition, an image of the number of acquired balls is displayed on the upper side of the display area (in this example, "80 balls" is displayed). In addition, a round number display image is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area (in this example, "1R" is displayed). In addition, the number of big hits (number of consecutive villas) display image is displayed in the lower right corner (in this example, "number of big hits: 1" is displayed).

FIG. 150 (f) illustrates an electric support display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure variation game is performed in the electric support state, and the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c in the center of the display area. In the electric support state, it is necessary to hit right to allow many game balls to pass through the second normal figure start port 229, and to make the special figure 2 start port 232 win many game balls. For this reason, with the variable display of the decorative symbol as the background display, a large character string "Right-handed!" And the enlarged game ball in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are launched by a clockwise arrow. There is a suggestion display. In the special effect area 803, a variable icon is displayed by the image of the normal hold of the special figure 2, and further, one normal hold display h4 is displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area.

FIG. 150 (g) illustrates a demo display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the character string "Daito" is displayed. FIG. 150 (h) illustrates an error display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the door opening error screen and the plate full tank error screen are displayed.

FIG. 151 shows an example of an effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 151 (a) to 151 (j), as shown in FIG. 132, the effect movable body 224 is formed from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame defining the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of being stopped in the front plane of the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by descending.

FIG. 151 (a) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 147 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (a), the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area, special At least a part of the normal figure stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a2, the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, the special figure 2 reserved number display area a4, the normal figure reserved number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal drawing is not hidden by the effect movable body 224. Special figure 1 hold number display area a1, special figure 1 fourth symbol display area a2, special figure 2 hold number display area a3, special figure 2 fourth symbol display area a4, normal figure hold number display area a5, and general The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is set so as not to be hidden by the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

FIG. 151 (b) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 147 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (b), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area, special At least a part of the electric chew open display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 is hidden by the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 151 (c) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (c), the stop display of any of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area , The default display in the special effect area 803 is set so that at least a part of the display is hidden by the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 151 (d) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (d), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area, and the special effect The default display in the area 803 is such that at least a part is hidden by the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 151 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (e), the variation display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation icon display in the special effect area 803, and the button press suggestion display and the button reception period display image are , At least a part is hidden by the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 151 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the preview image are at least partially displayed by the effect movable body 224. Is hidden.

FIG. 151 (g) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 149 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (g), at least a part of the super reach image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the variable display of the decorative symbols of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, which are reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, is not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 151 (h) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 150 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (h), at least a part of the hit middle display image and the big hit number display image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special jackpot image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 151 (i) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 150 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (i), at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and the display screen during the electric support is hidden by the effect movable body 224. There is.

FIG. 151 (j) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 150 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (j), at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and the dish full tank error screen is hidden by the effect movable body 224. .. On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 152 shows an example of an effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (j), as shown in FIG. 133, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 132, and the movable object 703 imitating the blade is the base 701. It shows a state in which the center is rotated counterclockwise by the maximum angle with the center of rotation as the center of rotation.

In FIG. 152 (a), when the image shown in FIG. 147 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area, special At least a part of the normal figure stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a1, the special figure 1 reserved number display area a2, the special figure 2 reserved number display area a3, the special figure 2 reserved number display area a4, the normal figure reserved number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 of the normal drawing is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Special figure 1 hold number display area a1, special figure 1 fourth symbol display area a2, special figure 2 hold number display area a3, special figure 2 fourth symbol display area a4, normal figure hold number display area a5, and normal The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is set so as not to be hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

FIG. 152 (b) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 147 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (b), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area, special At least a part of the electric chew open display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 152 (c) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (c), the stop display of the decorative symbol of any of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area The default display in the special effect area 803 is such that at least a part is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 152 (d) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (d), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 and the special figure 2 hold number display area, and the special effect The default display in the region 803 is such that at least a part is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 152 (e) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (e), the variation display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation icon display in the special effect area 803, and the button press suggestion display and the button reception period display image are , At least a part is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 152 (f) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (f), the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the preview image are the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the preview image. At least part of it is hidden by the movable object 703.

FIG. 152 (g) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 149 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (g), at least a part of the super reach image is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the variable display of the decorative symbols of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, which is reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

FIG. 152 (h) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 150 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (h), at least a part of the hit middle display image and the big hit number display image is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special jackpot image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

In FIG. 152 (i), when the image shown in FIG. 150 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (i), the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and the display screen during electric support are at least one by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. I try to hide the part.

FIG. 152 (j) shows that when the image shown in FIG. 150 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is displayed as the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the movable body 224. Indicates a hidden state. In the example shown in FIG. 152 (j), the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and the dish full tank error screen are at least partially displayed by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. Is hidden. On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 152.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
A game console (for example, a pachinko machine 100) equipped with a plurality of production means.
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, an effect movable body 224).
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The first effect means is capable of at least performing a moving operation.
The second effect means is capable of at least performing a light emitting operation.
At least a part of the first effect means is a photo sensor (for example, a photo sensor 740).
At least a part of the photosensor is a light emitting means (for example, a light emitting element 740c).
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light receiving means (for example, a light receiving element 740d).
The photo sensor is at least movable in association with the moving operation of the first effect means.
At least a part of the first effect means is a light shielding means (for example, a wall portion 740b of the photo sensor 740).
The shading means is at least movable in association with the moving operation of the first effect means.
In the first state, the light-shielding means is located between the second effect means and the light-receiving means (for example, behind the light-receiving element 740d).
The first state is a state in which the position of the first effect means is the first position.
The first position is a position (for example, a position in the front plane of the display screen) in which at least a part of the light emitted by the second effect means is irradiated toward the first effect means. ,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the light-shielding means is located between the photo sensor of the first effect means capable of performing the moving operation at least and the second effect means as the display means, the photo sensor However, it is possible to perform a stable production without erroneous detection by the light of the second production means, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.
(2) In the pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a third effect means (for example, a movable object 703).
The first effect means has at least the third effect means, and the first effect means has at least the third effect means.
The third effect means is movable in association with the movement operation of the first effect means.
The third effect means is capable of at least performing a moving operation.
The photosensor can at least change into a plurality of sensor states.
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a first sensor state in which the light receiving means can receive light from the light emitting means.
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving means cannot receive light from the light emitting means.
The photo sensor is capable of changing at least one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state in the second state.
The photosensor is capable of at least changing to the other sensor state of the first sensor state and the second sensor state in the third state.
The second state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is the second position.
The third state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is not the second position.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the third effect means that moves by the move operation of the first effect means can further execute the move operation, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.
(3) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second effect means is capable of at least displaying (for example, displaying a decorative pattern, various effects, etc.).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100, by hiding the display, the player can be made to pay attention to the moving operation of the first effect means, and the interest of the game may be improved.
(4) In the pachinko machine 100,
The second effect means has a plurality of displays (for example, decorative symbol, blank symbol, hold icon, variable icon, special figure hold number display, normal figure hold number display, special figure 4th symbol, normal figure 4th symbol, At least one of the notice display, the look-ahead notice display, etc.) can be displayed, and at least one of the plurality of displays is the first display.
The first effect means can cover at least a part of the first display (for example, a decorative pattern, a notice display, a look-ahead notice display, etc.) from the front in the first period.
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko machine 100, by hiding the first display, the player can pay attention to the moving operation of the first effect means, and the interest of the game may be improved.
(5) In the pachinko machine 100,
The game console is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature of a movable body.

Further, not limited to the above embodiment, a light-shielding plate (for example, a light-shielding piece 750c) that can be moved at least at a position between the light-emitting means and the light-receiving means is provided, and the light-reflecting plate has the first reflectance. It has at least a first region, and the first effect means has at least a second region where the light reflectance is the second reflectance, and the first reflectance is the second reflection. It may be lower than the rate (it is difficult to reflect light).

Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed toward the light receiving means may be different from the direction in which the light from the second effecting means is directed forward. Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed toward the light receiving means may be the direction opposite to the direction in which the light from the second effecting means is directed forward. Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed toward the light receiving means may be a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the light from the second effecting means is directed forward. Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed toward the light receiving means may be the same as the direction in which the light from the second effecting means is directed forward.

Further, at least a part of the photo sensor may be a light shielding means. Further, the light-shielding means may be provided in the first effect means separately from the photo sensor. Further, the light-shielding means may at least cover the rear of the photosensor. Further, the shading means may cover at least the rear side of the photo sensor. Further, the shading means may at least cover the lower part of the photo sensor. Further, the shading means may at least cover the upper part of the photo sensor. Further, the light-shielding means may at least cover the side of the photo sensor. Further, the light-shielding means may cover at least the rear side of the front-back, left-right, up-down, and one or more directions of the photosensor. Further, the shading means may be located at least behind and below the photo sensor. That is, when a photo sensor is mounted on a conventional pachinko machine, the game ball that reflects light always flows down the game area in the pachinko machine, so that the path of light reaching the light receiving portion of the photo sensor cannot be specified. However, it may be possible to prevent erroneous detection by covering the rear and the lower side of the photo sensor with the light from the display device and the light from the rolling game ball, respectively. In addition, by not covering more than necessary (covering only two directions of front, back, left, right, up and down), it may be possible to measure the weight of the first effect means to reduce power consumption and cost during movement. .. Further, the light-shielding means may be a part of a member constituting the photo sensor. Further, the light-shielding means may be a part of a member provided with the light-emitting means. Further, the light-shielding means may be a part of a member provided with the light-receiving means.

Further, at least one of the plurality of displays may be a second display. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the movement operation period. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the first display and at least a part of the second display from the front.

Further, the third effect means may be capable of executing the movement operation to a position that covers at least a part of the second effect means from the front. Further, the third effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the movement operation period. Further, the third effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Further, the third effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the first display and at least a part of the second display from the front.

Further, the second effect means may be capable of displaying the first display and the second display at the same time. In addition, each of the plurality of displays may be a display indicating game information (hereinafter, referred to as "display indicating a plurality of game information"). In addition, the display indicating a plurality of game information or the plurality of game information includes a decorative symbol, a blank symbol, a hold icon, a variable icon, a special figure hold number display, a normal figure hold number display, a special figure 4th symbol, and a normal figure 4th. Design, notice display, look-ahead notice display, tutorial display, special figure effect display, general figure effect display, background display, button press suggestion display, variation display, pseudo variation display, stop display, reach display, super reach display, jackpot display, Missing display, jackpot medium effect display, jackpot round number display, count number display for each round, acquired ball number display, jackpot consecutive villa number display, probability change effect display, time saving medium effect display, launch direction suggestion display, look-ahead mode display , Periodic (for example, every hour) periodic effect display, demo screen display, volume setting display, light amount setting display, effect information setting display, player information setting display, error display, at least one of them It may include. Further, the first display may be displayed in a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed in the entire display area. Further, the second display may be displayed in a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed in the entire display area. Further, at least one of the plurality of directing means may be a fourth directing means.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and can be modified in various ways.

For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. The items described in the above detailed description, particularly the items described in the examples and modifications, can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of the game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to the slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG. 153.

The game console according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 1002 having a plurality of types of symbols and being rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel" shown in FIG. 153. Based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the stop button 1006 for stopping the rotation of the reels individually, the lottery means for determining the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of combinations by lottery (winning combination internal lottery), and the lottery result of the lottery means. The combination of the reel stop control means (reel stop control process) that controls the stop related to the stop of the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. A determination means (winning determination processing) for determining whether or not the combination of symbols is determined in advance, and a game in which a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning aspect is paid out when the stopping mode of the symbols is a predetermined winning aspect. In addition to the payout control means (medal payout process 1008) that performs the medium payout process, the effect means 1010 that executes the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means, and this effect means puts a ball in a predetermined game area 1012. The launching device 1014 to launch, the winning opening 1016 configured to allow the ball launched from the launching device to enter, the detecting means 1018 to detect the ball entering the winning opening 1016, and the detecting means 1018 detect the ball. The payout means 1020 that pays out the ball in the case of the above, the variable display device 1022 that displays a predetermined symbol (identification information) in a variable manner, and the shutter 1024 that can be moved to a position that shields the variable display device 1022, operate in a predetermined operation mode. The movable body 1026 is provided, and when a game ball enters the winning opening and wins a prize, the variable display device 1022 changes the symbol and then stops and displays it to produce a game. It is also suitable for the slot machine 1000 ".

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
It is a game table equipped with multiple production means,
At least one of the plurality of directing means is the first directing means.
At least one of the plurality of directing means is a second directing means,
The first effect means is capable of at least performing a moving operation.
The second effect means is capable of at least performing a light emitting operation.
At least a part of the first directing means is a photo sensor,
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light emitting means and
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light receiving means and
The photo sensor is at least movable in association with the moving operation of the first effect means.
At least a part of the first directing means is a shading means.
The shading means is at least movable in association with the moving operation of the first effect means.
In the first state, the light-shielding means is located between the second effect means and the light-receiving means.
The first state is a state in which the position of the first effect means is the first position.
The first position is a position where at least a part of the light emitted by the second effect means is irradiated toward the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
At least one of the plurality of directing means is a third directing means.
The first effect means has at least the third effect means, and the first effect means has at least the third effect means.
The third effect means is movable in association with the movement operation of the first effect means.
The third effect means is capable of at least performing a moving operation.
The photosensor can at least change into a plurality of sensor states.
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a first sensor state in which the light receiving means can receive light from the light emitting means.
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving means cannot receive light from the light emitting means.
The photo sensor is capable of changing at least one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state in the second state.
The photosensor is capable of at least changing to the other sensor state of the first sensor state and the second sensor state in the third state.
The second state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is the second position.
The third state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means with respect to the first effect means is not the second position.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
The game console described in Appendix 1 or 2.
The second directing means is at least feasible to display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The game console described in Appendix 3,
The second effect means is capable of executing at least one of a plurality of displays.
At least one of the plurality of indications is the first indication.
The first effect means can cover at least a part of the first display from the front in the first period.
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 4.
The game console is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Moreover, the above-described embodiment is summarized as follows.

(1) A game table equipped with a plurality of production means
At least one of the plurality of directing means is the first directing means.
At least one of the plurality of directing means is a second directing means,
At least one of the plurality of directing means is a third directing means.
The first effect means is a means capable of at least performing a moving operation.
The second effect means is an image display means, and is
The third effect means is a means capable of at least performing a moving operation.
The first effect means is a means provided with at least a photo sensor.
The first effect means is a means provided with at least the third effect means.
The photo sensor is a sensor configured to include at least a light emitting unit.
The photo sensor is a sensor configured to include at least a light receiving unit.
The photo sensor can detect a light-shielding piece and
The shading piece is a shading piece that at least moves with the moving operation of the third effect means.
The shading piece is a shading piece located between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion when the third effect means is in the first state.
The shading piece is a shading piece that is not located between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion when the third effect means is in the second state.
The image display means is a means capable of displaying an image toward the front side.
The first effect means is a means provided on the front side of the image display means.
The light emitting unit is a light emitting unit provided on the front side of the light receiving unit.
The light emitting unit is a light emitting unit facing the light receiving unit.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, even if the light emitted from the image display means leaks to the photosensor due to a mistake in assembling the parts or deterioration over time, the light receiving portion is directed to the front side, so that the light is received by the light receiving portion. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of problems that occur.

(2) The first state is a state in which the light receiving unit cannot receive light from the light emitting unit.
The second state is a state in which the light receiving unit can receive light from the light emitting unit.
It is characterized by that.

(3) The image display means is at least a means capable of displaying an image.
It is characterized by that.

(4) The image display means is a means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of image displays.
At least one of the plurality of image displays is the first image display.
The first effect means is a means capable of covering at least a part of the first image display from the front in the first period.
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
It is characterized by that.

(5) The game console is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
It is characterized by that.

Moreover, the above-described embodiment is summarized as follows.

(1) A game table equipped with a plurality of production means
At least one of the plurality of directing means is the first directing means.
At least one of the plurality of directing means is a second directing means,
At least one of the plurality of directing means is a third directing means.
The first effect means is a means capable of at least performing a moving operation.
The second effect means is an image display means, and is
The image display means is a means capable of at least performing a light emitting operation.
The third effect means is a means capable of at least performing a moving operation.
The first effect means is a means provided with at least a photo sensor.
The first effect means is a means provided with at least the third effect means.
The photo sensor is a sensor configured to include at least a light emitting unit.
The photo sensor is a sensor configured to include at least a light receiving unit.
The photo sensor can detect a light-shielding piece and
The shading piece is a shading piece that at least moves with the moving operation of the third effect means.
The shading piece is a shading piece located between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion when the third effect means is in the first state.
The shading piece is a shading piece that is not located between the light receiving portion and the light emitting portion when the third effect means is in the second state.
The first state is a state in which the light receiving unit cannot receive light from the light emitting unit.
The second state is a state in which the light receiving unit can receive light from the light emitting unit.
The image display means is a means capable of displaying an image toward the front.
The first effect means is a means provided in front of the image display means.
The light emitting unit is a light emitting unit provided in front of the light receiving unit.
The light emitting unit is a light emitting unit facing the light receiving unit.
At least a part of the first directing means is a shading means.
The shading means is at least a means that can be moved in association with the moving operation of the first effect means.
The light-shielding means is characterized in that, in the first state, the light-shielding means is located between the image display means and the light-receiving portion.

(2) The image display means is a means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of image displays.
At least one of the plurality of image displays is the first image display.
The first effect means is a means capable of covering at least a part of the first image display from the front in the first period.
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
It is characterized by that.

(3) The game console is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
It is characterized by that.

<Embodiment D>
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 154. Note that FIG. 154 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage plate, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface thereof. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island equipment or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop.

The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

The door 108 with a ball storage plate is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and to be opened and closed. The door 108 with a ball storage plate is an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. , The lower plate 128 that stores the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, the ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, and the player's A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by operation, and a game board that guides the game balls to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 by the operation of the player, a chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136, and a game store. A ball lending operation button 140 that gives an instruction to lend a ball to the installed card unit (CR unit), a return operation button 142 that gives an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a player's balance and a card. It is provided with a ball rental display unit 144 that displays the state of the unit. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

<Game board>
Next, the game board 200 will be described with reference to FIG. 155. Note that FIG. 155 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124, and a plurality of types of accessory units 950 (see FIG. 170) are arranged around the decorative symbol display device 208. The details of the accessory unit 950 will be described later.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various displays used for the decorative design and the effect, and in this embodiment, it is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In this example, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, but it may be configured so as to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. Other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro Liquid Crystal) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

Further, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage 244 is arranged in a rollable area of the game ball. In the stage 244, a game ball or the like that is out of the game area 124 can be temporarily rolled. Further, a wall portion 200a3, which will be described later, is erected behind the stage 244, and a game ball rolling on the stage 244 falls from the stage 244 by colliding with the wall portion 200a3 and is in front of the stage 244. It is guided to the game area 124.

Although not shown, the game board 200 includes a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, a normal symbol may be referred to as a "normal symbol" and a special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

The general drawing display device 210 (not shown) is a display device for displaying a general drawing, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 (not shown) are display devices for displaying special figures, and are composed of 7-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of normal figure variable games (for example, 2) It is possible to hold up to one). The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special drawing holding lamp 220 (not shown) are lamps for indicating the number of holding special figure variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the special figure holding lamp 220 is specified. Figure It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of variable games. The high-probability medium lamp 222 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state. Turns on when changing from a probability state to a high probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, the game board 200 has a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a first variable. A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are arranged.

In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (If a prize is won), the payout device is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning a prize may be referred to as a "prize ball", and a ball to be lent to a player may be referred to as a "rental ball". Then, it is called a "ball (game ball)".

The normal drawing start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the front surface of the game board 200 is formed. One is arranged on the right side of the view. The ball that has passed through the starting port 228 is not discharged to the game island side, unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal drawing variation game by the normal drawing display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one starting port 230 for the first special figure is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects the entry of balls into the first special figure start port 230, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure start port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in this embodiment, only one is arranged directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special drawing start port 232 is provided with a blade member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the 210 hits and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the start port 232 of the second special figure, the payout device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. , The special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure start port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, they are arranged at the lower right of the front view of the game board 200, respectively. The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are provided with a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the door member is closed. When the display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol, the door member opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are used as prize balls. Discharge to dish 126. The balls that have entered the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, a disk-shaped hitting direction changing member 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails (not shown) are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204. An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning openings or starting openings to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the hammer 146. And the launching mallet 148 passes the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 and launches them into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail, or the like, and the winning openings (general winning opening 226, first variable winning opening 234, second). Variable winning opening 235) or starting opening (1st special drawing starting port 230, 2nd special drawing starting opening 232), without winning any winning opening or starting opening, or general drawing starting opening 228 The out port 240 is reached only by passing through.

FIG. 156 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 with the back cover attached from the back (back), and FIG. 157 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 with the back cover removed from the back (back). It is a schematic front view.

As shown in FIG. 156, a back surface cover 241 made of a transparent plate-shaped member is arranged on the back surface of the game board 200. The back surface cover 241 is rotatably attached to the game board 200 via hinge portions 242 arranged at two locations on the left side when viewed from the rear surface. Further, at the end of the back cover 241 opposite to the hinge portion 242, lock portions 243 for fixing the back cover 241 to the back surface of the game board 200 are arranged at two upper and lower positions.

Below the back cover 241 is a main control board case 244 capable of accommodating a control board (hereinafter, also referred to as a main control board or a main control board) constituting the main control unit 300 described later. Further, as shown in FIG. 157, a control board (hereinafter, a sub control board or a sub) constituting the first sub control unit 400, which will be described later, is located above the main control board case 244 and at a position covered by the back cover 241. The sub-control board case 245 that can accommodate the control board (also referred to as a control board) and the liquid crystal control board case 246 that can accommodate the control board (hereinafter, also referred to as a liquid crystal control board) constituting the second sub-control unit 500 described later. It is arranged.

The sub-control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 are covered with the back cover 241. However, since the back cover 241 of this example is a transparent plate-shaped member, the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 The state of various electronic components housed in these substrate cases 245 and 246 can be visually recognized from the back surface (rear surface) side through the back surface cover 241.

FIG. 158 (a) is a schematic front view showing the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 extracted, and FIG. 158 (b) is a side along the line AA in the figure (a). It is a cross-sectional view.

The liquid crystal control board case 246 houses the above-mentioned liquid crystal control board 246a and a relay board 246b for electrically relaying the liquid crystal control board 246a and another control board. Further, the sub-control board case 245 contains the above-mentioned sub-control board 245a.

As shown in FIG. 158 (b), when the side surface on the right side side view of the sub control board case 245 and the liquid crystal control board case 246 is used as the reference surface, the liquid crystal control board 246a and the sub control board are arranged in order from the reference surface. The 245a and the relay board 246b are arranged in this order. In other words, the sub-control board 245a is arranged at a position farther from the reference surface than the liquid crystal control board 246a and closer to the reference surface than the relay board 246b, and the liquid crystal control board is arranged from the side view. It is located between 246a and the relay board 246b.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 159. Note that FIG. 159 shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted. It is mainly composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, and data temporarily. It is equipped with a RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. .. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 has a random number value generation circuit 318 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits). ) And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a clock sensor and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example. A drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the normal figure display device 210. , A drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of various status display units 328 (for example, the clock holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, the second special figure holding lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the like is connected.

The random number value generation circuit 318 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of random number generation in the random number value generation circuit 318: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number, and derive the operation result as a random number. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number. The random number value generation circuit 318 acquires irregular values by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number value generation circuit 318 is used when the value thus acquired is used as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. ..

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won the first special figure start port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. The random number value generation circuit 318 that received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure start port 230, and the latched value is built in the random number value generation circuit 318. It is stored in the random number value storage register corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the timing of the random number value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 is also the same. The value in the above is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure start port 232 built in the random number value generation circuit 318.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 issues commands to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that signals can be transmitted, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and a CPU 404. It is equipped with a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, and the like. The ROM 406 in which is stored is connected.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the sensor 120 (and an amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, a chance button lamp 138), and a cloaking device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a cloaking device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the cloaking device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, a cloaking device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor. The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404, and the like are read out, and the work area of the VRAM 436 is used to generate a display image for decoration. A VDP434 (video display processor) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208 is connected to the symbol display device 208.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program, data, and an image display for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500. A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the accessory unit 950, various sensors 424 for detecting the current position of the accessory unit 950, and detection signals from the various sensors 424 are used as basic circuits. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs to 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game board frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542. , A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540. In this example, the accessory unit 950 is driven and controlled by the second sub-control unit 500, but it is configured to be driven and controlled by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400). May be good.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout is completed, and communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device by another power supply path.

<Type of design>
Next, using FIGS. 160A to 160C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawings and general drawings to be used will be explained. FIG. 160A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure.

The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first special figure start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232. 2 The variable game is started on condition that the second start port sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment, "variable display of special figure 2". conduct.

These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol according to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of No. 2 (which also corresponds to the fluctuation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of the "variation display of the special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, or after the start of the "variation display of the special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2 is displayed. The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, and hereinafter, the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the start of this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2". The series of displays up to is called the symbol fluctuation stop display.

As will be described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed a plurality of times in succession. In FIG. 3A, 10 types of special figures from "special figure A" to "special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display. In the figure (a), the white part in the figure shows the location of the segment that is turned off, and the black part shows the location of the segment that is turned on.

"Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit is determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, the time is shortened. The time saving will be described in detail later, but the state of transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state, and the state of not shifting to the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "special figure A" is in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and the 15R jackpot symbol "special figure B" is in the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. These "special figure A" and "special figure B" are symbols in which the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively large amount of profit.

"Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure C" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called a sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, the difference is that "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure B" which is 15R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Both "Special Figure E" and "Special Figure F" are 2R and do not shift to the time saving state.

"Special figure G" is the first small hit symbol, and "special figure H" is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit without 2R time reduction. That is, the "special figure G" and "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", but the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure" is intentionally displayed. By providing "G", "Special Figure H" and "Special Figure F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

Further, "Special Figure I" is the first out-of-line symbol, and "Special Figure J" is the second out-of-line symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "Special Figure A" is also prepared as a 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

FIG. 160 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". The first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, or On condition that the second starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special symbol starting port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208. In each symbol display area of area 208c, "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3"-> ... "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> ... is displayed in this order. Perform "variable display of decorative pattern" to switch. Then, in the case of notifying the 15R jackpot of "special figure B", a symbol combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") in which three same decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R jackpot are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") 1 ”and“ Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”, etc.) are stopped and displayed. When notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", a combination of three patterns of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" "Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the 2R jackpot called "Hidden Probability Change" of "Special Figure E", the sudden 2R jackpot called "Special Figure F", or the first small hit of "Special Figure G", "Special Figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying the 2R jackpot called "special figure C" sudden change or the 2R jackpot called "special figure D" sudden time reduction, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is used. Stop display.

On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of the "special figure I" and the second deviation of the "special figure J", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in the figure (b) are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 3C shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are two types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: a hit symbol "Public figure A" and a missed symbol "Public figure B". Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "variable display of general map". Then, "Fu-zu A" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the Furu-zu fluctuating game, and "Fu-zu B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the deviation of the Furu-zu fluctuating game. Also in this figure (c), the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 161. Note that FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

In step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation of and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, the WDT 314 is set to a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, etc.) A process for outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is initialized). ) Proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a clerk of a game store is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. Then, if the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302 to the initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is used. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a register having a 1-byte structure whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example). It is determined whether or not it is 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal).

Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 is read at the time of power interruption, and the stack pointer is reset (this setting). Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, reset to each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the same as the power recovery command in the step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. 1 It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, there are two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter, the normal figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer. Update the two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the normal figure timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 162. Note that FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and the WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the main control unit timer.

In step S205, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately in ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal recording area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. (Information indicating that), the general winning opening 226, the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special drawing starting port 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232 are entered. It is determined that the ball has entered or the normal drawing start port 228 has passed.

That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228 have been awarded. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the subsequent general winning is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no detection signal last time, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next to determine whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 and step S209, the basic random number initial value update process and the basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random number value and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number value, and the general figure is used. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set it in the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for this purpose. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211 the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210 and the time for displaying the symbol on the first special symbol display 212 is timed. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for counting the time for changing / stopping the symbol on the second special symbol display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time , Update various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S215, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, and 228, the number of winning balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

Further, in step S217, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, it is determined whether or not the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232, the normal figure start port 228, and the variable winning port 234 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When the first special figure start port 230 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value storage of the random number value generation circuit 318 corresponding to the first special figure start port 230. The value is acquired from the register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 1 winning random number value, and the value is acquired from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation. The processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

When the second special figure start port 232 is won and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the random number value counter corresponding to the first special figure start port 230 of the random number value generation circuit 318. The value is acquired from the value storage register, and the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as the special figure 2 winning random number value, and the value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number counter for generating the random number value. Then, the processed value (for example, the acquired value + the value of the R register + 1) is acquired as a special figure 2 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area.

In step S219, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, it indicates that the data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (a variable game of the normal map).

Further, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in the mode, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the out-of-line symbol. Controls the lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LED.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal drawing stop display is in progress is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the hit symbol (normal symbol A shown in FIG. 160 (c)) and the off symbol (normal symbol B shown in FIG. 160 (c)). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this normal figure hit flag is on, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 The blade member 232a is open to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) while setting the normal drawing operation in the setting area. In addition to outputting the signal held in the RAM 308, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332 of the above, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. do. Further, if the result of the normal-figure variable game is out of order, the non-normal-figure flag is turned on, as will be described later. When this out-of-normal flag is on, even in the normal-figure state update process at the end of the predetermined stop display period described above (the timing when the value of the normal-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). Set the setting area of the RAM 308 to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the normal figure variable game and the open / closed control of the second special figure start port 232 are not performed (the state of the normal figure is not operating), and the normal figure variable game is held. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the normal figure variation game is won or not won by the random number lottery based on the normal figure winning random number value stored in the above-mentioned random number value storage area. If the winning is determined, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In case of unsuccessful, set the hit flag to off.

Further, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the above-mentioned normal figure timer random value is then acquired as the normal figure timer random value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired normal figure timer random value. One of the time for variable display of the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved normal figure variable games is stored in the normal figure reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and each time a hit determination is made, the number of reserved normal figure variable games is calculated. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this reserved number storage area. Also, the random value used for the hit judgment is deleted.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special figure 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs on / off drive control that repeats turning off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a general drawing Probability fluctuation flags Each flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation. When the flag is on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 160 (a) are on, the special figure probability change flag is off, and the normal figure probability change flag is on. Is the special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the normal figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure. Special figure F when the probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure F when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is also off, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, and special figure H when the second small hit flag is on. , The 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 so as to be in the special figure I when the first missed flag is on and in the special figure I when the second missed flag is on. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress.

By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time saving symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small hit symbol (special symbol G), second small hit symbol (special symbol H), first missed symbol (special symbol) Confirmation display of any one of I) and the second outlier symbol (special symbol J) is performed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information is present is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as described later. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 2 in operation in the setting area, the player waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player to start the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235 (until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234). In 332), a signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing the door member of the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, and the door closing time provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set the information indicating the closure period in the storage area of the management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process which repeats the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and starts at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds). That is, the effect waiting period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period during which the image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished is displayed. Set the information indicating. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time reduction number of times 100 times is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player because the time from the end of the jackpot in the special figure variable game to the start of the next jackpot is shortened. When this time saving flag is set to on, it is in a high probability state. In the high-probability state of the normal figure, there is a higher possibility of hitting the variable game of the normal figure than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special-figure variable game are shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state. Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of games will be played in the variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game, and many games will be played in the second special figure starting opening 232 until the game ball enters the jackpot. This is to solve the problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases due to the ball entering the ball and the gambling property increases.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is different, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is replaced with "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special figure start port 232. However, the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special figure start port 230 is notified with priority.

In step S233, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol fluctuation start command, symbol fluctuation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the above-mentioned command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the special figure The value of the probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of jackpot rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the first special figure start port 230 has won a prize, whether or not the second special figure start port 232 has won a prize, the first variable winning port 234, or , Whether or not there is a prize in the second variable winning opening 235.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R jackpot flag and the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related, which are stored in the RAM 308 in the command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned prize-winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, which is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the prize-winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, and the like are set. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the reserved first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game Set information indicating the number and so on. Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S235, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. , When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special drawing start port 232, the first variable winning opening 234, or the second variable winning opening 235, or via the display circuits 324, 326, and 330. The display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and then the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit described above.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 163. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 3D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S311, when the press of the chance button is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button. In step S313, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S319, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random value value update process, and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process of step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S601, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 406 to VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step S611, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 164. Note that FIG. 3A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 3C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 6A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. In step S709, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the accessory unit 950, this command is output to the drive circuit 516 and the process returns to step S703.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

<Direction device>
Next, the effect device included in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200.

The game board 200 of this example is a game of a plate-shaped member that partitions a rear unit 200a in which an effect device is arranged, a front unit 200c that forms the above-mentioned game area 124, and the rear unit 200a and the front unit 200c. It is composed of three units of the plate 200b. Then, the game board 200b is attached to the front surface of the rear unit 200a, and the front unit 200c is further attached to the front surface of the game board 200b, whereby the three units of the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c are attached. Together form the game board 200. The material of the game board 200b is not particularly limited, and may be a transparent resin or wood.

On the right side of the game board 200b when viewed from the front, a through hole 200b1 for a gate, which is a long hole through which a part of a normal starting port (gate) 228 arranged in the front unit 200c can penetrate, and a through hole 200b1 for the gate are provided. A notch portion 200b2, which serves as a mark for specifying the position of the above, is formed. Further, on the right side of the rear unit 200a when viewed from the front, a notch portion 200a1 for a gate is formed so as to be able to touch (access) a part of the normal drawing start port (gate) 228 arranged in the front unit 200c. Has been done.

FIGS. 166 (a) and 166 (b) are partially enlarged views showing the vicinity of the starting port (gate) 228 of the game board 200 in an enlarged manner. In a state where the rear unit 200a, the game board 200b, and the front unit 200c are integrated, the rear end portion of the normal starting port (gate) 228 arranged in the front unit 200c is the game board 200b. It is configured to penetrate the gate through hole 200b1 and reach the inside space of the gate notch 200a1 of the rear unit 200a.

A clerk of a game store or the like can easily and quickly identify the location of the starting port (gate) 228 in the normal drawing by using the notch 200b2 of the game board 200b as a mark, and also constitutes the game board 200. Without disassembling the unit, it is possible to replace the normal drawing start port (gate) 228 or visually check the normal drawing start port (gate) 228 through the gate notch 200a1 of the rear unit 200a. can. For this reason, maintenance work such as replacement and repair of the Fuzu start port (gate) 228 becomes easier than before, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there is any fraudulent activity against the Fuzu start port (gate) 228. It may be possible to prevent it in advance.

<Game ball storage section>
Next, the game ball storage unit provided in the rear unit 200a will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169. Note that FIG. 167 is a schematic rear view of the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed from the rear side, and FIG. 168 shows the rear unit 200a with the accessory unit 950 removed from the rear side. FIG. 169 is a partially enlarged view showing the periphery of the game ball storage portion in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, a rear unit opening 200a2 is formed in the center of the rear unit 200a so that the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit 200a can be visually recognized. .. Further, a center accessory 900 is arranged above the rear unit opening 200a2 in the horizontal direction of the rear unit 200a, and a center accessory opening 900a in the shape of the outline of the character's face is formed in the center thereof. ing. Although the details will be described later, the face of the character applied to the cover means 718 of the falling deployable accessory 712 arranged behind the center accessory 900 can be visually recognized from the center accessory opening 900a.

Below the rear unit opening 200a2, a wall portion 200a3 made of a transparent plate-shaped member and a decorative portion 200a4 formed in a concavo-convex shape are arranged. Further, below the decorative portion 200a4, a horizontally long dish-shaped game ball storage portion 200a5 is arranged from the vicinity of the left end to the right end of the rear unit opening 200a2. As shown in FIG. 168, the game ball storage unit 200a5 is a portion capable of temporarily storing the game ball EB1.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 169, the game ball storage unit 200a5 of this example has a second storage unit 200a8 having a width capable of accommodating a maximum of two game balls in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a. The first storage unit 200a7 and the second storage unit 200a7, which are communicated with the second storage unit 200a8 and have a width capable of accommodating a maximum of one game ball in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the rear unit 200a. A guide portion 200a6 having an inclined surface that inclines downward toward 200a8 is provided. Since the guide portion 200a6 has an inclined surface, it is possible to guide the game ball that has passed over the wall portion 200a3 and the like and has fallen behind the rear unit 200a to the second storage portion 200a8.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167, below the game ball storage unit 200a5, a plurality of connectors 200a9 to which a harness for electrically connecting the accessory unit 950 and the rear unit 200a can be attached, and a game A plurality of game ball passages 200a11 for guiding the game ball out of the area 124 to the lower plate or the like are arranged. The game ball storage unit 200a5 of this example also functions as a portion for preventing the game ball that has fallen behind the rear unit 200a after overcoming the wall portion 200a3 and the like from coming into contact with the connector 200a9.

By providing such a game ball storage unit 200a5, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the electric system is short-circuited or the connector 200a9 is damaged due to the game ball coming into contact with the connector 200a9, and stable game control can be achieved. You may be able to do it.

Further, in this example, a gap having a width of one game ball or more is formed between the wall portion 200a3 and the decorative portion 200a4, and this gap is formed in the wall portion 200a3 or the like as shown in FIG. 168. It functions as a second game ball storage unit 200a10 capable of temporarily storing the game ball EB2 that has overcome the above and has fallen behind the rear unit 200a.

<Character unit>
Next, the accessory unit 950 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950.

The accessory unit 950 is a unit attached to the back surface of the rear unit 200a. In this example, the fall deployment accessory unit 700, the ascending accessory unit 750, the launch accessory unit 800, and the V forming accessory unit 850. Consists of. In this example, the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 are composed of one unit.

<Character unit / Falling deployment character unit>
171 to 173 are exploded perspective views of the falling deployable accessory unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 171, the fall deployment accessory unit 700 mainly includes a front-view U-shaped base 702 and a pair of upper left lower drive units arranged on the front left side and the front right side of the base 702. A pair of 704, a right vertical drive unit 706, an unlocking unit 708 arranged on the back side of the base 702, and a relay board 710 for electrically connecting the drop deploying accessory unit 700 and another board. It is composed of a drop deploying accessory 712 (see FIG. 173) that can be slid in the vertical direction by the upper left lower drive unit 704 and the right upper and lower drive unit 706.

<Character unit / Fall deployment accessory unit / Left (right) vertical drive unit>
As shown in FIG. 171, the left vertical drive unit 704 includes a cylindrical drive base 704a fixed to the base 702 with screws, a left drive motor 704b attached to the upper portion of the drive base 704a, and the drive motor 704b. It is configured to have a drive gear 704c fixed to a drive shaft and a plurality of gears 704d for transmitting the power of the drive gear 704c.

Further, as shown in FIG. 172, the upper left lower drive unit 704 is fitted to the base 702 and slid vertically along the base 702, and the slider 704e is fixed to the slider 704e and the falling deploying accessory 712. It is configured to have an accessory support portion 704f for supporting the counterclockwise rotary motor base 712e1 and a gear portion 704g fixed to the slider 704e.

The gear portion 704g is arranged so as to mesh with one of the plurality of gears 704d, and by operating the left drive motor 704b to rotationally drive the gear 704d, the gear portion 704g, the accessory support portion 704f, and the slider 704e are integrated. It is configured to slide in the vertical direction. The right upper and lower drive unit 706 has the same structure as the upper left lower drive unit 704, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172.

Both ends of the fall deployment accessory 712, which will be described later, are supported by the accessory support portion 704f of the upper left lower drive unit 704 and the accessory support portion 706f of the right upper and lower drive unit 706, and the left drive motor 704b and the right drive are supported. By operating the motor 706b, it can slide in the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the operation of sliding the falling deploying accessory 712 in the vertical direction may be referred to as "up and down operation of the falling deploying accessory 712".

<Character unit / Falling deployment character unit / Unlocking unit>
As shown in FIG. 171, the unlocking portion 708 engages with the solenoid 708a driven by the drive circuit 516 shown in FIG. 159, the shaft portion 708b slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 708a, and the shaft portion 708b. A movable portion 708c that is slid vertically together with the shaft portion 708b, a rotating portion 708d that is rotated in conjunction with the vertical movement of the movable portion 708c, and a direction indicated by reference numeral A by the rotating portion 708d. It is configured to have a slidable claw portion 708e.

The claw portion 708e of the unlocking portion 708 is slidably arranged inside and outside the through hole 702a formed in the base 702. When the solenoid 708a is operated to allow the claw portion 708e to enter the through hole 702a, the base 702 is in a state in which the downward slide is blocked (locked), and the fall deploying accessory 712 is in a stopped state.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 708a is operated to move the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the base 702 is allowed to slide downward (unlocked), and the falling deployable accessory 712 slides downward by its own weight. do. In the above-mentioned "up and down movement of the falling deployable accessory 712", in addition to the downward slide due to the operation of the left drive motor 704b and the right drive motor 706b, the downward slide due to the own weight of the fall deployable accessory 712 is also included. included.

<Character unit / Fall deployment character unit / Fall deployment character>
As shown in FIG. 173, the falling deployable accessory 712 includes a long plate-shaped fourth structure 712a supported at both ends by the accessory support portions 704f and 706f shown in FIG. 172, and the fourth structure 712a. A long plate-shaped first structure 712b rotatably attached to the front side of the structure, a pair of left and right third structures 712c rotatably arranged on the fourth structure 712a, and a first structure. A pair of left and right second structures 712d rotatably arranged in the structure 712b of the above, a left rotation drive unit 712e for rotationally driving the left side of the first structure 712b in front view, and a first structure. It has a right-handed rotation drive unit 712f for rotationally driving the right side of the structure 712b in front view, and a plate-shaped covering means 718 (see FIG. 174) arranged on the front side of the first structure 712b. It is composed of.

The left rotation drive unit 712e is for decorating the left rotation motor base 712e1 fixed to the accessory support portion 704f shown in FIG. 172, the left rotation motor 712e2 attached to the left rotation motor base 712e1, and the left motor base 712e1. The left rotation motor base decorative portion 712e3, the gear 712e4 for transmitting the power of the left rotation motor 712e2, and the gear 712e4 are rotatable and fixed to the left side surface of the first structure 712b in the front view. It is composed of a rotating arm 712e5.

The right rotation drive unit 712f has almost the same structure as the left rotation drive unit 712e, and is as shown in FIG. 173. The rotation arm 712f5 is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 712f51, and the position of the detection piece 712f51 is set. It differs from the counterclockwise rotation drive unit 712e in that it includes a detectable sensor 712f6. By providing the detection piece 712f51 and the sensor 712f6, the clockwise rotation drive unit 712f can detect whether or not the first structure 712b is located at the initial position (position shown in FIG. 183 (a)). It is possible.

In the fall deployment accessory 712, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2, the rotary arm 712e5 rotates via the gear 712e4, and the left side of the front view of the first structure 712b to which the rotary arm 712e5 is fixed is the front. It is configured to rotate (tilt) to the side. Further, by operating the right rotation motor 712f2, the rotary arm 712f5 rotates via the gear 712f4, and the right side of the first structure 712b to which the rotary arm 712f5 is fixed rotates (tilts) to the front side. ) Is configured to.

Therefore, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2 and the right rotation motor 712f2 at the same time, it is possible to rotate (tilt) the first structure 712b toward the front side (direction away from the fourth structure 712a). Hereinafter, the operation of rotating (tilting) the first structure 712b of the falling deploying accessory 712 to the front side may be referred to as "rotating operation of the falling deploying accessory 712".

A base portion 712g is fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b, and a gear 712h and an arm portion 712k having external teeth meshing with the gear 712h are rotatably arranged on the base portion 712g. Will be done. On the other hand, an engaging portion 712m that can be engaged with the arm portion 712k is fixed to the fourth structure 712a.

When the first structure 712b returns to the initial position shown in FIG. 183 (a), the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side becomes the engaging portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a side. By engaging, the first structure 712b is held in its initial position. On the other hand, when the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side, the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the engaging portion 712m on the fourth structure 712a side are engaged. It will be released.

As shown in FIG. 174, the cover means 718 is fixed to a slider 721 that can slide up and down with respect to the first structure 712b. The slider 721 is engaged with the arm portion 712k on the side of the first structure 712b and is urged downward by the spring 722. When the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 is released, the slider urged by the spring 722. The 721 is configured to push down the cover means 718. Although the cover means 718 of this example is provided with a character's face, other characters, characters, identification information (for example, model name) and the like may be applied.

Returning to FIG. 173, the base portion 712g is provided with a magnet 712n for magnetically attracting the iron metal pieces 712c7 arranged in the pair of third structures 712c, and the first structure. When the 712b is tilted toward you by about 180 °, the pair of third structures 712c is held by the base portion 712g by the magnetic force.

Further, a pair of magnets 712b1 are arranged at both ends of the first structure 712b, and the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 correspond to a pair of magnets 712b1. Iron metal pieces 712e7 and 712f7 are arranged at the positions where they are formed. As a result, the first structure 712b that has returned to the initial position is attracted to the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 by the magnetic force, and is configured to hold the initial position.

Further, the third structure 712c on the left side of the front view can be rotated by the support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface of the fourth structure 712a on the left side of the front view and the support portion 712c1 via the support shaft 712c2. It is composed of an arm portion 712c3 to be arranged, an upper left half body portion 712c4 fixed to the arm portion 712c3, a hat portion 712c5 fixed to the upper left half body portion 712c4, and a school emblem portion 712c6.

Further, the third structure 712c on the right side of the front view can be rotated by the support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface of the fourth structure 712a on the right side of the front view and the support portion 712c1 via the support shaft 712c2. It is composed of an arm portion 712c3 to be arranged, an upper right half body portion 712c4 fixed to the arm portion 712c3, a hat portion 712c5 fixed to the upper right half body portion 712c4, and a school emblem portion 712c6.

Further, the second structure 712d on the left side in the front view can be rotated by the support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the left side in the front view of the first structure 712b and the support portion 712d1 via the support shaft 712d2. It is configured to have an arm portion 712d3 to be arranged, a left lower body portion 712d4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. NS.

As shown in FIG. 174, the second structure 712d on the right side of the front view has a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface of the first structure 712b on the right side of the front view, and the support portion 712d1 via a support shaft 712d2. The arm portion 712d3 rotatably arranged, the lower right lower body portion 712b4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and the connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structure 712c. Consists of having.

In the fall deployment accessory 712, the upper left half body part 712c4, the hat part 712c5, and the school emblem part 712c6 included in the third structure 712c on the left side of the front view, and the upper right half body part 712c4 included in the third structure 712c on the right side of the front view. , Hat portion 712c5, and school emblem portion 712c6, left lower body portion 712d4 provided by the second structure 712d on the left side of the front view, and right lower body portion 712d4 provided by the second structure 712d on the right side of the front view. It is configured to form a character.

<Character unit / Falling deployment accessory unit / Falling deployment accessory light emitting means>
FIG. 174 (a) is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the first structure 712b extracted, and FIG. 174 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the fourth structure 712a extracted. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 175 is a schematic front view showing the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the fourth structure 712a.

A light emitting substrate 714 provided with a plurality of second light emitting means 714a (LED in this example) is attached to the front side of the first structure 712b, and the plurality of second light emitting means 714a are used to attach the light emitting substrate 714. It is possible to output light to the front side of the first structure 712b through the cover means 718 arranged in front. Further, a light emitting substrate 716 provided with a plurality of first light emitting means 716a (LED in this example) is attached to the back side of the fourth structure 712a, and these plurality of first light emitting means 716a are attached. Therefore, it is possible to output light to the front side of the fourth structure 712a through the fourth structure 712a arranged in front.

As shown in FIG. 175, a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a and the first sub-control unit 400 can be connected to the light emitting substrate 716 of the fourth structure 712a. The second connector CN2 to which a harness for electrically connecting the connector CN1, the fourth structure 712a and the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b can be connected, the fourth structure 712a and the left A third connector CN3 to which a harness for electrically connecting the rotary motor 712e2 can be connected, and a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure 712a to the right rotary motor 712f2 and the sensor 712f6 can be connected. A fourth connector CN4 is provided.

<Character unit / Ascending character unit>
FIG. 176 is an exploded perspective view of the ascending accessory unit 750. As shown in FIG. 176, the ascending accessory unit 750 mainly includes a base 752, a drive unit 754 arranged on the left side of the base 752 in front view, a first ascending accessory 756, and a second ascending accessory unit 756. It is composed of the accessory 758.

The drive unit 754 includes a drive base 754a fixed to the base 752 with a screw, a drive motor 754b attached to the drive base 754a, a drive gear 754c fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 754b, and the drive gear 754c. A plurality of gears 754d for transmitting power, a sensor 754e capable of detecting the position of a detection piece 754d1 provided on one of the plurality of gears 754d, and one gear of the plurality of gears 754d. It is configured to have a cam 754f that meshes with.

The first ascending accessory 756 includes a first ascending accessory base 756a and an arm portion 756b that can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise with the left side of the first ascending accessory base 756a as a fulcrum. A first ascending accessory slider 756c that can slide in the vertical direction in conjunction with the rotation of the arm portion 756b, and a first ascending accessory slider 756c attached to the first ascending accessory slider 756c that represents the appearance of rock. It is configured to have an accessory decoration unit 756d.

The arm portion 756b is engaged with the front convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754d of the drive portion 754, and rotates clockwise or counterclockwise by rotating the cam 754d. Further, the first ascending accessory slider 756c and the first ascending accessory decorative portion 756d are raised when the arm portion 756b is rotated counterclockwise, and are lowered when the arm portion 756b is rotated clockwise.

The second ascending accessory 758 includes a second ascending accessory base 758a, a second ascending accessory slider 758b that can slide up and down with respect to the second ascending accessory base 758a, and the second ascending accessory base 758b. A second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c attached to the ascending accessory slider 758b, which represents the appearance of the rock, an unlocking portion 758d capable of preventing the second ascending accessory slider 758b from descending, and a cover. It is configured to include a part 758e.

The second ascending accessory slider 758b is arranged at a position where it can engage with the first ascending accessory slider 756c, and the first ascending accessory slider 756c rises by a predetermined amount to cause the first ascent. It is configured to rise in conjunction with the accessory slider 756c (details will be described later).

The unlocking portion 758d includes a solenoid 758d1, a shaft portion 758d2 that is slid in the longitudinal direction by the solenoid 758d1, and a claw portion 758d3 that is engaged with the shaft portion 758d2 and slidable in the direction indicated by reference numeral B. It is composed of.

Although the details will be described later, when the solenoid 758d1 is operated to extend the claw portion 758d3, the lowering of the second ascending accessory slider 758b is blocked (locked) and fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b. The second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c is held in the ascending position. On the other hand, when the solenoid 758d1 is operated to retract the claw portion 758d3, the lowering of the second ascending accessory slider 758b is allowed (unlocked), and the second ascending accessory slider 758b is fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b. The second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c slides downward due to its own weight.

<Character unit / Launch character unit>
FIG. 177 is an exploded perspective view of the launch accessory unit 800, and FIG. 178 is an enlarged perspective view of the relay board 806 included in the launch accessory unit 800.

As shown in FIG. 177, the launch accessory unit 800 is mainly provided with a plate-shaped rear unit 802, a launch mechanism unit 804 disposed below the rear unit 802, and a rear unit 802 on the right side of the front view. A spacer for forming a movable space of a relay board 806 arranged in the vicinity of the game ball passage 802a, a protective film 808 attached to the surface of the relay board 806, and a small piece accessory 804d composed of a plurality of small pieces. It is composed of an 810 and a plate-shaped front unit 812 that covers the front surface of the spacer 810.

The launch mechanism unit 804 raises and lowers a slider 804a provided at a position capable of engaging with the rear convex portion of the cam 754f of the ascending accessory unit 750, a spring 804b for urging the slider 804a upward, and a slider 804a. It has a guide portion 804c for guiding in the direction, a small piece accessory 804d arranged above the slider 804a in a free state, and a pair of guide rails 804e for guiding the small piece accessory 804d in the direction of the slider 804a. It is composed of.

As shown enlarged in FIG. 178, a protective film 808 is attached to the front surface of the relay board 806 except for the connector and the like. The relay board 806 is arranged in the game ball passage 802a of the rear unit 802. In this example, by attaching the protective film 808 to the front surface of the relay board 806, the game passes through the game ball passage 802a. It is configured so that the ball does not come into contact with the relay board 806 (so that the game ball passing through the game ball passage 802a and the relay board 806 are insulated). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the relay board 806 is short-circuited in the electric system or the relay board 806 is damaged, and it may be possible to perform stable game control.

<Character unit / V-forming accessory unit>
FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the V forming accessory unit 850. As shown in FIG. 179, the V-forming accessory unit 850 includes a V-forming accessory left unit 852 arranged on the left side of the front view of the pachinko machine 100 and a V-forming accessory unit 852 arranged on the right side of the front view of the pachinko machine 100. It is composed of the accessory right unit 854. Since the V-forming accessory left unit 852 and the V-forming accessory right unit 854 have a symmetrical structure, detailed description of the V-forming accessory right unit 854 will be omitted below.

The V-forming accessory left unit 852 includes a V-forming accessory left base 852a, a drive unit 852b disposed at the lower end of the V-forming accessory left base 852a, and a left link portion rotatable by the drive unit 852b. The 852c, the decorative portion 852d fixed to the V-forming accessory left base 852a, the left light emitting substrate 852e disposed above the V-forming accessory left base 852a, and the V-forming left movable attached to the left link portion 852c. It is configured to include a portion 852f, a V-forming left decorative portion 852g attached to the V-forming left movable portion 852f, and a left light guide slope 852h attached to the left light emitting substrate 852e.

The drive unit 852b includes a drive motor 852b1 attached to the V-forming accessory left base 852a, a drive gear 852b2 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 852b1, and a cam 852b3 rotated by the drive gear 852b2. Consists of having.

The V-forming left movable portion 852f of the V-forming accessory left unit 852 can be rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle with the upper end as a fulcrum by driving the driving portion 852b, and the V-forming accessory right unit 854 can be rotated. The V-forming right movable portion 854f can be rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with the upper end portion as a fulcrum by driving the driving portion 854b. Therefore, by driving the drive unit 852b and the drive 854d at the same time, a V-shaped front view is formed by the V-forming left movable portion 852f and the V-forming right movable portion 854f.

FIG. 180 is an external perspective view of the right light guide plate 854h of the V forming accessory right unit 854 as viewed from the rear side. Ejector pin marks 854h1 formed at the time of molding remain in two places above the right light guide plate 854h. The ejector pin mark 854h1 is a recess that is inevitably formed during molding of the right light guide plate 854h, and the thickness of the portion including the ejector pin mark 854h1 is thinner than the thickness of the portion without the ejector pin mark 854h1. ..

In this example, as shown in FIG. 179, the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the right light emitting substrate 854e of the V forming accessory right unit 854 is arranged so as to face the ejector pin mark 854h1. With such a structure, it may be possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) and enhance the effect of the effect.

<Character unit / Center character unit>
FIG. 181 is a front view of the center accessory unit 900, and FIG. 182 is a rear view of the center accessory unit 900.

The center accessory 900 includes a decorative portion 902 arranged on the upper part of the game board 200 and a light emitting substrate 904 arranged on the back side of the decorative portion 902. The decorative portion 902 of this example includes a plurality of first portions 902a (see FIG. 182) radially arranged around the center accessory opening 900a at predetermined intervals, and the inner side of the first portion 902a. It has a second portion 902b (see FIG. 181) that is arranged in and forms the outer edge of the center accessory opening 900a.

The first portion 902a is a portion made of a transparent or translucent member capable of transmitting light, and in this example, a part of the plurality of first portions 902a is a light emitting substrate 904 of the center accessory 900. Light output from the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the light emitting means (LED in this example) and light output from the light emitting means (LED in this example) mounted on the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712b described above. Both are transparent. On the other hand, the second portion 902b is a portion made of an opaque member that cannot transmit light.

<Operation of falling deployment accessory>
Next, the operation of the drop deploying accessory 712 will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 187. As described above, the drop deploying accessory 712 can perform a vertical operation of sliding in the vertical direction and a rotational operation of rotating the first structure 712b forward.

<Movement of falling deployment accessory / vertical movement>
FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the vertical movement of the fall deployable accessory unit 712 by extracting only the fall deployable accessory unit 700, and FIG. 184 shows the fall of the fall deployable accessory unit 700 in a state of being installed on the game board 200. It is a figure which showed the up-and-down movement of a deploying accessory 712.

183 (a) and 184 (a) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the falling deployable accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the vertical movement. The initial position in the vertical movement is a position where the entire falling deploying accessory 712 overlaps (overlaps) the center accessory 900 above the game board 200.

In this initial position, a part of the decoration (in this example, the character's face) applied to the front of the cover means 718 of the falling deployable accessory 712 is visually recognized from the front through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. It becomes possible, and an integrated effect is provided by the center accessory 900 and the fall deployment accessory 712. Further, the initial position is a position where the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 does not overlap (do not overlap) with the falling deployable accessory 712, and the decorative symbol display device is viewed from the front. All of the 208 display areas are visible.

183 (b) and 184 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the falling deployable accessory 712 is located at an intermediate position in the vertical movement. When the falling deployable accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the vertical movement, when the solenoid 708a (see FIG. 171) is operated to move the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the base 702 slides downward. Is allowed (unlocked), and the falling deploying accessory 712 slides downward due to its own weight and reaches the intermediate position.

The intermediate position in the vertical movement is a position where the falling deployable accessory 712 at the initial position is lowered and a part of the fall deployable accessory 712 overlaps (overlaps) with the center accessory 900. At this intermediate position, a part of the decoration provided on the front surface of the cover means 718 of the falling deployable accessory 712 is visible through the center accessory opening 900a of the center accessory 900. Further, the intermediate position is a position where the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) the falling deployable accessory 712, and the decorative symbol is displayed from the front. The upper part of the display area of the device 208 becomes invisible, but most of the display area is visible.

183 (c) and 184 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the falling deployable accessory 712 is located at the maximum moving position in the vertical movement. The maximum moving position in the vertical movement is a position where the falling deployable accessory 712 at the intermediate position is further lowered and a part of the fall deployable accessory 712 does not overlap (do not overlap) with the center accessory 900. Further, the maximum moving position is a position where the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 arranged behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) the falling deploying accessory 712, and is decorated from the front. Most of the display area of the symbol display device 208 becomes invisible.

<Movement / rotation of falling deployment accessory>
FIG. 185 is a diagram showing the rotation operation of the fall deployment accessory 712 by extracting only the fall deployment accessory unit 700, and FIGS. 186 and 187 are the fall deployment accessory units installed on the game board 200. It is a figure which showed the rotational operation of the falling deployment accessory 712 in 700.

FIGS. 185 (a) and 186 (a) show a front view when the first structure 712b of the falling deployable accessory 712 is rotated by 45 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 0 ° to 45 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d linked to the rotation of the first structure 712b form the first structure 712b. The two left and right third structures 712c, which rotate in directions close to each other as fulcrums and are interlocked with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712d, approach each other with the fourth structure 712a as a fulcrum. Rotate in the direction.

Further, when the first structure 712b starts to rotate from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structure 712b side and the slider 721 (see FIG. 174) is released, the slider 721 pushes down the covering means 718. Therefore, the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount and is tilted toward the front by about 45 °, but the decoration provided on the cover means 718 is visible from the front.

185 (b) and 186 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the falling deployable accessory 712 is rotated 90 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 45 ° to 90 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d linked to the rotation of the first structure 712b are the first structure 712b. The two third structures 712c on the left and right, which rotate in a direction closer to the front side than the state rotated by 45 ° and are interlocked with the rotation of the two second structures 712d on the left and right, are the first. The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the front side than the state in which the structure 712b is rotated by 45 °.

Further, the cover means 718 is tilted by about 90 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a arranged in the fourth structure 712a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

Since the cover means 718 has a structure that slides downward by a predetermined amount in conjunction with the rotation of the first structure 712b, the cover means 718 is tilted toward the front by about 90 °. Even if there is, the amount of protrusion of the cover means 718 toward the front side can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game board 200 from becoming thicker than necessary, and it may be possible to prevent the cover means 718 from coming into contact with other members.

FIGS. 185 (c) and 187 (a) show a front view when the first structure 712b of the falling deployable accessory 712 is rotated 135 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 90 ° to 135 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d linked to the rotation of the first structure 712b are the first structure 712b. The two third structures 712c on the left and right, which rotate in a direction closer to the front side than the state rotated by 90 ° and are interlocked with the rotation of the two second structures 712d on the left and right, are the first. The structure 712b rotates in a direction closer to the front side than the state in which the structure 712b is rotated by 90 °.

Further, the cover means 718 is tilted by about 135 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a arranged in the fourth structure 712a ( In this example, the LED) is visible from the front.

185 (d) and 187 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the first structure 712b of the falling deployable accessory 712 is rotated 180 ° toward the front side in the rotation operation. In the process in which the first structure 712b rotates from 135 ° to 180 ° toward the front side, the two left and right second structures 712d linked to the rotation of the first structure 712b are the first structure 712b. By rotating in a direction closer to the front side than by rotating 135 °, they come into contact with each other, and the two third structures on the left and right are linked to the rotation of the two second structures 712d on the left and right. The structure 712c is brought into contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to the first structure 712b than in a state in which the first structure 712b is rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

In addition, the two left and right second structures 712d and the two left and right third structures 712c are also in contact with each other, and the character is formed by the two left and right second structures 712d and the left and right two third structures 712c. Will be done. The cover means 718 is tilted by about 180 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the bar means 718 is invisible from the front, and the light emitting means 716a (main) arranged in the fourth structure 712a. In the example, a part of the LED) is also covered by the two left and right second structures 712d and the left and right two third structures 712c, so that it cannot be seen from the front.

<Operation of ascending accessory unit and launching accessory unit>
FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 by extracting only the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800, and FIG. 189 is a diagram showing the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800, and FIG. 189 is installed on the game board 200. It is a figure which showed the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 in the state.

188 (a) and 189 (a) show front views of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800 in the initial positions, and FIGS. 188 (b) and 189 (a). b) shows the front view of the process in which the ascending accessory unit 750 is activated and the first ascending accessory decorative portion 756d and the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c are ascending.

When the cam 754f is rotated clockwise by the operation of the drive motor 754b, the cam 754f is pushed up by the front convex portion 754f1 and the arm portion 756b is rotated counterclockwise. When the arm portion 756b rotates counterclockwise, the first ascending accessory slider 756c engaged with the arm portion 756b slides upward and is fixed to the first ascending accessory slider 756c. 756d of the ascending accessory decoration part rises.

Further, when the first ascending accessory slider 756c slides upward by a predetermined amount, the engaging portion 756c1 of the first ascending accessory slider 756c becomes the engaging portion 758b1 of the second ascending accessory slider 758b. Engage. As a result, the second ascending accessory slider 758b slides upward together with the first ascending accessory slider 756c, and the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b To rise.

FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (c) show a front view showing a state in which the first ascending accessory decorative portion 756d and the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c are raised to the maximum height. When the sensor 754e (see FIG. 176) detects that the cam 754f has further rotated clockwise from the position shown in FIG. 188 (b) and rotated to the position shown in FIG. 188 (c), the solenoid 758d1 is activated. , The claw portion 758d3 extends toward the second ascending accessory slider 758b. When the claw portion 758d3 is extended, the second ascending accessory slider 758b cannot slide downward, the lowering of the second ascending accessory slider 758b is blocked (locked), and the second ascending accessory slider 758b is blocked. The second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c fixed to the object slider 758b is held at the maximum height shown in FIG. 188 (c).

188 (d) and 189 (d) show a front view of the launching accessory unit 800 in an activated state. The cam 754f further rotates counterclockwise from the position shown in FIG. 188 (c), and the engagement between the front convex portion 754f1 of the cam 754f and the arm portion 756b is released. As a result, the first ascending accessory slider 756c that engages with the arm portion 756b slides downward, and the first ascending accessory decorative portion 756d fixed to the first ascending accessory slider 756c slides downward. An effect of sliding to (an effect of expressing that a part of the ascending accessory unit 750 showing the appearance of the rock is destroyed and sunk downward) is executed.

On the other hand, the lowering of the second ascending accessory slider 758b remains blocked (locked) by the extended claw portion 758d3, so that the second ascending accessory slider 758b is fixed to the second ascending accessory slider 758b. The decoration portion 758c remains held in the raised position.

Further, when the engagement between the rear convex portion of the cam 754f and the slider 804a (see FIG. 177) of the launching accessory unit 800 is released by the rotation of the cam 754f, the slider 804a urged by the spring 804b is moved up. An effect of sliding in the direction and launching the small piece accessory 804d vigorously upward (an effect of expressing that a part of the ascending accessory unit 750 showing the appearance of the rock is scattered) is executed.

Further, at the timings shown in FIGS. 188 (d) and 189 (d), in addition to the effect of the ascending accessory unit 750 and the launching accessory unit 800, the falling deploying accessory 712 is displayed in FIGS. 183 (a) and 184. After the effect of sliding downward from the initial position shown in (a) to the maximum moving position shown in FIGS. 183 (c) and 184 (c) is executed, the rotating operation of the falling deploying accessory 712 (shown in FIG. 185). The production by the rotation operation) is executed.

<Game ball passage>
In this example, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), the ascending accessory unit 750 is provided with the first game ball passage 750a and the second game ball passage 750b through which the game ball can pass, and at the same time, the first game ball passage 750b is provided. Below one game ball passage 750a, an inclined surface 750c that inclines downward toward the front is formed. The inclined surface 750c plays a role of guiding the game ball that has passed through the first game ball passage 750a to the lower side of the game board 200. In the case of the enclosed gaming machine, the gaming balls that have passed through the first gaming ball passage 750a and the second gaming ball passage 750b may be guided to the circulation path.

<Game ball storage unit and ascending accessory unit>
FIG. 190 (a) is a side sectional view of the game board 200 in a state where the ascending accessory unit 750 is located at the initial position, and FIG. 190 (b) is a state in which the ascending accessory unit 750 is operating. It is a side sectional view of the game board 200 of.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to this example includes two game ball storage units, a game ball storage unit 200a5 and a second game ball storage unit 200a10. However, as shown in FIG. 190 (a), the game balls that have passed over the wall portion 200a3 of the game board 200 and fallen behind the pachinko machine 100 are stored in any of the game ball storage units 200a5 and 200a10. Instead, it may reach above the ascending accessory unit 750 located at the initial position and come into contact with the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c.

In such a case, the pachinko machine 100 according to this example moves the game ball in contact with the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c with the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750. From the region, it can be led to the front game ball storage unit 200a5. Therefore, the operation of the ascending accessory unit 750 is not hindered by the game ball, and a failure of the ascending accessory unit 750 may be prevented in advance.

<Operation of V forming accessory unit>
FIG. 191 is a diagram showing the operation of the V-forming accessory unit 850 by extracting only the V-forming accessory unit 850, and FIG. 192 is an operation of the V-forming accessory unit 850 in a state of being installed on the game board 200. It is a figure which showed.

191 (a) and 192 (a) show front views when the V forming accessory unit 850 is located at the initial position, and FIGS. 191 (b) and 192 (b) show V. The front view in the case where the forming accessory unit 850 is operated and is located at an intermediate position is shown.

When the drive motor 852b1 of the V-forming accessory left unit 852 is driven, the V-forming left movable portion 852f rotates counterclockwise via the left link portion 852c to drive the drive motor 854b1 of the V-forming accessory right unit 854. Then, the V-forming right movable portion 854f rotates clockwise via the right link portion 854c. As a result, the V-forming left movable portion 852f and the V-forming right movable portion 854f are brought closer to each other than the initial position.

19 (c) and 192 (c) show a front view when the V-forming accessory unit 850 is operated and is located at the maximum moving position. When the V-formed left movable portion 852f and the V-formed right movable portion 854f rotate to the maximum moving position, they are in a state closer to each other than the intermediate position, and are viewed from the front by the V-formed left movable portion 852f and the V-formed right movable portion 854f. A V-shape is formed.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a big hit is confirmed), the V-forming accessory unit 850 is operated by the V-forming left movable portion 852f and the V-forming right movable portion 854f. By forming a V-shape when viewed from the front, it is configured to suggest to the player that a predetermined condition is satisfied.

As described above, the game console according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 154 and the slot machine (not shown)) is a game provided with the effect means (for example, the falling deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 173). As a stand, the effect means is a means having a first structure (for example, the first structure 712b shown in FIG. 173), and the effect means is a second structure (for example, FIG. 173). 712d), the first structure is a structure capable of deploying effect operation, and the second structure moves according to the deploying effect operation. The first structure is to be moved from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 183 (a)) to the fourth position (for example, FIG. 185 (d)) by the unfolding effect operation. It is a structure that can be moved from the initial position to the position rotated 180 ° toward the front side as shown in FIG. A structure that can be moved from the initial position shown in (1) to the fifth position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 185 (d)), and the first structure (for example, the first structure) at the first position. The body 712b) is a structure located in front of the second structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the second position, and as shown in FIG. 185 (d), the first structure. The first structure at the four positions (eg, the first structure 712b) is located behind the second structure at the fifth position (eg, the second structure 712d). The front part of the effecting means, which is a structure and the first structure is located at the fourth position, is from the front part of the effecting means where the first structure is located at the first position. It is a game table characterized by being located in front of.

According to the game console according to this example, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while having a simple structure, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to perform a novel effect in which the effect means approaches the player side by the unfolding effect operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 183, the first structure at the first position (for example, the first structure 712b) is the second structure at the second position (for example, the second structure). The structure may be a structure that covers at least a part of the structure 712d) from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (d), the second structure at the fifth position (for example, the second structure 712d) is the first structure at the fourth position (for example,). , The first structure 712b) may be a structure that covers at least a part from the front.

Further, the effect means is a means having a first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a shown in FIG. 174 (b)), and as shown in FIG. 185 (a), the first position. The first structure may be a structure that covers at least a part of the first light emitting means from the front. Further, as shown in FIGS. 185 (a) to 185 (d), the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a) is the first structure (for example, the first structure). 712b) becomes visible to the player during movement from the first position (eg, the position shown in FIG. 185 (a)) to the fourth position (eg, the position shown in FIG. 185 (d)). It may be a means.

Further, as shown in FIG. 185 (d), the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b) at the fourth position is the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means). It may be a structure that does not cover 716a) from the front. Further, the effect means is a means having a third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 173), and the third structure is the first structure (for example, the first structure). It may be a structure that moves according to the movement of one structure 712b). Further, the third structure is a structure that can be moved from the third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 183 (a)) to the sixth position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 185 (d)). It may be.

Further, at least a part of the second end portion (for example, the upper end portion) of the second structure (for example, the second structure 712d shown in FIG. 185 (d)) at the fifth position is described above. It is in contact with at least a part of the third end portion (for example, the lower end portion) of the third structure (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 185 (d)) at the sixth position. May be good.

Further, the third structure at the sixth position (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 185 (d)) is the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a). It may be a structure that covers at least a part from the front. Further, the third structure at the sixth position (for example, the third structure 712c shown in FIG. 185 (d)) is the first light emitting means (for example, the first light emitting means 716a). It may be a structure that partially covers a part from the front.

Further, the effect means is a means having a second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 174 (a)), and the second light emitting means has the first structure. It may be a means capable of emitting light when it is located at the first position. Further, as shown in FIG. 174, the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a) is a means provided in the first structure (for example, the first structure 712b). You may.

Further, the effect means is a means having a cover means (for example, the cover means 718 shown in FIG. 174 (a)), and for example, as shown in FIG. 174, the cover means is the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means (for example). For example, it is a means for covering the second light emitting means 714a), and for example, as shown in FIGS. 185 (a) to (d), the covering means is the first of the first structure. It may be a means capable of changing the relative position with the second light emitting means during the movement from the position to the fourth position.

Further, the effect means is a means having a third light emitting means (for example, a light emitting means (LED) provided on the back side of the light emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 174 (a)), and the third light emitting means. May be a means capable of emitting light when the first structure is located at the fourth position. Further, the third light emitting means may be a means provided in the first structure. Further, the effect means is a means having a light emitting substrate (for example, the light emitting substrate 714 shown in FIG. 174 (a)), and the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a) is the light emitting substrate. The third light emitting means may be a means provided on the second surface of the light emitting substrate.

Further, the frontmost portion (the most forward protruding portion) of the effect means (for example, the falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. 185 (d)) in which the first structure is located at the fourth position is described. The first structure may be located in front of the foremost portion of the effect means (for example, the falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. 183) located at the first position.

Further, the first structure may be a rotatable structure. Further, the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155) may be provided, and the effect means may be a means that can be moved in front of the display means. Further, the first structure may be a structure that can rotate about an axis parallel to the display means (for example, an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155). ..

Further, the effect means may be a means having a second light emitting substrate, and the first light emitting means may be a means provided on the second light emitting substrate. Further, the effect control means is provided, and the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate that relays the effect control means and the light emitting substrate. Further, the effect means may be a means having a driving means, and the driving means may be a means for moving the first structure.

Further, the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate that relays the effect control means and the drive means. Further, the effect means may be a means having a detection means, and the detection means may be a means for detecting the first structure located at the first position. Further, the second light emitting substrate may be a substrate that relays the effect control means and the detection means.

Further, the second light emitting board is a board having a first connector, the first connector is connected to the first harness, and the first harness is the drive means and the detection. Connected to the means, the first harness may be a bifurcated harness.

Further, the effect means is a means having a fourth structure, and the fourth structure may be a structure having the second light emitting substrate. Further, one of the first structure and the fourth structure is a structure having a first magnet, and the other of the first structure and the fourth structure is. , A structure having a first magnetic body or a second magnet, and the first magnetic body or the second magnet is attracted to the first magnet to form the first structure. The first position may be maintained.

Further, the first magnetic material or the second magnet may be attracted to the first magnet via non-magnetism. Further, one of the first structure and the third structure is a structure having a third magnet, and the other of the first structure and the third structure is. , A structure having a second magnetic material or a fourth magnet, and the third structure is formed by attracting the second magnetic material or the fourth magnet to the third magnet. The sixth position may be maintained.

Further, the second magnetic material or the fourth magnet may be attracted to the third magnet via the non-magnetic material. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or three or more of the drive means. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or three or more of the detection means. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or three or more of the second structures. Further, the effect means may be a means having two or three or more of the third structures. Further, the first structure may have a first image display means capable of displaying an image at the first position. Further, the first structure may have a second image display means capable of displaying an image at the fourth position.

Further, the gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 154 and the slot machine (not shown)) has a first drive means (for example, a drive motor 754b shown in FIG. 176) and a second drive means. (For example, the solenoid 758d1 shown in FIG. 176), the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 176), and the second effect means (for example, the ascending accessory unit 750). It is a game table provided with a first ascending accessory decorative portion 756d) of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 176, and the first effect means is driven by the first driving means. (For example, the operation of raising the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c shown in FIGS. 188 (a) to (c)) is a means capable of carrying out the above-mentioned operation (for example, the second effect means is described above. It is a means capable of executing the second operation (for example, the operation of raising the first ascending solenoid decorative portion 756d shown in FIGS. 188 (a) to (c)) by driving the first driving means. The first operation by the first effect means is executed during the second operation by the second effect means, and the first effect means is driven by the second drive means. The gaming table is characterized in that it is a means capable of performing three operations (for example, an operation of operating the solenoid 758d1 to lower the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c).

According to the game console according to this example, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while having a simple structure, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the first operation may be an operation different from the third operation. Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 188 (a) to 188 (c), in the first operation, the first production means is in the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 188 (a)). ) To the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 188 (c)). Further, in the third operation, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c) moves to the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 188 (a)). It may be an operation.

In the second operation, the second effect means moves from the third position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 188 (a)) to the fourth position (for example, the maximum height shown in FIG. 188 (c)). It may be an operation of moving to the position). Further, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decoration portion 758c) is in contact (engagement) with the second effect means (for example, the first ascending accessory decoration portion 756d). It may be a means capable of carrying out the first operation.

Further, the first effect means (for example, the second ascending accessory decorative portion 758c) is blocked (locked) from being lowered by the claw portion 758d3 shown in the fifth position (for example, FIG. 188 (d)). The fifth position is the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 188 (a)) and the second position (for example, FIG. 188). It may be a position between (the position of the maximum height shown in (c)).

Further, the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 188 (c)) is a position higher than the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 188 (a)). The first effect means has a claw shown in the fifth position (for example, FIG. 188 (d)) from the second position (for example, the position of the maximum height shown in FIG. 188 (c)) by its own weight. It may be a means capable of moving to a position (position where the descent is blocked (locked) by the portion 758d3). Further, the first effect means is a position where the lowering is blocked (locked) by the claw portion 758d3 shown in the fifth position (for example, FIG. 188 (d)) by driving the second driving means. ) May be a means that can be moved from the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 188 (a)).

Further, the first driving means may be a motor or a solenoid. Further, the second driving means may be a motor or a solenoid. Further, the third effect means may be provided, and the third effect means may be a means capable of executing the fourth operation by driving the first drive means. Further, the fourth effect means may be provided, and the fourth effect means may be a means capable of executing the fifth operation by driving the first drive means. Further, the first effect means may have at least one of a light emitting means, a display means, and another driving means. Further, the second effect means may have at least one of a light emitting means, a display means, and another driving means.

Further, the gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 154 or the slot machine (not shown)) discharges the gaming ball that has entered the stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 155) to the outside of the gaming table. (For example, the arm portion 756b shown in FIG. 188 (b), the first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 188 (c), and the second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 188 (c)). It is a game table characterized in that it is provided with a movable body for effect (for example, the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 188) provided with the above.

According to the game table according to this example, there is a case where unnecessary game balls can be discharged to the outside of the game table at the same time as providing the effect.

Further, the movable body for effect may be a movable body located behind the stage. Further, the movable body for effect is a movable body having an arm portion (for example, the arm portion 756b shown in FIG. 190), and for example, as shown in FIGS. 188 (a) to 188 (c), the arm portion. Is an arm portion whose angle can be changed by the operation of the movable body for effect, and the arm portion may be an arm portion capable of discharging a game ball by changing the angle. Further, it may be provided with a first ball passage means (for example, the first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 188 (c)) through which the game ball discharged by the operation of the movable body for effect can pass.

Further, the first ball passage means (for example, the first game ball passage 750a shown in FIG. 188 (c)) is on one side in the left-right direction of the movable body for production (for example, the front surface of the ascending accessory unit 750). It may be the means provided on the left side of the view). Further, it is provided with a second ball passage means (for example, the second game ball passage 750b shown in FIG. 188 (c)) through which the game ball discharged by the operation of the movable body for production can pass. May be good. Further, the second ball passage means may be a means provided on the other side of the movable body in the left-right direction (for example, the right side of the ascending accessory unit 750 in the front view). Further, the second ball passage means may be a means provided with a substrate (for example, the relay board 806 shown in FIG. 177 or FIG. 178), and the substrate may be an insulating means (for example, FIG. 177 or FIG. It may be a means for providing the protective film 808) shown in FIG. 178.

Further, the gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 154 or the slot machine (not shown)) can receive the gaming ball that has entered behind the stage (for example, the stage 244 shown in FIG. 155). It is a game table characterized in that it is provided with a receiving portion (for example, a game ball storage unit 200a5 shown in FIGS. 167 to 169).

According to the game console according to this example, a clerk of a game store or the like can easily remove unnecessary game balls, and maintainability may be improved.

Further, the receiving portion may be a receiving portion capable of storing the game ball. Further, the receiving portion may be a receiving portion capable of discharging the game ball. Further, the receiving portion is a receiving portion capable of storing the game ball in the first state, and the receiving portion discharges the game ball in the second state. The first state is a state in which a game ball that has entered the rear of the stage can be stored, and the second state is a state in which the game ball that has entered the rear of the stage can be stored. It may be a state in which the game ball cannot be stored.

Further, the receiving portion has a storage portion capable of storing the game ball, and the receiving portion has a guiding portion (for example, the guiding portion 200a6 shown in FIG. 169) for guiding the game ball to the storage portion. It may also have. Further, the induction portion may be inclined toward the storage portion. Further, a wall portion (for example, the wall portion 200a3 shown in FIGS. 167 to 169) is provided between the stage and the receiving portion. For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the stage is a wall portion. The receiving portion may be provided at a position lower than the upper end portion of the wall portion, and the receiving portion may be provided at a position lower than the upper end portion of the wall portion.

Further, a movable body (for example, a second ascending accessory decorative portion 758d of the ascending accessory unit 750 shown in FIG. 190) may be provided, and the receiving portion may be a receiving portion provided in front of the movable body. .. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 190, the receiving portion may be a receiving portion capable of receiving a game ball that has been in contact with the movable body by the operation of the movable body. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 190, the receiving portion may be provided in a region different from the operating region of the movable body. Further, a ball passage (for example, the game ball passage 200a11 shown in FIG. 167) may be provided below the receiving portion.

Further, the gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 154 and the slot machine (not shown)) has a structure (for example, the center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 181) having a window portion (for example, a center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 181). A game table including a center accessory 900 (shown in FIG. 181) and a movable body (for example, a falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. Is a game table characterized by being visible.

According to the game table according to this example, it is possible to make various ways of showing the movable body, and it may be possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, when the movable body (for example, the falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. 181) is located at the first position (for example, the initial position shown in FIG. 184 (a)), the movable body can be moved from the window portion. When the movable body is partially visible to the player and the movable body is located at the second position (for example, the maximum moving position shown in FIG. 184 (c)), the player can see the movable body from the window portion. It may not be visible.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), the movable body located at the first position may be a movable body that overlaps with the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), the movable body located at the second position may be a movable body that does not overlap with the structure. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), the movable body located at the second position may be visible to the player.

Further, the movable body provided with the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 184 (a) and 184 (b)) and located at the second position is a movable body that overlaps the display means. There may be. Further, the movable body may be a movable body having a light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means 714a shown in FIG. 174 (a)).

Further, the structure (for example, the first portion 902a of the center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 182) may be at least partially transparent or translucent. Further, the portion of the movable body located at the first position and overlapping with the structure may be a portion having a first display (for example, a character). Further, the first display may be characters or characters. Further, a part of the movable body that can be visually recognized by the player from the window portion may have a second display (for example, the face of the character shown in FIG. 181). Further, the second display may be a display having a contour corresponding to the contour of the window portion. Further, the window portion may have a transmissive portion having transparency, and the window portion may be an opening portion.

Further, the gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 154 and the slot machine (not shown)) has a decorative cover (for example, the decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 181) and light emitting light capable of emitting light. A gaming table provided with means (for example, the falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. 181), and the first portion 902a of the transparent portion of the decorative cover (for example, the center accessory opening 900a shown in FIG. 182). ) Is visible to the player through the light emitting means, and the light emitting means is a movable means.

According to the game console according to this example, it is possible to make various effects by the light emitting means, and it may be possible to enhance the effect.

Further, the decorative cover may be a non-movable decorative cover (for example, the decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 181). Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), the light emitting means (for example, the falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. 181) is not passed through the decorative cover (for example, the decorative cover of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 181). The light from the player may be visible to the player. Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), the light emitting means (for example, the falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. 181) located at the first position is the decorative cover (for example, the center accessory shown in FIG. 181). It may be a means of overlapping the 900 decorative cover). Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), the light emitting means (for example, the falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. 181) located at the second position is the decorative cover (for example, the center accessory shown in FIG. 181). It may be a means that does not overlap the 900 decorative cover).

Further, the light emitting means (for example, the falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. 181) is a means having a second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the fall deployable accessory 712), and the second decorative cover. At least a part of the above is transparent or translucent, and the second decorative cover may be a decorative cover that can be moved according to the movement of the light emitting means.

Further, the light of the light emitting means is light that can be visually recognized by the player through the second decorative cover (for example, the cover means 718 of the falling deployable accessory 712) and the decorative cover (for example, the center accessory 900). There may be. Further, a second light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, the light emitting substrate 904 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182) is provided, and the light from the second light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player through the decorative cover. The second light emitting means may be a non-movable means.

Further, the first portion of the decorative cover (for example, the first portion 902a shown in FIG. 182) is a portion through which the light of the light emitting means can pass, and the first portion of the decorative cover (for example, the first portion 902a). The first portion 902a) shown in FIG. 182 may be a portion through which the light of the second light emitting means can pass. Further, the first portion may be colorless or colored.

Further, the second portion of the decorative cover (for example, the second portion 902b shown in FIG. 181) is a portion that does not allow the light of the light emitting means to pass through, and the second portion of the decorative cover (for example, FIG. 181). The second portion 902b) shown in the above may be a portion that does not allow the light of the second light emitting means to pass through. Further, the decorative cover may be configured to be movable. Further, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the first aspect at the first position, and the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light in the second aspect at the second position. The first aspect and the second aspect may be different or the same.
Further, the gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 154 and the slot machine (not shown)) is
With multiple structures
With multiple light emitting means
A first driveable means (for example, a pair of upper left lower drive unit 704 and right upper and lower drive unit 706) and
Display means (for example, decorative pattern display device 208) and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter, referred to as “first light emitting means”; for example, the second light emitting means 714a (LED) of the falling deploying accessory 712 shown in FIG. 174) is the first light emitting means. It is a means that can be moved by driving the driving means of
One of the plurality of light emitting means (hereinafter, referred to as "second light emitting means"; for example, the light emitting substrate 904 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182) may be moved by driving the first driving means. No means,
One of the plurality of structures (hereinafter, referred to as “first structure”; for example, the portion 902a of the decorative portion 902 of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 181) is from the first light emitting means. It is a structure that allows light to pass through, and the first structure is a structure that allows light from the second light emitting means to pass through.
At least a part of the first light emitting means and at least a part of the display means may overlap in the front-rear direction (for example, FIG. 184 (c)).
One of the plurality of structures (hereinafter, referred to as “second structure”; for example, the portion 902b of the decorative portion 902 of the center accessory 900 shown in FIG. 181) is from the first light emitting means. It is a structure that does not allow light to pass through.
The first light emitting means is a means that can be located at the first position.
The first light emitting means is a means that can be located at a second position.
At least a part of the first light emitting means located at the first position is overlapped by the first structure.
At least a part of the first light emitting means located at the first position is overlapped by the second structure.
The first light emitting means located at the second position is not overlapped by the first structure and is not overlapped.
The first light emitting means located at the second position is not overlapped by the second structure and is not overlapped.
At least a part of the second light emitting means is overlapped by the first structure.
The first light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light in a state where the first light emitting means is located at the first position.
It is a game table characterized by that.
Further, one part of the first structure (hereinafter, referred to as "first part"; for example, a part of the first part 902a of the decorative part 902 shown in FIG. 182) is the first part. It is a part that allows light from the light emitting means to pass through.
One part of the first structure (hereinafter, referred to as “second part”; for example, the other part of the first part 902a of the decorative part 902 shown in FIG. 182) is the second part. It is a part that allows light from the light emitting means to pass through.
The first portion is a portion through which light from the second light emitting means is passed.
The second portion may be a portion through which light from the first light emitting means is transmitted.
Further, the second light emitting means may be a non-movable means.
Further, the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be configured separately.
Further, one of the plurality of structures (hereinafter, referred to as a "third structure"; for example, the cover means 718 of the falling deployable accessory 712 shown in FIG. 174) is from the first light emitting means. It is a structure that allows light to pass through, and the first structure and the third structure may be configured as separate bodies.
Further, the third structure may be a structure that can be moved by driving the first driving means.
Further, the first structure may be a non-movable structure.
Further, a second driveable means (for example, a right rotation drive unit 712f or a left rotation drive unit 712e shown in FIG. 173) may be provided.
Further, the gaming table according to this example (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 185 and the slot machine (not shown)) is
It is a game table equipped with a movable body (falling deployment accessory 702) that can be operated.
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means (upper first light emitting means 716a).
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (left and right first light emitting means 716a).
The movable body is a movable body having driving means (left rotation driving unit 712e and right rotation driving unit 712f).
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion (left and right upper body portions 712c4).
The movable body is a movable body having a second movable portion (covering means 718).
The first movable portion is a movable portion capable of executing the first movable operation by driving the driving means (FIG. 185).
In a certain operation intermediate state of the first movable operation, the first light emitting means does not overlap with the first movable portion (FIG. 185).
In the certain operating state, the second light emitting means does not overlap with the first moving portion (FIG. 185).
In the operation end state of the first movable operation, the first light emitting means does not overlap with the first movable portion (FIG. 185).
Wherein the operation end state, said second light emitting means is Ri Do heavy and the first movable portion (FIG. 185),
In a state prior to the certain operating state, the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable portion (FIG. 185).
In the previous state, the second light emitting means does not overlap with the first moving portion (FIG. 185).
At the end of the operation, the second light emitting means does not overlap with the second moving portion (FIG. 185).
It is a game table characterized by that.
Further, the substrate on which the first light emitting means is mounted (light emitting substrate 716) may overlap with another light emitting substrate (light emitting substrate 714) in a certain state.
Further, the other light emitting substrate may be a substrate capable of executing the operation by driving the driving means (FIG. 185).
Further, the second movable portion is a movable portion that may overlap with the first movable portion, and the second movable portion is a movable portion that may not overlap with the first movable portion. It may be (Fig. 185).

<Embodiment E>
An example of the substrate case of each of the above embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 199. The board case of this embodiment can be used as, for example, the above-mentioned main control board case, sub control board case, liquid crystal control board case, payout control board case, launch board case, or power supply board case.

See FIG. 193. The figure is a plan view of the substrate case 1 of this embodiment. The board case 1 houses the board 2. The substrate 2 is, for example, a game control board for game control, a payout control board for payout control, a control board for effect control, a control board for image control, a launch control board for launch control, and a drive control for drive control. It may be a substrate or a light emitting substrate having an LED. The board 2 is, for example, a printed wiring board. The substrate 2 has a plate shape as a whole.

The board case 1 is formed in a box shape by combining the case member 11 located on the front side in the figure and the case member 12 located on the back side in the figure in a box shape, and the storage space for the board 2 is inside the board case 1. Is formed. The case member 11 and the case member 12 are provided with, for example, an engaging portion for engaging them, and are fitted to each other. In the present embodiment, the substrate case 1 is composed of two members (case members 11 and 12), but may be composed of three or more members.

Most of the case member 11 is located on one surface 2a side of the substrate 2, and most of the case member 12 is located on the surface opposite to the surface 2a of the substrate 2 (surface 2b shown in FIG. 196 and the like). doing. The case member 11 covers the surface 2a of the substrate 2, and can be called a cover portion that covers the surface 2a. Similarly, the case member 12 can also be called a cover portion in that it covers the surface of the substrate 2. In the present embodiment, the case members 11 and 12 cover the entire surface 2a of the substrate 2, but may partially cover the surface 2a. The direction parallel to the surface 2a (and the surface 2b) may be referred to as the substrate surface direction, and the direction perpendicular to the substrate surface direction may be referred to as the vertical direction.

The case members 11 and 12 can be made of a transparent material, for example, a transparent or translucent plastic material. In the case of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the case members 11 and 12 are entirely composed of transparent members, and the substrate 2 to be housed can be inspected from the outside.

The case member 11 has a region in which the central portion 11a in the lateral direction is higher than the end portion 11b and the end portion 11d in the lateral direction from the substrate 2. The end portion 11b is a region where the height from the substrate 2 is higher than that of the end portion 11d. The central portion 11a, the end portion 11b, and the end portion 11d extend parallel to the substrate surface direction as a whole, and the step shown in FIGS. 196 (a) and 196 (b) is provided between the central portion 11a and the end portion 11b. A step portion 11e is interposed between the central portion 11a and the end portion 11d. The step portion 11c and the step portion 11e extend in a direction intersecting the substrate surface direction as a whole.

A plurality of connectors 21A to 21G and 22 are provided on the surface 2a of the substrate 2. Such a connector may or may not be provided on the surface 2b. Corresponding cords (not shown) are inserted and removed from the connectors 21A to 21G and 22 respectively. In the present embodiment, the cord insertion / removal direction for each of the connectors 21A to 21G and 22 is the vertical direction. The end portion 11d is located at a position that covers the connectors 21A to 21G, and the connector 22 is located at a position that covers the end portion 11b. By arranging the connectors 21A to 21G and 22 at positions corresponding to the ends 11b and 11d having a relatively low height from the substrate 2, the cord may be easily inserted and removed.

FIG. 195 is a plan view showing a part of the surface 2a of the substrate 2, and shows mounting components around the connector 22 and a display example on the surface 2a. The substrate 2 is a substrate on which various electronic components such as ICs (integrated circuits) and resistors are mounted. The IC 23 is, for example, a ROM.

The display on the surface 2a is printed by, for example, silk printing. The type of display includes an identification display that identifies the mounted component. The identification display is located in the vicinity of the corresponding mounting component, and is an identification display indicating a resistor in which "R" and a number are combined, an identification display indicating a capacitor in which "C" is combined with a number, and a display 24 ( An identification display indicating the connector 22 is included as in CN6).

Further, the display on the surface 2a also includes a display 25 indicating the mounting direction of the mounting component. In the case of this embodiment, the display 25 is an L-shaped index indicating the mounting direction of the connector 22. The outer shape of the connector 22 is a prism shape, particularly a square pillar shape, and chamfered portions 22a and 22b, which are indicators of the mounting direction of the surface 2a, are formed on a part of the prism portion. By mounting the connector 14 so that the chamfered portions 22a and 22b are located on the display 25 side, the connector 14 is mounted in an appropriate orientation.

Returning to FIG. 193, the case member 11 is formed with openings 13A to 13G and 14 corresponding to the connectors 21A to 21G and 22, and at least a part of the connectors 21A to 21G and 22 has corresponding openings. It is visible from parts 13A to 13G and 14. The openings 13A to 13G and 14 are portions defined by contour lines at the ends of holes penetrating the case member 11 in the thickness direction thereof. In the case of the present embodiment, since the plan view shapes of the connectors 21A to 21G and 22 are rectangular, the openings 13A to 13G and 14 are also rectangular correspondingly. The structure around the opening 14 and the opening 13A will be described with reference to FIGS. 194, 196 and 197. The structure around the openings 13B to 13G is the same as the structure around the openings 13A.

FIG. 194 is a perspective view of the periphery of the opening 14 in the direction of arrow D1 in FIG. 193. In the figure, the portion represented by the double line shows the outline (plate thickness) of the wall body of the case member 11. Since the case member 11 has transparency, this is expressed in consideration of the fact that the contour line of the wall body can be visually recognized. 196 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 193, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 193, and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 193. Further, FIG. 197 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 196 (a), showing a state in which the mounted components on the surface 2a are not mounted.

Prior to the description of the structure around the opening 14 and the opening 13A, the peripheral structure of the IC 23 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 194 and 197, the case member 11 is formed with a cylindrical wall portion 15 extending toward the substrate 2, and the IC 23 is inserted into the inner space of the wall portion 15. By providing the wall portion 15, the protection performance of the IC 23 may be enhanced, and the location of the IC 23 may be easily known.

The structure around the opening 14 will be described. The case member 11 has inner walls 16a to 16d that define the opening 14. The inner walls 16a to 16d extend vertically from the opening 14 toward the substrate 2. In other words, the opening 14 is formed on the upper edge of the inner walls 16a-16d.

The inner wall portion 16d, which is a part of the inner walls 16a to 16d, is formed by the end faces of the end portions 11b, and the width in the vertical direction thereof is the plate thickness of the end portions 11b. As shown in FIG. 197, the inner wall portion 16d is located between the connector 22 and its identification display 24, and when the identification display 24 is visually recognized from the outside of the substrate case 1, the inner wall portion 16d hinders the visual recognition. It may not be. On the contrary, for the identification display that is not desired to be visually recognized from the outside, it is possible to hinder the recognition by locating the inner wall portion 16d at a position overlapping the identification display. Regarding the relationship between the opening 14 and the identification display 24, when viewed in the vertical direction as in the present embodiment, the identification display 24 may be located outside the opening 14, but is located inside. It may be good, or some parts may overlap.

The inner wall portions 16a to 16c, which are a part of the inner walls 16a to 16d, are formed by the wall portions 16 extending in the direction intersecting the end portions 11b. In the present embodiment, the wall portion 16 extends from the end portion 11b toward the substrate 2, and particularly extends in the vertical direction. The cross-sectional shape of the wall portion 16 is U-shaped, and the inner wall portion 16d is located on the open side thereof. The end portion 11 is formed around the opening 14 by one step lower than the periphery on the substrate 2 side, and the periphery of the opening 14 is a recess wider than the opening 14. Therefore, it may be easy to insert and remove the cord from the connector 14.

As shown in FIG. 197, the wall portion 16 is located at a position overlapping with a part of the identification display displayed on the surface 2a of the substrate 2. By overlapping in this way, the wall portion 16 may hinder the visibility of the identification display when the identification display is visually recognized from the outside of the substrate case 1. On the other hand, when the wall portion 16 is a transparent member as in the present embodiment, the visibility of the identification display may not be significantly reduced, and conversely, the wall portion 16 becomes a kind of lens for the identification display. May be magnified to make it easier to see.

The vertical widths of the inner wall portions 16a to 16c are all H2, but may be different. The vertical width (height) of the connector 14 is H21, which is slightly longer than the width H2. The height of the inner wall portion 16d in the vertical direction is shorter than that of H2, and in the case of this embodiment, it is within the range of 1/4 to 1/6 of H2. The vertical height of the inner wall portion 16d may be the same as that of H2.

As described above, the connector 22 has a quadrangular prism shape. The inner walls 16a to 16d face each of the four side surfaces of the connector 22. By facing each other, when assembling the board case 1, it serves as a guide or a guide for aligning the connector 14 with respect to the opening 14, and the assembling may be facilitated. When viewed between the inner wall portions, the inner wall portion 16a and the inner wall portion 16b face each other, and in the case of the present embodiment, they are further parallel, and the inner wall portion 16c and the inner wall portion 16d face each other although they have different widths in the vertical direction. , In the case of this embodiment, it is more parallel.

A gap is formed between the four side surfaces of the connector 22 and the inner walls 16a to 16d facing each other. The gap may be, for example, 1 to 3 mm. The inner walls 16a to 16d may each come into contact with the four side surfaces of the connector 22, but the provision of gaps may make it easier to insert the connector 22 into the opening 14 when assembling the board case 1, and the board case 1 may be easily inserted. May be easier to assemble.

Since the connector 22 is surrounded on all four sides by the inner walls 16a to 16d, it is prevented from being excessively tilted in contact with the inner walls 16a to 16d even if a lateral load is applied when the cord is inserted and removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the connector 22 from wobbling when the cord is inserted and removed, and to support the connector 22 by using not only the substrate 2 but also the substrate case 11. Since the inner wall portion 16a having the width H2 and having a high height and the inner wall portion 16b face each other, the inclination of the connector 22 in the direction of the inner wall portion 16a-16b may be more reliably prevented.

The connector 22 has a root portion 222 on the substrate 2 side and a tip portion 221 on the opposite side. In the case of the present embodiment, the opening 14 is formed at a position closer to the tip portion 221 than the root portion 222. Therefore, when the connector 22 is tilted, the inner walls 16a to 16d can support the tip portion 221 side. Since the root portion 222 of the connector 22 is supported by the substrate 2, the connector 22 swings around the root portion 222. However, according to the present embodiment, the tip portion 221 side, which is a high portion of the connector 22, is an inner wall 16a to 16d. Since it can be supported, it may be possible to effectively prevent the connector 22 from being excessively tilted.

In the case of this embodiment, the tip portion 221 of the connector 22 projects from the opening 14 to the outside of the substrate case 1 by the width H3. Since the opening 14 is located closer to the substrate 2 than the end surface (upper end surface) of the tip portion 221. Therefore, when the connector 22 is tilted, the inner walls 16a to 16d may easily come into contact with the side surface of the connector 22. .. Of the vertical widths of the protrusions of the connector 22, the longest width H3 is shorter than the width H2. In the case of the present embodiment, the vertical widths of the protruding portions are all H3, but there may be portions having different widths. If the width H3 is too long, the inner walls 16a to 16d face the side surface of the connector 22 at a low position. Therefore, if the width H3 is too low, the tilt prevention function may be deteriorated. , The inner walls 16a to 16d face each other at a higher position with respect to the side surface of the connector 22, and the effect of preventing the inclination of the connector may be enhanced. On the other hand, since the tip portion 221 of the connector 22 protrudes from the opening 14, the cord may be easily inserted and removed, and the ease of inserting and removing the cord and the improvement of the inclination prevention effect of the connector can be achieved at the same time. In some cases.

The structure around the opening 13A will be described. The case member 11 has an inner wall 17 that defines the opening 13A. The inner wall 17 extends vertically from the opening 13A toward the substrate 2. In other words, the opening 13A is formed on the upper edge of the inner wall 17.

For the sake of explanation, unlike the inner walls 16a to 16d described above, the reference numerals are not given to each inner wall portion, but the inner wall 17 is also composed of four inner wall portions. The inner wall 17 is formed by the end faces of the end portions 11d, and its vertical width H1 is the plate thickness of the end portions 11d. In the case of the present embodiment, the inner wall 17 has the same width H1 over the entire area, but may have portions having different widths H1.

In the case of the present embodiment, the plate thicknesses of the end portion 11d and the end portion 11b are equal, and the vertical width of the inner wall portion 16d defining the opening 14 and the width H1 are the same.

As described above, the connector 21 has a quadrangular prism shape. The inner wall 17 has an inner wall portion facing the four side surfaces of the connector 21. By facing each other, when assembling the board case 1, it serves as a guide or guide for aligning the connector 21 with respect to the opening 13A, and the assembling may be facilitated.

A gap is formed between the four side surfaces of the connector 22 and the inner wall 17 facing each other. The gap may be, for example, 1 to 3 mm. The inner wall 17 may come into contact with the four side surfaces of the connector 21, but the provision of a gap may make it easier to insert the connector 21 into the opening 13A when assembling the board case 1, and the board case 1 can be assembled. It may be easier.

The connector 21 has a root portion 212 on the substrate 2 side and a tip portion 211 on the opposite side. Comparing the heights of the connector 21 and the connector 22, the height H22 of the connector 22 is higher than the height H11 of the connector 21. Therefore, when inserting or removing the cord, the connector 21 may be less likely to wobble than the connector 22.

A claw-shaped locked portion 213 is formed on one side surface of the connector 21. The locking portion 213 locks with the locking portion provided on the cord to make the connection between the connector 21 and the cord more reliable.

In the case of the present embodiment, the opening 13A is formed at a position closer to the root portion 212 than the tip portion 211. Therefore, unlike the connector 22, the connector 21 has a larger portion exposed to the outside than a portion housed in the substrate case 1. In particular, the locked portion 213 may be exposed to the outside of the substrate case 1, making it easier to perform locking or unlocking work with the locking portion on the cord side.

Since the connector 21 is surrounded on all four sides by the inner wall 17, it is prevented that the connector 21 comes into contact with the inner wall 17 and is excessively tilted even if a lateral load is applied when the cord is inserted and removed. Here, the peripheral structure of the opening 13A and the peripheral structure of the opening 14 are compared. Comparing the longest vertical width of the inner walls 16a to 16d with the vertical longest width of the inner wall 17, the longest vertical width of the inner walls 16a to 16d is the width H2, and the longest vertical width of the inner wall 17 is. The width is H1, and there is a relationship of width H2> width H1. This means that the structure is such that the tilt prevention effect on the connector 22 is more likely to be enhanced than the tilt prevention effect on the connector 21. Further, regarding the positions of the openings 13A and 14, since the opening 14 is located on the tip portion 221 side and the opening 13A is located on the root portion 212 side, the connector 22 is more effective than the tilt prevention effect on the connector 21. The structure is such that the effect of preventing tilting is likely to increase.

Since the connector 22 is taller than the connector 21, it has a connector structure in which wobbling is likely to occur when the cord is inserted and removed, and the need for tilt prevention is relatively high. Further, the connector 21 has a locked portion 213, but the connector 22 has a connector structure without a locked portion.
It is a connector structure that does not need to consider the layout of the locked portion, and conversely, the connector 21 is a connector structure that needs to be considered.

By making the peripheral structures of the corresponding openings 13A and 14 different according to the connector structure of the connector 21 and the connector 22 in this way, the support performance of the connector, the insertability of the connector, or the assembling property of the board case can be improved. May be possible.

<Other configuration examples of the inner wall>
Other configuration examples of the inner walls 16a to 16d will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199.

FIGS. 198 (a1) to 198 (a3) illustrate the relationship between the position of the opening 14 and the height of the end surface (upper surface) of the tip portion 221 of the connector 22. FIG. 198 (a1) shows an example in which the opening 14 and the end face of the tip portion 221 are located at the same height from the substrate 2, and FIG. 198 (a2) shows an example in which the opening 14 is located at the tip portion 221. An example is shown in which the substrate 2 is located higher than the end face. In these examples, the tilt prevention effect of the connector 22 may be enhanced. FIG. 198 (a3) shows an example in which the opening 14 is located lower than the end surface of the tip portion 221 from the substrate 2, and in particular, the opening 14 is located at the tip portion 221 in the height direction of the connector 22. An example is shown in which the connector is located closer to the center than the root portion 222. In this example, the insertability of the connector 22 may be improved.

FIGS. 198 (b1) to 198 (b3) show an example in which the position of the opening 14 is higher than the surface of the end portion 11b. In each example, the wall portion 16 extends from the end portion 11b to the side opposite to the substrate 2, and particularly extends in the vertical direction. The inner wall portion 16d may be formed by the end surface of the end portion 11b, or a portion forming the inner wall portion 16d may be added to the wall portion 16. FIG. 198 (b1) shows an example in which the opening 14 and the end face of the tip portion 221 are located at the same height from the substrate 2, and FIG. 198 (b2) shows an example in which the opening 14 is located at the tip portion 221. An example is shown in which the substrate 2 is located higher than the end face. In these examples, the tilt prevention effect of the connector 22 may be enhanced. FIG. 198 (b3) shows an example in which the opening 14 is located lower than the end surface of the tip portion 221 from the substrate 2, and in particular, the opening 14 is located at the tip portion 221 in the height direction of the connector 22. An example is shown in which the connector is located closer to the center than the root portion 222. In this example, the insertability of the connector 22 may be improved.

FIGS. 198 (c1) to 198 (c3) show examples of the vertical width and position of the inner wall. Although the widths of the inner wall portions 16a and 16b are illustrated here, the inner wall portions 16c and the inner wall portions 16d may be the same or different.

FIG. 198 (c1) shows an example in which the vertical widths of the inner wall portions 16a and 16b are the same as the height of the connector 22, and the lower ends of the inner wall portions 16a and 16b reach the substrate 2. There is. Since the lower end surface of the wall portion 16 is in contact with the substrate 2, for example, when the cord is pulled out from the connector 22, the substrate 2 is suppressed from bending, and the cord may be easily pulled out.

FIG. 198 (c2) is an example in which the vertical widths of the inner wall portions 16a and 16b are within the range of 1/3 to 1/4 of the height of the connector 22 (for example, 1/2).

FIG. 198 (c3) shows an example in which the vertical widths of the inner wall portions 16a and 16b are the plate thicknesses of the end portions 11b, and the wall portions 16 are not provided.

FIGS. 198 (d1) to 198 (d4) show an example of the position of the opening 14 with respect to the connector 22, and in particular, when viewed in the vertical direction, at least a part of the contour of the opening 14 is the tip of the connector 22. An example is shown which is located inside the end face of the portion 221. In these examples, the inner wall portions 16a to 16d have little effect of contacting the side surface of the connector 22 to prevent the tilt when the connector 22 is tilted, but the inner wall portions 16a to 16d contact the side surface of the cord inserted and removed from the connector 22 to tilt the connector 22. It may be prevented, and as a result, it may be possible to prevent the connector 22 from tilting while being connected or separated from the cord.

FIG. 198 (d1) shows an example in which the entire opening 14 is located inside the end surface of the tip portion 221 of the connector 22.

In FIG. 198 (d2), the inner wall portion 16a is located inside the end face of the tip portion 221 of the connector 22, the inner wall portion 16b is located outside the end face of the tip portion 221, and a part of the opening 14 is a connector. An example of being located inside the end face of the tip portion 221 of 22 is shown.

FIG. 198 (d3) shows an example in which the lower ends of the inner wall portion 16a and the inner wall portion 16b are in contact with the end surface of the tip portion 221 of the connector 22, in other words, the end surface of the tip portion 221 of the connector 22 at the peripheral edge of the opening 14. An example in which the end portion 11b is in contact with the end portion 11b is shown.

FIG. 198 (d4) shows an example in which the example of FIG. 198 (d1) and the example of FIG. 198 (b2) are combined.

FIGS. 199 (a1) to 199 (a9) show an example of the contour shape of the inner wall, and show an example in which the width in the vertical direction differs depending on the portion inside the inner wall portion. It may be possible to improve the design or make it stand out. Although the contour shape of the inner wall portion 16b is illustrated here, the inner wall portion 16a may have the same contour shape or may be different.

FIGS. 199 (a1) to 199 (a3) exemplify an example in which the contour shape of the inner wall portion 16b includes a straight line having an inclined shape. FIG. 199 (a1) shows an example in which the edge of the inner wall portion 16b on the substrate 2 side extends at an angle with respect to the substrate 2, and in particular, the lower end of the inner wall portion 16c and the lower end of the inner wall portion 16d are shown. An example of extending to tie is shown.

FIG. 199 (a2) shows an example in which the edge of the inner wall portion 16b opposite to the substrate 2 extends at an angle with respect to the substrate 2, and in particular, the inner wall portion 16d is located at a low position and the inner wall portion is located. An example is shown in which the upper end of the 16c is extended so as to connect the upper end of the inner wall portion 16d. The opening 14 is formed on a plane inclined with respect to the substrate surface direction.

FIG. 199 (a3) shows an example in which the edge of the inner wall portion 16b on the substrate 2 side and the edge on the side opposite to the substrate 2 are inclined and extend with respect to the substrate 2, and in particular, the inner wall portion 16d is vertical. It has a width longer than the plate thickness of the end portion 11b in the direction, and has an upper end edge connecting the upper end of the inner wall portion 16c and the upper end of the inner wall portion 16d, and a lower end edge connecting the lower end of the inner wall portion 16c and the lower end of the inner wall portion 16d. An example is shown in which the inner wall portion 16b has and. The opening 14 is formed on a plane inclined with respect to the substrate surface direction.

FIGS. 199 (a4) to 199 (a6) exemplify an example in which the contour shape of the inner wall portion 16b is composed of a plurality of straight lines. FIG. 199 (a4) shows an example in which the edge of the inner wall portion 16b on the substrate 2 side is formed in a stepped shape, and in particular, extends so as to connect the lower end of the inner wall portion 16c and the lower end of the inner wall portion 16d. ..

In FIG. 199 (a5), the edge of the inner wall portion 16b opposite to the substrate 2 is formed in a stepped shape, and in particular, the inner wall portion 16d is located at a low position, and the upper end of the inner wall portion 16c and the upper end of the inner wall portion 16d. An example of extending so as to connect is shown. The opening 14 is configured as an opening having a staircase-shaped contour.

In FIG. 199 (a6), the inner wall portion 16d has a width longer than the plate thickness of the end portion 11b in the vertical direction, and the upper end edge connecting the upper end of the inner wall portion 16c and the upper end of the inner wall portion 16d and the lower end of the inner wall portion 16c. An example is shown in which the inner wall portion 16b has a lower end edge connecting the lower end and the lower end of the inner wall portion 16d. The upper end edge and the lower end edge are refracted in the middle, and the opening 14 is configured as an opening having an outline of the upper end edge.

FIGS. 199 (a7) to 199 (a9) exemplify an example in which the contour shape of the inner wall portion 16b includes a curved line. The opening 14 is configured as an opening having the contour of the upper end edge.

FIG. 199 (a7) shows an example in which the edge of the inner wall portion 16b on the substrate 2 side is formed in an arc, and in particular, extends so as to connect the lower end of the inner wall portion 16c and the lower end of the inner wall portion 16d. The arc has a convex shape upward, but may have a convex shape toward the substrate 2.

FIG. 199 (a8) shows an example in which the edge of the inner wall portion 16b opposite to the substrate 2 is formed in an arc, and in particular, extends so as to connect the upper end of the inner wall portion 16c and the upper end of the inner wall portion 16d. There is. The arc has a convex shape upward, but may have a convex shape toward the substrate 2.

In FIG. 199 (a9), the inner wall portion 16d has a width longer than the plate thickness of the end portion 11b in the vertical direction, and the upper end edge connecting the upper end of the inner wall portion 16c and the upper end of the inner wall portion 16d and the lower end of the inner wall portion 16c. An example is shown in which the inner wall portion 16b has a lower end edge connecting the lower end and the lower end of the inner wall portion 16d. The upper end edge is curved in an S shape, and the lower end edge is composed of an arc-shaped portion and a straight portion.

<Summary of Embodiment E>
E1. The game console of the above embodiment
A substrate having a first surface (eg 2a) (eg 2) and
A board case (for example, 1) for storing the board and
It is a game table equipped with
The first surface is the surface on which the first connector (for example, 21A) is provided.
The first surface is a surface provided with a second connector (for example, 22).
The substrate case is a substrate case including a cover portion (for example, 11) that covers at least a part of the first surface.
The cover portion is a cover portion having a first opening (for example, 13A).
The cover portion is a cover portion having a second opening (for example, 14).
At least a part of the first connector is visible through the first opening.
At least a part of the second connector is visible from the second opening.
The cover portion is a cover portion having a first inner wall (for example, 17) extending from the first opening toward the substrate.
The cover portion is a cover portion having a second inner wall (for example, 16a-16d) extending from the second opening toward the substrate.
The second width of the second inner wall is longer than the first width of the first inner wall.
The first width is the shortest width (for example, H1) of the width of the first inner wall in the direction perpendicular to the substrate.
The second width is the longest width (for example, H2) of the width of the second inner wall in the direction perpendicular to the substrate.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game table having a feature in the substrate case. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the connector from being excessively tilted due to the insertion and removal of the cord, and to prevent poor contact or disconnection of the connector.

E2. The game console of the above embodiment
The second connector is a connector having a root portion (for example, 222) on the substrate side.
The second connector is a connector having a tip portion (for example, 221) opposite to the root portion.
The second opening is an opening formed at a position closer to the tip portion than the root portion (for example, FIGS. 196 (a) (b), 198 (a1) (a2) (b1) (. b2) (c1)-(c3) (d1)-(d4)),
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the opening can regulate the movement of the high portion of the second connector or the cord side, it may be possible to prevent the second connector from tilting.

E3. The game console of the above embodiment
The height of the second connector (eg H21) is higher than the height of the first connector (eg H11).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the high-height connector from tilting.

E4. The game console of the above embodiment
The second opening is an opening having a rectangular shape (for example, FIG. 193).
A part of the second inner wall is a first inner wall portion (for example, 16a).
A part of the second inner wall is a second inner wall portion (for example, 16b).
The longest width of the first inner wall portion in the direction perpendicular to the substrate is the same width as the second width (for example, FIG. 196 (a)).
The longest width of the second inner wall portion in the direction perpendicular to the substrate is the same width as the second width (for example, FIG. 196 (a)).
The first inner wall portion is an inner wall portion facing the second inner wall portion (for example, FIG. 196 (a)).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, since the inner wall facing the opening is high, it may be possible to prevent the connector from tilting even if the cord swings during wire removal.

E5. The game console of the above embodiment
The second connector is a connector having a protrusion protruding from the second opening.
The longest width (for example, H3) of the width of the protrusion in the direction perpendicular to the substrate is a width shorter than the second width.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to prevent the connector from tilting while maintaining the ease of inserting and removing the cord.

E6. The game console of the above embodiment
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.

E7. The game console of the above embodiment
It's a slot machine,
It is characterized by that.

E8. The following configurations can also be adopted.

For example, the first connector is a connector having a root portion (for example, 212) on the substrate side, and the first connector is a connector having a tip portion (for example, 211) opposite to the root portion. The first portion in the first opening may be a portion closer to the root portion of the first connector than to the tip portion of the first connector (for example, FIG. 196 (c)). .. It may be easier to insert and remove the cord from the first connector.

For example, a part of the second inner wall is a third inner wall part (for example, 16c), and a part of the second inner wall is a fourth inner wall part (for example, 16d). The longest width of the width in the direction perpendicular to the substrate in the third inner wall portion is the same width as the second width, and the width in the direction perpendicular to the substrate in the fourth inner wall portion. The longest width thereof is the same as the first width, and the third inner wall portion may be an inner wall portion facing the fourth inner wall portion (for example, FIG. 196 (b)). .. It may be easy to align the second opening with respect to the second connector.

For example, the fourth inner wall portion may be located between the second connector and an identification display (for example, 24) representing the second connector. The identification display may be visible from above the cover portion, and inspection may be easy.

For example, the width of the first inner wall in the direction perpendicular to the substrate may be only the first width (for example, FIG. 196 (c)). The width of the second inner wall in the direction perpendicular to the substrate may be only the second width. The structure may be simple and it may be easy to manufacture.

For example, the width of the second inner wall in the direction perpendicular to the substrate may include at least three or more different widths (eg, FIG. 199). In some cases, both the pluggability of the cord, the prevention of tilting of the second connector, and the pluggability of the cord can be improved.

For example, the contour shape of the second inner wall may include a straight line inclined with respect to the substrate (for example, FIGS. 199 (a1)-(a6)). The contour shape of the second inner wall may include a curved line (for example, FIGS. 199 (a7)-(a9)). The position of the second opening may be visually recognizable.

For example, the substrate may include other electrical components (eg, switches), and the opening of the cover with respect to the other electrical components may have the same structure as the second opening. The substrate includes a plurality of the first connectors (for example, 21A-21G), and a plurality of openings (for example, 13A-13G) of the cover portion for the plurality of the first connectors are used as the first openings. It may have a similar structure. The cover portion may be a cover portion having only one of the second openings as a structure similar to the second opening. The cover portion may have one or two or more in addition to the second opening as a structure similar to the second opening. The structure may be simple and it may be easy to manufacture.

For example, the first connector may have a locked portion (eg, FIG. 213) to which the locking portion of the connected cord is locked. The locked portion may be exposed from the first opening. The locked portion may be claw-shaped. The cord connected to the second connector may be a cord having no locking portion, and the second connector may be a connector having no locked portion. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent tilting of a connector that does not require locking work, and to perform locking work for a connector that requires locking work.

For example, the substrate includes a game control board for game control, a payout control board for payout control, a control board for effect control, a control board for image control, a launch control board for launch control, and a drive control for drive control. It may be at least one of a substrate and a light emitting substrate having an LED.

For example, the board case may be provided on the back side of the game table, may be provided inside the game table, or may be provided on the door of the game table.

For example, the second inner wall may be formed in a cylindrical shape. The tubular shape may be a square cylinder shape, and in particular, a square cylinder shape may be used. The second inner wall may surround the second connector. It may be easy to prevent the second connector from tilting.

For example, the second connector may be a connector having a plurality of side surfaces, and the second inner wall may have facing surfaces facing the plurality of side surfaces. There may be a gap between the plurality of side surfaces and the facing surface. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the board case and the board from being complicatedly assembled.

For example, at least a part of the second inner wall may be located farther from the substrate than the tip portion of the second connector. By supporting the cord side, it may be possible to prevent the second connector from tilting as a result.

For example, the cover portion includes a first portion (for example, 11b) extending parallel to the substrate and a second portion (for example, 16) extending from the first portion in a direction intersecting the first portion. Including, the second portion may be a portion forming at least a part of the second inner wall. The range in which the inclination of the second connector can be prevented may be widened. The first portion and the second portion may be orthogonal to each other. The second portion may be a portion extending from the first portion toward the substrate side. The second portion may be a portion extending from the first portion to the opposite side of the substrate. The second connector may be prismatic and the second portion may have a surface (eg, 16a-16c) facing the other side surface except for one side surface of the second connector. The second portion may have a U-shaped cross section. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the board case and the board from being complicatedly assembled.

<Embodiment F>
Another example of the drive unit 830'of the embodiment A and a modified example thereof will be described. In the following description, the same components as those in the A embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals. FIG. 200 is a perspective view of the transmission unit 700'of the embodiment A and the drive unit 730' instead of the drive unit 830' of the embodiment A. FIG. 201 is an exploded perspective view of the drive unit 730'.

The drive unit 730'has a first drive unit (stepping motor) 738', a second drive unit 752', and a first gear inside a housing composed of a substantially hexagonal body 736'and a lid 734', which are close to a semicircle. 740', second gear 742', string portion 746', driven portion 748', stopper 754', shaft 756'and the like are housed inside the front frame door 106'.

A circular first gear (drive gear) 740'for transmitting the driving force of the first drive unit 738' is attached to the drive shaft of the first drive unit 738', and the first gear 740'is a circular first gear. It meshes with 2 gears 742'. A string portion 746'is wound around the rim portion of the second gear 742', and a driven portion 748' is connected to a part of the string portion 746'. The driven portion 748'has a cylindrical insertion hole 748a' that extends in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100, and a shaft 756' that extends in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100 is slidable in the insertion hole 748a'. It is inserted. As a result, the driven portion 748'can move along the shaft 756'. Further, the driven portion 748'has an insertion hole 748b' that extends in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 100, and the guide shaft 708A'is inserted into the insertion hole 748b'. The guide shaft 708A'is attached to the upper end of the base portion 708' of the transmission unit 700'.

The stopper 754'is attached to the main body 736' so as to be movable in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100, restricts the movement of the driven portion 748'at a predetermined position (for example, the rightmost position in the moving direction), and moves to the left. By moving, the driven unit 748'can be moved. The stopper 754'has a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100, and a rack 754a'is provided on a part of one side thereof. The second drive unit 752'is, for example, a stepping motor that drives the stopper 754', and a circular drive gear 752a'for transmitting the driving force of the second drive unit 752' is attached to a drive shaft (not shown). .. The drive gear 752a'engages with the rack 754a'of the stopper 754'and drives the stopper 754'. Further, on the bottom surface of the main body 736', a guide hole 732'in which the guide shaft 708A'can move in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100 is provided.

FIG. 202 is an operation explanatory view of the drive unit 730'. FIG. 202 is a top view showing a state of the drive unit 730'that moves the transmissive unit 700'from the initial position to the maximum moving position. FIG. 202 (a) shows the drive unit 730'in the state where the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position, and FIG. 202 (b) shows the drive unit 730' in the state where the transmission unit 700'is in the middle position. , FIG. 202 (c) shows the drive unit 730'in the state where the transmission unit 700'is in the maximum moving position. In FIG. 202, the upper direction in the figure is the rear surface (back surface) side of the pachinko machine 100, and the lower direction in the figure is the front side of the pachinko machine 100.

As shown in FIG. 202 (a), when the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position, the driven unit 748' is the rear end portion (rear side of the pachinko machine 100) of the movement range (shaft 756') in the front-rear direction. ). Further, at this position, the driven portion 748'contacts the stopper 754' and its movement is restricted. At this time, the stopper 754'is in a state of being urged by the urging member (spring) 754b'and moved to the rightmost end. Then, in this state, the guide shaft 708A'that engages with the insertion hole 748b'of the driven portion 748' is located at the rear end portion 732B'of the guide hole 732'.

The driven unit 748'provides a first detection piece (initial position detection piece) 748c'and a second detection piece (maximum movement position detection piece) 748d' on both sides thereof. Further, the main body 736'is provided with a first position detection sensor (initial position detection sensor) 758a' and a second position detection sensor (maximum movement position detection sensor) 758b', respectively, for detecting these. The first position detection sensor 758a'and the second position detection sensor 758b' are, for example, transmission type optical sensors.

The detection results of the first position detection sensor 758a'and the second position detection sensor 758b' are input to, for example, the first sub-control unit 400. When the first position detection sensor 758a'detects the first detection piece 748c', the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position, and the second position detection sensor 758b' By detecting the second detection piece 748d', the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the transmission unit 700'is in the maximum moving position. That is, in the state of FIG. 202A, the first position detection sensor 758a'detects the first detection piece 748c', and the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position. ing.

In the initial position, the guide shaft 708A'is located at the rear end 732B'of the guide hole 732'of the drive unit 730', whereby the transmissive unit 700'is the front frame door as shown in FIG. 12A and the like. It is housed inside the 106, and it is difficult to recognize that the transmissive unit 700'is movable in appearance (in any of the front view, the perspective view, and the top view).

As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the second drive unit 752'is driven and the drive gear 752a' is rotated counterclockwise, the stopper 754' is moved to the left. Separated from the driven portion 748'(non-contact). The driven portion 748', which has been released from the movement restriction by the stopper 754', moves toward the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 along the shaft 756'. Along with this, the guide shaft 708A'that engages with the insertion hole 748b'of the driven portion 748'move toward the front end portion 732F' along the guide hole 732'. As a result, the base portion 708'connected to the guide shaft 708A'starts to rotate (move) forward about the drive shaft 718'.

For example, the shaft 756'is inclined (tilted forward) so that the front end portion is lower than the rear end portion, and the stopper 754' retracts to the left, so that the shaft 756'is movable. The unit 748'naturally moves forward under the weight of the transmissive unit 700'. However, not limited to this, the first gear 740'rotates counterclockwise by driving the first drive unit 738', and the string portion 746' moves counterclockwise in the top view, so that the driven portion 748' moves forward. It may be a moving one. In this case, the shaft 756'can be arranged horizontally.

As shown in FIG. 202 (c), when the transmissive unit 700'is in the maximum moving position, the driven unit 748' is the front end portion (front side of the pachinko machine 100) of the moving range (shaft 756') in the front-rear direction. ). Then, in this state, the guide shaft 708A'that engages with the insertion hole 748b'of the driven portion 748' is located at the front end portion 732F'of the guide hole 732'.

Further, in this state, the second position detection sensor 758b'detects the second detection piece 748d', so that the first sub-control unit 400 knows that the transmission unit 700'is in the maximum moving position.

At the maximum movement position, the guide shaft 708A'is located at the front end 732F'of the guide hole 732'of the drive unit 730', which causes the transmissive unit 700' to be as shown in FIG. 12B and the like. The upper part is in a forward leaning posture that protrudes greatly forward from the front frame door 106'.

After the transmissive unit 700'has moved to the maximum moving position, the player can push the transmissive unit 700'backward to return the transmissive unit 700' to the initial position, and play the transmissive unit 700'. It can function as a button that can be operated by a person.

When the player presses a predetermined operation button or a predetermined period elapses after the transparent unit 700'moves to the maximum moving position regardless of the player's operation (the first sub-control unit 400 determines. When the second detection piece 748d'is detected by the second position detection sensor 758b' over a period of time), the first drive unit 738' is driven to drive the driven unit 748' to the initial stage shown in FIG. 202 (a). It can be moved to a position. That is, when the first drive unit 738'rotates the first gear 740' counterclockwise and the second gear 742' that meshes with the first gear 740'rotates clockwise, it is wound around the rim portion of the second gear 742'. The string portion 746'moves clockwise as a whole in top view. As a result, the driven portion 748'connected to the string portion 746'moves toward the rear end portion along the shaft 756'. With the movement of the driven portion 748', the guide shaft 708A'moves toward the rear end portion 732B'of the guide hole 732', whereby the transmissive portion unit 700'is returned to the initial position.

When the driven unit 748'returns to the initial position, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the first detection piece 748c'by the first position detection sensor 758a'and moves the stopper 754'to the right again to move the driven unit 754'to the right. Regulate the movement of 748'. The movement of the stopper 754'to the right releases, for example, the driving force of the second driving unit 752' that has moved the stopper 754'to the left against the urging force of the urging member 754b', and urges the stopper 754'. It may be moved to the right by the urging force of the member 754b', or in addition to the urging force of the urging member 754b', the driving force to move the stopper 754'to the right by the second driving unit 752'. May be added.

<Modification example>
A modified example of the drive unit 730'will be described with reference to FIG. 203. The figure is an explanatory view of the drive unit 730 "instead of the drive unit 730'. The upper direction of the figure is the rear surface (rear surface) side of the pachinko machine 100, and the lower direction of the figure is the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The decorative member DB is arranged on the front side of the drive unit 730 ", and although not shown in FIG. 203, the transparent portion unit 700'at the initial position is located on the lower side of the decorative member DB.

The drive unit 730 "is provided with a movable member 1000 in place of the stopper 754' described above, and the movement of the judo portion 748' can be restricted and deregulated by manual operation. Further, the position of the movable member 1000 can be detected. The third position detection sensor 1010 is provided. For other configurations, although the details (for example, the shape and size of the configuration and the tension mechanism of the cover portion 746') are different, it is substantially different from the drive unit 730'. Configurations that are the same and have the same or common functions as the configuration of the drive unit 730'are designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

In the case of this embodiment, the movable member 100 is a slider that is slidably supported in the left-right direction. The movable member 100 is configured to be movable on the rail by engaging with a rail extending in the left-right direction provided on the main body 736', for example.

In the case of the present embodiment, the movable member 1000 is a single member integrally including the regulation unit 1001, the operation unit 1002, the drive transmission unit 1003, and the third detection piece 1004.

The regulation unit 1001 comes into contact with the driven unit 748'at the regulation position (here, the rightmost position in the movement range of the movable member 100), and is in a regulation state for restricting the movement to the front side thereof. As a result, the transmissive unit 700'is locked to the initial position, and the movement from the initial position to the maximum movement position is restricted. The regulation unit 1001 is separated from the driven unit 748'at the release position (here, the position where the movable member 100 is moved to the left side from the regulation position), and is in an unregulated state that allows the movement to the front side thereof. As a result, the lock of the initial position of the transmissive unit 700'is released, and the restriction on the movement from the initial position to the maximum movement position is released.

The regulation unit 1001 is formed to be wider than the operation unit 1002 and the drive transmission unit 1003 because a certain degree of rigidity is required in restricting the movement of the transmission unit 700'.

The drive transmission unit 1003 has a rack that extends in the left-right direction and meshes with the drive gear 752a', and the drive transmission mechanism of the second drive unit 752' is a rack-pinion mechanism. By driving the second drive unit 752', the movable member 1000 can be moved in the left-right direction between the regulation position and the release position. Further, by using the rack-pinion mechanism as the drive transmission mechanism, it is possible to relatively reduce the resistance of the movable member 1000 to the manual operation of the operation unit 1002.

The third detection piece 1004 is provided at the end of the drive transmission unit 1003. The third detection piece 1004 is detected by the third position detection sensor 1010 when the movable member 1000 is in the regulated position. The third position detection sensor 1010 is, for example, a transmissive optical sensor.

The detection result of the third position detection sensor 1010 is input to, for example, the first sub-control unit 400. When the third position detection sensor 1010 detects the third detection piece 1010, the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the movable member 1000 is in the regulated position, and by not detecting it, the movable member 100 is in the release position. Can be regarded as. FIG. 203 shows the case where the movable member 1000 is in the regulated position, and therefore, the third position detection sensor 1010 detects the third detection piece 1010.

The operation unit 1002 extends in a direction (front-back direction) orthogonal to the left-right direction, which is the movement direction of the movable member 1000. The operation unit 1002 projects to the back side of the main body 736'through the slit 736a' provided on the rear wall of the main body 736'.

The drive unit 730 "is built in the front frame door 106', and therefore the movable member 1000 is provided in the front frame door 106'. In the case of this embodiment, the operation unit 1002 is on the front side of the front frame door 106'. It is arranged at a position where it cannot be operated from the rear side and can be operated from the back side. FIGS. 204 to 206 show the arrangement of the operation unit 1002, and show the back surface of the front frame door 106'.

The movable member 100 is located above the front frame door 106', and the operation unit 1002 projects from the slit 106a'formed in the back panel of the front frame door 106'to the back side of the front frame door 106'. .. Therefore, the operation unit 1002 cannot be operated from the front side of the front frame door 106', and can be operated from the back side with the front frame door 106' open. When the front frame door 106'is closed, the operation unit 1002 cannot be operated.

The operation unit 1002 is located at the upper part of the back surface of the front frame door 106'and at a position closer to the center than both ends in the left-right direction, does not interfere with other configurations, and is a hall clerk. It is located in a relatively easy-to-operate position where it can be operated while standing.

The drive unit 730 "is built into the front frame door 106'to be difficult to see as a whole, and of its components, substantially only the operation unit 1002 is exposed. However, the drive unit 730" is exposed through the slit 106a'. In some cases, a part of the "" can be seen. For example, although the regulation unit 1001 is difficult to see, a part of the "regulatory unit 1001" may be visible.

205 and 206 include an enlarged view of the operation unit 1002 exposed on the back surface of the front frame door 106'. FIG. 205 shows the case where the movable member 1000 is in the regulated position, and FIG. 106 shows the case where the movable member 1000 is in the released position. Each case is shown.

The surface of the operation unit 1002 constitutes an operation surface in which a plurality of irregularities arranged in the left-right direction are engraved. A hall clerk (game clerk) or the like can move the fingertip to the left or right while pressing it against the operation surface, and the unevenness suppresses the fingertip from slipping. As shown in FIG. 205, when the regulation unit 1001 is in the regulation position, the operation unit 1002 is located on one end side in the left-right direction of the slit 106a', and as shown in FIG. 206, the regulation unit 1001 is in the release position. In the case of, the operation unit 1002 is located on the other end side in the left-right direction of the slit 106a'. Whether the regulation unit 1001 is in the regulated state or the non-regulated state corresponds to the position of the operation unit 1002. Therefore, the hall clerk or the like confirms the position of the operation unit 1002 without looking inside the drive unit 730. It may be possible to recognize the state of the regulation unit 1001, which may be convenient for inspection.

207 to 209 show a state in which the movable member 1000 is moved from the state of FIG. 203 and the regulation unit 1001 is moved to the release position. The movement of the movable member 1000 is performed by driving the second drive unit 752'or by manually operating the operation unit 1002 by a hall clerk or the like. The movable member 1000 can also be moved from the state of FIG. 207 to the state of FIG. 203 by driving the second drive unit 752'or by manually operating the operation unit 1002 by a hall clerk or the like. ..

In the case of the present embodiment, since the regulation by the regulation unit 1001 can be released by the manual operation on the operation unit 1002, the workability is improved when the hall clerk or the like inspects the transmission unit 700'. You may be able to. Manual operation of the operation unit 1002 can be performed regardless of whether the pachinko machine 100 is energized or de-energized. , Cleaning of dust, etc.).

Further, since the operator can perform the regulation by the regulation unit 1001 by manually operating the operation unit 1002, it is transparent in advance when the game console moves on the factory line or is transported by a vehicle. It may be possible to prevent damage during movement by putting the unit 700'in a regulated state.

203 and 207 show the drive unit 730 "in the state where the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position, and FIG. 208 shows the drive unit 730" in the state where the transmission unit 700'is in the middle position. FIG. 209. Indicates the drive unit 730 ”in which the transmissive unit 700'is in the maximum moving position.

As shown in FIGS. 203 and 207, when the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position, the driven unit 748' is the rear end portion (rear side of the pachinko machine 100) of the movement range (shaft 756') in the front-rear direction. ). Further, as shown in FIG. 203, when the movable member 1000 is in the regulated position, the driven portion 748'contacts the regulated portion 1001 and its movement is restricted.

When the first position detection sensor 758a'detects the first detection piece 748c', the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the transmission unit 700'is in the initial position. Further, in the state of FIG. 203, the third position detection sensor 1010 detects the third detection piece 1004, so that the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the regulation unit 1001 is in the regulation position.

In the initial position, the guide shaft 708A'is located at the rear end of the guide shaft 708A', whereby the transmission unit 700'is housed inside the front frame door 106' as shown in FIG. It is difficult to recognize that the transmissive unit 700'is movable (in any of the front view, the perspective view, and the top view).

As shown in FIG. 207, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the second drive unit 752'is driven and the drive gear 752a' is rotated counterclockwise, the movable member 1000 moves to the left and reaches the release position. Moving. The regulation unit 1001 is separated from the driven unit 748'(non-contact), and the movement restriction of the driven unit 748', that is, the transmission unit 700' is released. When the movable member 1000 moves to the release position, the third position detection sensor 1010 does not detect the third detection piece 1004, so that the first sub-control unit 400 grasps that the regulation unit 1001 is in the release position.

As shown in FIG. 208, the movable driven portion 748'naturally begins to move forward under the weight of the transmissive portion unit 700'. In the figure, it can be confirmed that the transmission unit 700'protrudes from the decorative member DB.

As shown in FIG. 209, when the transmissive unit 700'is in the maximum moving position, the driven unit 748' is located at the front end (front side of the pachinko machine 100) of the moving range (shaft 756') in the front-rear direction. do. Further, in this state, the second position detection sensor 758b'detects the second detection piece 748d', so that the first sub-control unit 400 knows that the transmission unit 700'is in the maximum moving position. At the maximum moving position, the transmissive unit 700'is in a forward leaning posture in which the upper portion thereof protrudes greatly forward from the front frame door 106'. In FIG. 209, it can be confirmed that the transmissive unit 700'largely protrudes from the decorative member DB.

After the transmissive unit 700'has moved to the maximum moving position, the player can push the transmissive unit 700'backward to return the transmissive unit 700' to the initial position, and play the transmissive unit 700'. It can function as a button that can be operated by a person.

When the player presses a predetermined operation button or a predetermined period elapses after the transparent unit 700'moves to the moving position regardless of the player's operation (the first sub-control unit 400 performs the predetermined period). When the second detection piece 748d'is detected by the second position detection sensor 758b'), the first drive unit 738' is driven to move the driven unit 748' to the initial position shown in FIG. 207. be able to. As a result, the transmissive unit 700'also returns to the initial position.

When the driven unit 748'returns to the initial position, the first sub-control unit 400 detects the first detection piece 748c'by the first position detection sensor 758a', and drives the movable member 1000 by driving the second drive unit 752'. Move to the regulated position to regulate the movement of the driven unit 748'. The movement of the movable member 1000 to the regulated position is recognized by the first sub-control unit 400 when the third position detection sensor 1010 detects the third detection piece 1004.

<Summary of Embodiment F>
F1. The game console of the above embodiment
Movable bodies (eg 700') and
With a regulation unit (for example, 1001) that can regulate the movement of the movable body,
With the operation unit (for example, 1002),
It is a game table equipped with
The regulation by the regulation unit can be released by operating the operation unit (for example, FIGS. 207-209).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by regulation and deregulation of the movement of the movable body. Further, since the restriction on the movement operation of the movable body can be released by operating the operation unit, the workability of the inspection of the movable body may be improved.

F2. The game console of the above embodiment
The operation unit is an operation unit provided at a position where the player cannot operate (for example, FIG. 204-206).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, a game clerk or the like other than the player may be able to inspect the movable body.

F3. The game console of the above embodiment
The operation unit is located in the first position when the regulation unit is in the regulated state (for example, FIG. 203).
The operating unit is located in a second position when the regulated unit is in an unregulated state (eg, FIGS. 207-209).
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the state of the restricting unit may be confirmed by the position of the operating unit.

F4. The game console of the above embodiment
The operation unit is an operation unit that can be operated when the game console is not energized.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, maintenance of the game console may be possible even when the power is not turned on.

F5. The game console of the above embodiment
A drive unit (for example, 752') whose position of the regulation unit can be changed,
A control unit (for example, 400) capable of controlling the drive unit is provided.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the drive unit may release the regulation of the regulation unit and perform an effect by moving the movable body.

F6. The game console of the above embodiment
When the regulation unit is in the regulated state, the regulation unit is in the non-regulation state by the operation to the operation unit.
When the regulated unit is in the non-regulated state, the regulated unit is put into the regulated state by operating the operation unit.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to switch between the regulated state and the non-regulated state of the regulated unit by operating the operation unit.

F7. The game console of the above embodiment
When the regulation unit is in the regulated state, the first operation on the operation unit puts the regulation unit in the non-regulation state.
When the regulated unit is in the non-regulated state, the regulated unit is put into the regulated state by the second operation on the operation unit.
The first operation is different from the second operation.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to switch between the regulated state and the non-regulated state of the regulated unit by different operations on the operation unit.

F8. The game console of the above embodiment
The movable body is a movable body provided at a position where the player can come into contact with the movable body.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, the movable body can be moved without being damaged, and dust in the operating range of the movable body may be removed.

F9. The game console of the above embodiment
The movable body can be operated by the player.
It is characterized by that.

According to this configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by operating the movable body.

F10. The game console of the above embodiment
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.

F11. The game console of the above embodiment
It's a slot machine,
It is characterized by that.

F12. The game console of the above embodiment can also adopt the following configurations.

For example, the regulation unit may be located at the regulation position when the operation unit is in the non-operation state, and may be located at the non-regulation position when the operation unit is in the operation state.

For example, the regulation unit may be located at the non-regulation position only when the operation unit is in the operating state. When the operating portion is not in the operating state, it may be positioned at the restricted position by, for example, urging an elastic member such as a spring.

For example, the operation unit may be an operation unit whose position can be changed in at least one of the left-right direction, the up-down direction, the front-back direction, and the plane direction parallel to the game board or the door.

For example, the operation unit may be an operation unit whose position can be changed along at least one of a straight track, a curved track, and an arc track.

For example, the movable body may be configured to be movable by its own weight when the regulation by the regulation unit is released. Further, the movable body provided with the second driving unit may be a movable body that can be moved by driving the second driving unit.

For example, the movable body may be a movable body that performs an operation as a warning effect. Alternatively, the movable body may be a movable body that operates as a look-ahead notice effect. Alternatively, the movable body may be a movable body that performs an operation as an island simultaneous effect. Alternatively, the movable body may be a movable body that operates as a definite effect of an advantageous state (for example, big hit, probable big hit, big bonus, regular bonus, AT, RT, ART).

For example, when the movable body is operated, another movable body may be operated.

For example, the movable body may include a display unit. The display unit may be provided with a light emitting element such as an LED, or may be provided with an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

For example, the number of regulation units that regulate the movable body may be only one, two, or three or more.

For example, the number of movable bodies whose movement is restricted by the regulation unit may be only one, may be two, or may be three or more.

For example, the operation unit may have an operation surface in which a plurality of irregularities are engraved.

For example, a main body (for example, 104) and a door body (for example, 106') that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body are provided, and the operation unit is provided on the door body and is operated from the back side of the door body. It may be arranged in a possible position (eg, FIG. 204). The operation unit may be arranged at a position inoperable from the front side of the door body. The restricting portion may be invisible from the front side of the door body and difficult to see from the back side.

For example, the restricting unit and the operating unit may be an integral movable member (for example, 1000). In the movable member, the restricting portion may be a portion wider than the operating portion.

For example, the drive unit may include a motor and a rack-pinion mechanism. The rack of the rack-pinion mechanism may be provided on the movable member (for example, 1003).

Claims (5)

It is a game table equipped with a movable body that can move.
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means, and is a movable body.
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means, and is
The movable body is a movable body having a driving means, and is
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion, and is a movable body.
The movable body is a movable body having a second movable portion, and is a movable body.
The first movable portion is a movable portion capable of executing the first movable operation by driving the driving means.
In a certain operation intermediate state of the first movable operation, the first light emitting means does not overlap with the first movable portion.
In the certain operating state, the second light emitting means does not overlap with the first moving portion.
In the operation end state of the first movable operation, the first light emitting means does not overlap with the first movable portion.
In the operation end state, said second light emitting means is Ri and Do heavy said first movable part,
In a state prior to the certain operating state, the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable portion.
In the previous state, the second light emitting means does not overlap with the first moving portion.
At the end of the operation, the second light emitting means does not overlap with the second moving portion.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
Substrate on which the first light emitting means is mounted, in certain conditions, Ri other light emitting substrate and Do heavy,
The other light emitting substrate is a substrate capable of performing an operation by driving the driving means.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The second movable portion is a movable portion that may overlap with the first movable portion.
The second movable portion is a movable portion that may not overlap with the first movable portion.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

Images